Senator O`Connor Senator O`Connor Phase 2 - Struct

Transcription

TENDER No.: P-xxx-xx
Tender No. 0-001-12
Senator O’Connor
Phase 2 - Estate House
Addition and Renovation
Renovations
novations
Toronto Catholic District School Board
50 Rowena Drive
Toronto, Ontario
Project Manual –
KMAI Project # 09-010 Phase 2
September 22, 2011
Kearns Mancini Architects Inc.
One Atlantic Avenue
Suite 104
Toronto, Ontario
M6K 3E7
Tel: 416 536-5666
Fax: 416 536-8626
These documents shall only be used for the purpose
Indicated below.
Review
Bid
Contract
Construction
X
Specifications
PROJECT MANUAL
PROJECT:
Senator O’Connor
Estate House Addition and Renovations
50 ROWENA DRIVE
TORONTO, ONTARIO
OWNER:
CONSULTANT:
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
Tender No. P-001-12
KEARNS MANCINI ARCHITECTS
ONE ATLANTIC AVENUE, SUITE 104
TORONTO, ONTARIO M6K 3E7
TEL: 416-536-5666
FAX: 416-536-8626
CONSULTANT'S PROJECT NO:
DATE:
09-100 – Phase 2
SEPTEMBER 22, 2011
SUBCONSULTANTS
STRUCTURAL:
Read Jones Christoffersen Structural Engineers
TEL:
FAX:
SITE SERVICES:
Valdor Engineering Inc.
TEL:
FAX:
MECHANICAL:
416-977 5335
416-977-1427
905-264-0054
905-264-0069
GPY + Associates Engineering Inc.
TEL: 905-475-3138
FAX: 905-475-3140
MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL:
HCC Engineering Limited
TEL: 416- 932-2423
FAX: 416-932-2156
DOCUMENT 00007 - SEALS
CATEGORY
SEAL & SIGNATURE
ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTANT'S SEAL
This seal governs all Documents and Sections of these
Specifications, except for all Sections listed below.
TCDSB - Instructions to Bidders
TCDSB - Supplementary Conditions and
Amendments to the CCDC2 2008
General Conditions
STRUCTURAL SUBCONSULTANT'S SEAL
This seal governs:
MECHANICAL SUBCONSULTANT'S SEAL
This seal governs:
Division 15 - Mechanical
CATEGORY
SEAL & SIGNATURE
DOCUMENT 00007 - SEALS
ELECTRICAL SUBCONSULTANT'S SEAL
This seal governs:
Division 16 - Electrical
CIVIL SUBCONSULTANT'S SEAL
This seal governs:
Section 02500 - Utility Services
END
DOCUMENT 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROJECT MANUAL
VOLUME 1
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Document 00007 - Seals
00010 - Table of Contents
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Part 1
TCDSB- Instructions to Bidders
Part 2
TCDSB- Supplementary Conditions and Amendments to the CCDC2 2008 General Conditions
Part 3
CCDC 2 2008
SPECIFICATIONS
Consultant Designations
Kearns Mancini
Read Jones Christoffersen
GPY Engineering
HCC Engineering
Valdor Civil Engineering
KMA
RJC
GPY
HCC
VCE
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section
01050 - General
01090 - Abbreviations
01210 - Allowances
01310 - Project Coordination
01320 - Project Progress Documentation
01330 - Submittals
01350 - Special Project Requirements
01410 - Regulatory Requirements
01450 - Quality Control
01500 - Temporary Facilities
01600 - Product Requirements
01700 - Execution Requirements
01740 - Cleaning
01770 - Project Closeout
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK
Section
02220 - Selective Demolition
KMA
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
Section
03010 - Inspection and Testing
Section
03100 - Formwork
Section
03300 - Cast-in-place Concrete
RJC
RJC
RJC
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section
04060
Mortar and Grout
04200
New Masonry
KMA
KMA
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section
05120
Structural Steel
Section
05310
Steel Deck
Section
05500
Metal Fabrications
RJC
RJC
KMA
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section
06100 - Rough Carpentry
06200
Finish Carpentry
KMA
KMA
PROJECT NO. 09-100 - Phase 2
22/09/2011
KMAI
00010-1
DOCUMENT 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
06300
Cabinet Work
06400 - Architectural Woodwork Restoration
KMA
KMA
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section
07110
Interior Damprpoofing
07160
Cementitious Waterproofing
07200
Thermal Insulation
07270
Air.Vapour Barriers
07840
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
07500
Membrane Roofing
07620
Flashing & Sheet Metal
07920 - Sealants
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
DIVISION 8 – WINDOWS & DOORS
Section
08110
Steel Doors and Frames
08120
Aluminium Doors and Frames
08210
Wood Doors and Frames
08520
Aluminium Storm Windows
08590
Wood Window and Door Restoration
08710
Door Hardware
08800
Miscellaneous Glazing
08910
Glazed Curtain Wall
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section
09250 - Gypsum Board
09280
Plaster Restoration
09310
Ceramic Tile
09390
Tile Restoration
09655
Resilient Flooring
09690
Wood Floor – New & Restored
09675
Waterproof Flooring
09900
Painting
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
KMA
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Section
10115
Markerboards
Section
10200
Louvers and Vents
Section
10800
Washroom Accessories
KMA
KMA
KMA
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT not used
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Section
12490
Window Shades
KMA
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
-
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING DEVICES
14210` Accessibility Elevator
KMA
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
Mechanical Specifications contained in Mechanical Drawing Package
GPY
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
All Sections
HCC
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
00010-2
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT
SCHOOL BOARD
AMENDMENTS TO CCDC2-2008
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Tender No. P-001-12
Tender for Addition, Renovation and
Restoration to the Senator O’Connor
Estate House
(i)
2266168.2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ...........................................1
1.1 article a-5 - payment ...................................................................................................1
1.2 ARTICLE A-6 – RECEIPT AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING ....1
2.
DEFINITIONS .....................................................................................................................1
3.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT ......................2
3.1 GC 1.1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS......................................................................2
3.2 GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT ................................................................3
3.3 GC 2.4 - DEFECTIVE WORK ..................................................................................4
3.4 GC 3.1 - CONTROL OF THE WORK ......................................................................4
3.5 GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS .............4
3.6 GC 3.4 - DOCUMENT REVIEW ..............................................................................4
3.7 GC 3.5 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ................................................................5
3.8 GC 3.6 - SUPERVISION ...........................................................................................6
3.9 GC 3.7 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS.................................................6
3.10 GC 3.8 - LABOUR AND PRODUCTS .....................................................................7
3.11 GC 3.9 - DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE....................................................................8
3.12 GC 3.10 - SHOP DRAWINGS ..................................................................................8
3.13 GC 3.14 – STANDARD OF CARE ...........................................................................8
3.14 GC 3.15 OCCUPANCY OF THE WORK...............................................................9
3.15 GC 3.16 – CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR
SYSTEMS............................................................................................................................9
3.16 GC 4.1 - CASH ALLOWANCES ............................................................................10
3.17 GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER ............10
3.18 GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ....................................10
3.19 GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT ..........................................................................11
3.20 GC 5.4 - SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK .............................11
3.21 GC 5.5 - PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE
OF THE WORK ................................................................................................................12
3.22 GC 5.6 - PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK ........................................12
3.23 GC 5.7 - FINAL PAYMENT ...................................................................................13
3.24 GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER ....................................................................................13
3.25 GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE ............................................................................15
3.26 GC 6.4 - CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS .....................................16
3.27 GC 6.5 - DELAYS ...................................................................................................16
3.28 GC 7.1 - OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK,
OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT...............................................................................17
3.29 GC 7.2 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK OR
TERMINATE THE CONTRACT .....................................................................................17
3.30 GC 8.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT .................................................18
3.31 GC 8.2 - NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION .........................18
3.32 GC 8.3 - RETENTION OF RIGHTS .......................................................................19
3.33 GC 9.1 - PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ........................................19
3.34 GC 9.2 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES .........................................20
3.35 GC 9.4 - CONSTRUCTION SAFETY ....................................................................21
3.36 GC 9.5 - MOULD ....................................................................................................21
( ii )
2266168.2
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.41
3.42
3.43
3.44
3.45
3.46
3.47
3.48
3.49
GC 10.1 - TAXES AND DUTIES ...........................................................................22
GC 10.2 - LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES ...........................................22
INDEMNIFICATION ..............................................................................................23
GC 12.2 - WAIVER OF CLAIMS ...........................................................................23
GC 12.3 - WARRANTY ..........................................................................................24
OTHER PROVISIONS ............................................................................................24
GC 13.1 - OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS ............................................................24
GC 13.2 - CONSTRUCTION LIENS ......................................................................24
GC 13.3 - CONTRACTOR DISCHARGE OF LIABILITIES ...............................25
GC 13.4 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS .......................................................................25
GC 13.5 - DAILY REPORTS/DAILY LOGS .........................................................25
GC 13.6 - NEUTRAL APPOINTING AUTHORITY .............................................26
GC 13.7 - PUBLIC STATEMENTS .......................................................................26
ADDENDA
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
( iii )
2266168.2
Amendments to CCDC2-2008
Supplementary Conditions
April 2009
1 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
AMENDMENTS TO THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT, CCDC2-2008
The Standard Construction Document for Stipulated Price Contract, English version, consisting
of the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Definitions, and General Conditions of the
Stipulated Price Contract, Parts 1 to 12 inclusive, governing same is hereby made part of these
Contract Documents, with the following amendments, additions and modifications:
1.
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
1.1
ARTICLE A-5 - PAYMENT
1.1.1
Amend paragraph 5.1.3, in the first line, by deleting the words "the issuance of the"
and replacing them with "receipt of the Consultant's".
1.1.2
Delete paragraph 5.3.1 and replace it with the following:
"Should either party fail to make payments as they become due under the terms of the Contract or
in an award by arbitration or a court, interest shall also become due and payable on such unpaid
amounts at 2% above the prime rate. Such interest shall be compounded on a monthly basis. The
prime rate shall be the rate of interest quoted by [named of chartered lending institution] for
prime business loans as it may change from time to time."
1.2
1.2.1
ARTICLE A-6 – RECEIPT AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING
Delete paragraph 6.1 and replace it with the following:
"Notices in Writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant shall be considered to
have been received by the addressee on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or by commercial
courier or if sent during normal business hours by fax and addressed as set out below. Such
Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the next business day if sent
by fax after normal business hours or if sent by overnight commercial courier. Such Notices in
Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the fifth Working Day following the
date of mailing, if sent by pre-paid registered post, when addressed as set out below. An address
for a party may be changed by Notice in Writing to the other party setting out the new address in
accordance with this Article."
2.
2.1.1
DEFINITIONS
Amend Definition 4, "Consultant", by adding the following to the end of that
Definition:
"For purposes of the Contract, the terms "Consultant", "Architect" and "Engineer" shall be
considered synonymous."
2.1.2
Add a new Definition 27, Act, as follows:
"'Act' means the Construction Lien Act (Ontario)."
2.1.3
2266168.2
Add a new Definition 28, "Environmental Programs", as follows:
April 2009
2 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
"'Environmental Programs' means the environmental plans, programs, procedures and
requirements of the Owner. The Environmental Programs incorporate Owner’s infection control
program including measures to suppress dust and noise and to avoid conditions likely to propagate
mould or fungus of any kind."
2.1.4
Add a new Definition 29, OHSA, as follows:
"'OHSA' means the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario)."
2.1.5
Add a new Definition 30, Submittals, as follows:
"27. Submittals
Submittals are documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the
Contractor, such as:
Shop Drawings, interference drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or
characteristics, before the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the
Work; and
Record Drawings and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance
of the Work.
2.1.6
Add a new Definition 31, WSIB, as follows:
"'WSIB' means the Work Place Safety & Insurance Board."
3.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT
Where a General Condition or paragraph of the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price
Contract is deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the numbering of the remaining General
Conditions or paragraphs shall remain unchanged, and the numbering of the deleted item will be
retained, unused.
3.1
3.1.1
GC 1.1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Add the following to the end of paragraph 1.1.6:
"The Specifications are divided into divisions and sections for convenience but shall be read as a
whole and neither such division nor anything else contained in the Contract Documents will be
construed to place responsibility on the Consultant to settle disputes among the Subcontractors
and Suppliers in respect to such divisions. The Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and are
intended to convey the scope of the Work and indicate general and appropriate locations,
arrangement and sizes of fixtures, equipment and outlets. The Contractor shall obtain more
accurate information about the locations, arrangement and sizes from study and coordination of
the Drawings, including shop Drawings and shall become familiar with conditions and spaces
affecting these matters before proceeding with the Work. Where site conditions require reasonable
minor changes in indicated locations and arrangements, the Contractor shall make such changes at
no additional cost to the Owner. Similarly, where known conditions or existing conditions
interfere with new installation and require relocation, the Contractor shall include such relocation
in the Work. The Contractor shall arrange and install fixtures and equipment in such a way as to
conserve as much headroom and space as possible. The schedules are that portion of the Contract
2266168.2
April 2009
3 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Documents wherever located and whenever issued, compiling information of similar content and
may consist of Drawings, tables and/or lists."
3.1.2
Add new subparagraph 1.1.7.5:
"1.1.7.5 In case of discrepancies, noted materials and annotations shall take precedence over
graphic indications in the Contract Documents."
3.1.3
Delete paragraph 1.1.8 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 1.1.8:
"1.1.8
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
The Owner will make available to the Contractor, internet access to electronic copies of
the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for printing hard copies of the
documents.
GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT
Amend paragraph 2.2.7 by deleting the words “Except with respect to GC 5.1 –
FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER.”
Amend paragraph 2.2.13 by adding the following to the end of that paragraph:
“If, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Supplemental Instruction involves an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Time, the Contractor shall, within ten (10) Working Days of
receipt of a Supplemental Instruction provide the Consultant with a written notice to that effect.
In the event that the Contractor needs additional information to determine whether a Supplemental
Instruction involves an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the Contractor
may issue a written request to the Consultant seeking such additional information. Following
receipt of such information the Contractor shall, within ten (10) Working Days of receipt of such
additional information, provide the Consultant with the written notice described in the first
sentence of this paragraph 2.2.13 if, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Supplemental Instruction
involves an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. Failure to provide written
notification within the time stipulated in this paragraph 2.2.13 shall be deemed an acceptance of
the Supplemental Instruction by the Contractor without adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Time. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, every item on the Drawings shall
be deemed as included within the scope of the Work unless noted “not in contract”.”
3.2.3
Add new paragraphs 2.2.19 and 2.2.20 as follows:
“2.2.19 Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Supplier or other third party shall have
any claim against the Consultant as a result of the performance or non-performance of the
Consultant’s services. The Contractor shall include this provision in any Contracts it
makes with its Subcontractors, Suppliers and others and shall require such
Subcontractors, Suppliers and others to include the same term in their Contracts with
sub-Subcontractors, sub-suppliers and others.
2.2.20
2266168.2
The Specifications are divided into divisions and sections for convenience but shall be
read as a whole and neither such division nor anything else contained in the Contract
Documents will be construed to place responsibility on the Consultant to settle disputes
among Subcontractors and Suppliers in respect to such divisions.”
April 2009
4 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
3.3.1
GC 2.4 - DEFECTIVE WORK
Amend paragraph 2.4.1 by adding the following sentence to the end of the existing
paragraph:
"The Contractor shall rectify, in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the Consultant, all
defective Work and deficiencies throughout the Work, whether or not they are specifically
identified by the Consultant.
3.3.2
Amend paragraph 2.4.2 by adding the following sentence to the end of the existing
paragraph:
“The Contractor shall prioritize the correction of any defective Work which, in the sole discretion
of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operation of the Owner.”
3.4
3.4.1
GC 3.1 - CONTROL OF THE WORK
Add new paragraph 3.1.3:
"3.1.3
3.5
Prior to commencing individual procurement, fabrication and construction activities, the
Contractor shall verify, at the Place of the Work, all relevant measurements and levels
necessary for proper and complete fabrication, assembly and installation of the Work and
shall further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions are not included or exact
locations are not apparent, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant in
writing and obtain written instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any
part of the affected Work."
GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS
3.5.1
Delete subparagraphs 3.2.2.1 and 3.2.2.2 in their entirety.
3.5.2
Delete paragraph 3.2.3.2 and replace it with the following:
“3.2.3.2 Coordinate and schedule the activities and work of other contractors and Owner’s own
forces with the Work of the Contractor and connect as specified or shown in the Contract
Documents;”
3.5.3
Add new subparagraph 3.2.3.4:
"3.2.3.4 Subject to GC 9.4 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY, for the Owner’s own forces and for
other Contractors, assume overall responsibility for compliance with all aspects of the
applicable health and safety legislation in the Place of the Work, including all of the
responsibilities of the constructor under the OHSA."
3.6
3.6.1
GC 3.4 - DOCUMENT REVIEW
"3.4.1
2266168.2
The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to the
Consultant any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Such
review by the Contractor shall comply with the standard of care described in GC3.14
STANDARD OF CARE. Except for its obligation to make such review and report the
April 2009
5 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
result, the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or to the
Consultant for the accuracy of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be
liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the
Contract Documents, which the Contractor could not reasonably have discovered. If the
Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected until the Contractor
has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant."
3.6.2
"3.4.2
3.7
3.7.1
If the Contractor finds discrepancies in and/or omissions from the Contract Documents
or has any doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof, the Contractor must
immediately notify the Consultant, who will provide written instructions or explanations.
Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for oral instructions."
GC 3.5 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
“3.5.1.1 prior to site mobilization, submit to the Owner and the Consultant for their approval a
construction schedule indicating critical milestone dates for the Project using a
scheduling program which is the most current version of MS Project or Primavera, to
demonstrate that the Work will be performed in conformity with the Contract Time. The
Contractor shall provide the schedule information required by this paragraph 3.5.1.1 in
both electronic format and hard copy;”
3.7.2
“3.5.1.2 provide the expertise and resources, including manpower and equipment, as are necessary
to maintain progress under the construction schedule or any successor or revised schedule
approved by the Owner;”
3.7.3
“3.5.1.3 monitor the progress of the Work relative to the Construction Schedule, or any successor
or revised schedule approved by the Owner, update the schedule on a monthly basis, and
advise the Consultant in writing of any deviation from or delay in the construction
schedule or any other schedule; and”
3.7.4
Add a new paragraph 3.5.1.4 as follows:
“3.5.1.4 if after applying the expertise and resources required under paragraph 3.5.1.2, the
Contractor forms the opinion that there has been a deviation from or a delay in the
construction schedule or any other schedule cannot be recovered by the Contractor, it
shall, in the same notice provided under paragraph 3.5.1.3, indicate to the Consultant if
the Contractor intends to apply for an extension of Contract Time.”
3.7.5
Add a new paragraph 3.5.2 as follows:
“3.5.2
2266168.2
Without limiting the other obligations of the Contractor under GC 3.5, the Contractor
shall not amend the construction schedule without the prior written consent of the Owner.
In addition, at each site construction meeting, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner
and the Consultant a two (2) week look-ahead schedule indicating the major activities to
be undertaken or constructed in such two (2) week period.”
April 2009
6 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.6
"3.5.3
3.8
3.8.1
GC 3.6 - SUPERVISION
"3.6.1
3.8.2
3.9
3.9.1
"3.6.3
The Owner acting reasonably, shall have the right to order the Contractor to remove from
the Project any representative or employee of the Contractor, Subcontractors or
Suppliers who, in the opinion of the Owner, are a detriment to the Project.
3.6.4
Where the Work is being carried out at or near an existing school which is still in
operation, the Owner has the discretion to require the Contractor to provide to the Owner
criminal background checks on all of the Contractor’s employees who will be providing
work or services at the Place of the Work and will require its Subcontractors and
Suppliers to provide criminal background checks on any of their employees who will be
providing work or services at the Place of the Work. Where such background checks
indicate that an employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor has a criminal record,
the Owner shall be entitled to cause the removal of that person from the Project pursuant
to paragraph 3.6.3 of these General Conditions."
GC 3.7 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
The Contractor agrees not to change Subcontractors without prior written approval of the
Owner, which approval will not be unreasonably withheld."
“3.7.7
2266168.2
The Contractor shall provide all necessary supervision and appoint competent
representatives who shall be in attendance at the Place of the Work while Work is being
performed. The appointed representatives shall not be changed except for valid reasons,
and upon the Contractor obtaining the Consultant's written consent, which consent will
not be unreasonably withheld."
Add new paragraphs 3.6.3, 3.6.4 and 3.6.5 as follows:
"3.7.2
3.9.2
If at any time it should appear to the Owner or the Consultant that the actual progress of
the Work is behind schedule or is likely to fall behind schedule, based on critical path
methodology, or if the Contractor has given notice of such to the Owner or the
Consultant pursuant to 3.5.1.3, the Contractor shall take appropriate steps to cause the
actual progress of the Work to conform to the schedule and shall produce and present to
the Owner and the Consultant a recovery plan demonstrating how the Contractor will
achieve the recovery of the schedule. If the Contractor intends to apply for a change in
the Contract Price in relation to a schedule recovery plan, the Contractor shall proceed
with PART 6 – CHANGES IN THE WORK. "
The Owner may assign to the Contractor, and the Contractor agrees to accept, any
Contract procured by the Owner for Work or services or Products required on the Project
that has been pre-tendered or pre-negotiated by the Owner.”
April 2009
7 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
3.10.1
GC 3.8 - LABOUR AND PRODUCTS
Amend paragraph 3.8.1 by adding the following sentence at the end of that paragraph:
“The Contractor represents and warrants that the Products provided in accordance with the
Contract Documents are not subject to any conditional sales Contracts and are not subject to any
security rights claimed or obtained by any third party which may subject any of the Products to
seizure and/or removal from the Place of the Work.”
3.10.2
“3.8.2
Products provided shall be new and shall conform to all current applicable specifications
of the Canadian Standards Association, Canadian Standards Board or General Standards
Board, ASTM, National Building Code, Ontario Building Code and all governmental
authorities having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work, unless otherwise specified.
Products which are not specified shall be of a quality consistent with those specified and
their use acceptable to the Consultant. Products brought on to the Place of the Work by
the Contractor shall be deemed to be the property of the Owner, but the Owner shall be
under no liability for loss thereof or damage thereto arising from any cause whatsoever,
and such Products shall be at the sole risk of the Contractor.”
3.10.3
Amend paragraph 3.8.3 by adding the words “agents, Subcontractors and Suppliers”
after the word “employees” toward the end of the first line.
3.10.4
Further amend paragraph 3.8.3 by adding the following three new sentences to the end
of that paragraph:
“Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor shall prepare and
implement the job site rules more particularly described in the Contract Documents. If no job site
rules are described in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall draft job site rules for the
review and approval of the Owner. Any such job site rules prepared by the Contractor shall be
consistent with the Contractor’s duties and obligations under the OHSA and shall also include
provisions making smoking and the consumption of alcohol or non-prescription drugs on the
Project site the subject of discipline proceedings and/or termination of employment.”
3.10.5
Add new paragraphs 3.8.4, 3.8.5 and 3.8.6 as follows:
“"3.8.4 The Contractor is responsible for the safe on-site storage of Products and their protection
(including Products supplied by the Owner and other Contractors to be installed under
the Contract) in such ways as to avoid dangerous conditions or contamination to the
Products or other persons or property and in locations at the Place of the Work to the
satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant. The Owner shall provide all relevant
information on the Products to be supplied by the Owner."
2266168.2
3.8.5
The Contractor shall not employ any persons on the Work whose labour affiliation, or
lack thereof, is incompatible with other labour employed in connection with the Work.
Any costs arising from labour disputes as a result of the employment of any such person
by the Contractor, its Subcontractors or Suppliers, shall be the sole expense of the
Contractor.
3.8.6
The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and its representatives and shall take all
reasonable and necessary actions to maintain stable and harmonious labour relations with
respect to the Work at the Place of the Work, including cooperation to attempt to avoid
Work stoppages, trade union jurisdictional disputes, and other labour disputes.”
April 2009
8 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.11
3.11.1
GC 3.9 - DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE
"3.9.1
3.12
The Contractor shall keep one copy of the current Contract Documents, Supplemental
Instructions, Contemplated Change Orders, Change Orders, Change Directives, Cash
Allowance Disbursement Authorizations, reviewed Shop Drawings, Submittals, reports
and records of meetings at the Place of the Work, in good order and available to the
Owner and Consultant."
GC 3.10 - SHOP DRAWINGS
3.12.1
Add the words "AND OTHER SUBMITTALS" to the Title after SHOP
DRAWINGS.
3.12.2
Add "and Submittals" after the words "Shop Drawings" in clauses 3.10.2, 3.10.4,
3.10.7, 3.10.8, 3.10.8.2, 3.10.9, 3.10.10, and 3.10.11.
3.12.3
"3.10.3 Prior to the first application for payment, the Contractor and the Consultant shall jointly
prepare a schedule of the dates for submission and return of Shop Drawings and any
Submittals.
3.12.4
Delete subparagraph 3.10.8.1 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 3.10.8.1:
"3.10.8.1 the Contractor has determined and correlated the field measurements with the Shop
Drawings and any Submittals and field construction conditions, Product requirements,
catalogue numbers and similar data, or will do so if not possible at that time, and
3.12.5
“3.10.12 The Consultant will review and return Shop Drawings and Submittals in accordance with
the schedule agreed upon in 3.10.3, or, in the absence of such schedule, with reasonable
promptness. If, for any reason, the Consultant cannot process them within the agreedupon schedule or with reasonable promptness, the Consultant shall notify the Contractor
and they shall meet to review and arrive at an acceptable revised schedule for processing.
The Contractor shall update the Shop Drawings and Submittals schedule to correspond to
changes in the construction schedule. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time
may be made only as provided in the Contract."
3.13
3.13.1
GC 3.14 – STANDARD OF CARE
Add new General Condition 3.14 as follows:
"3.14.1 In performing its services and obligations under the Contract, the Contractor shall
exercise a standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an
experienced and prudent Contractor supplying similar services for similar projects. The
Contractor acknowledges and agrees that throughout the Contract, the Contractor's
obligations, duties and responsibilities shall be interpreted in accordance with this
standard. The Contractor shall exercise the same standard of due care and diligence in
respect of any Products, personnel, or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner.
2266168.2
April 2009
9 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.14.2 The Contractor further represents, covenants and warrants to the Owner that:
3.14
3.14.1
.1
The personnel it assigns to the Project are appropriately experienced;
.2
It has a sufficient staff of qualified and competent personnel to replace its
designated supervisor and project manager, subject to the Owner’s approval, in
the event of death, incapacity, removal or resignation; and
.3
There are no pending, threatened or anticipated claims that would have a
material effect on the financial ability of the Contractor to perform its Work
under the Contract.”
GC 3.15 OCCUPANCY OF THE WORK
Add a new GC 3.15 as follows:
“GC 3.15 OCCUPANCY OF THE WORK
3.15.1 The Owner reserves the right to take possession of and use for any intended purpose any
portion or all of the undelivered portion of the Project, even though the Work may not
have reached Substantial Performance of the Work, provided that such taking of
possession and use will not interfere, in any material way, with the progress of the Work.
The taking of possession or use of any such portion of the Project shall not be deemed to
be the Owner’s acknowledgement or acceptance of the Work or Project, nor shall it
relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations under the Contract.
3.15.2 Where the Project contemplates Work by way of renovations in buildings which will be
in use or be occupied during the course of the Work, or where the Project involves Work
that is adjacent to a structure which is in use or is occupied, the Contractor, without in
any way limiting its responsibilities under this Contract, shall take all reasonable steps to
avoid interference with fire exits, building access and egress, continuity of electric power
and all other utilities, to suppress dust and noise, to avoid conditions likely to propagate
mould or fungus of any kind, and all other steps reasonably necessary to promote and
maintain the safety and comfort of the users and occupants of such structures or adjacent
structures. Without Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not permit any Worker
or Subcontractors to use any existing facilities including, without limitation, lavatories,
toilets, entrances and parking areas other than those designated by the Owner.”
3.15
3.15.1
GC 3.16 – CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR
SYSTEMS
Add a new GC 3.16 as follows:
“GC 3.16 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS
3.16.1 With the prior written approval of the Owner, the Contractor may make use of elements
of the mechanical and electrical systems or equipment comprising a permanent part of the
Work for the purpose of providing heat or power to the Project during the final stages of
construction. In such event, and before the issuance of the certificate of Substantial
Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall clean and make good, to the satisfaction of
the Consultant, such systems and equipment as it had been permitted to use. The
Contractor shall pay any and all costs associated with such use, cleaning and making
good.
2266168.2
April 2009
10 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.16.2 Where the Contractor has made use of elements of the mechanical and electrical systems
or equipment comprising a permanent part of the Work, as described in paragraph 3.16.1
above, the Contractor shall obtain, from the manufacturer or Supplier of the systems or
equipment used, a confirmation from such manufacturer or Supplier that the warranty on
such systems or equipment begins on the date of Substantial Performance of the Work
and is not impaired in scope or reduced in time by virtue of the Contractor’s use of such
systems or equipment.”
3.16
3.16.1
GC 4.1 - CASH ALLOWANCES
"4.1.4
3.16.2
“4.1.5
3.16.3
3.17.1
The unexpended total cash allowance amount shall be deducted from the Contract Price
by Change Order.”
"4.1.8
3.17
Where costs under a cash allowance exceed the amount of the allowance, unexpended
amounts from other cash allowances shall be reallocated at the Consultant's direction to
cover the shortfall."
The Owner reserves the right to call, or to have the Contractor call, competitive bids for
portions of the Work, to be paid for from cash allowances."
GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
Delete GC 5.1 in its entirety and replace it with “Intentionally left blank.”
3.17.2
Delete paragraph 5.1.2 in its entirety.
3.18
GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
3.18.1
Amend paragraph 5.2.3 by adding the following to the end of that paragraph:
“No amount claimed shall include Products delivered to the Place of the Work unless the Products
are free and clear of all security interests, liens, and other claims of third parties.”
3.18.2
Add to the end of paragraph 5.2.7 the following new sentence:
"Any Products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work shall
remain at the risk of the Contractor notwithstanding that title has passed to the Owner pursuant to
GC 13.1 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS."
3.18.3
Add new paragraph 5.2.8, 5.2.9 and 5.2.10:
"5.2.8
2266168.2
The Contractor shall submit, with each application for progress payment after the first, a
Statutory Declaration, on an original form of CCDC Document 9A-2001, stating that
payments in connection with the Work, as noted in the Statutory Declaration, have been
made to the end of the period immediately preceding that covered by the current
application.
April 2009
11 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5.2.9
The Contractor shall submit WSIB Clearance Certificate, with each application for
progress payment.
5.2.10
3.19
The Contractor shall prepare and maintain current as-built Drawings which shall consist
of the Drawings and Specifications revised by the Contractor during the Work, showing
changes to the Drawings and Specifications, which current as-built Drawings shall be
maintained by the Contractor and made available to the Consultant for review with each
application for progress payment. The Consultant reserves the right to retain a reasonable
amount for the value of the as-built Drawings not presented for review."
GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT
3.19.1
Delete from the first line of subparagraph 5.3.1.2, the words, "calendar days" and
substitute the words: "Working Days".
3.19.2
"5.3.1.3 The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor on account as provided in Article A-5
of the Agreement – PAYMENT no later than 10 Working Days after the date of a
certificate of payment issued by the Consultant."
3.19.3
“5.3.3
3.20
3.20.1
GC 5.4 - SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK
"5.4.3
3.20.2
2266168.2
If the Contractor fails to provide a statutory declaration as required by paragraph 5.2.8,
or if the Contractor fails to demonstrate compliance with GC 10.4 – WORKERS’
COMPENSATION, the Owner shall be entitled to deduct from amounts otherwise
payable to the Contractor an amount sufficient to cover any liability which it might incur
as a result of the Contractor’s failure to provide a statutory declaration or to demonstrate
compliance with GC 10.4.”
Immediately following the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the
Work, the Contractor, in consultation with the Consultant, shall establish reasonable
dates for finishing the Work and correcting deficient Work."
Add new paragraphs 5.4.4, 5.4.5 and 5.4.6:
"5.4.4
The Contractor shall publish, in a construction trade newspaper in the area of the location
of the Work, a copy of the Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work within
seven (7) days of receiving a copy of the Certificate signed by the Consultant, and the
Contractor shall provide suitable evidence of the publication to the Consultant and
Owner. If the Contractor fails to publish such notice, the Owner shall be at liberty to
publish and back charge the Contractor its reasonable costs for doing so.
5.4.5
Prior to submitting its application for Substantial Performance of the Work, the
Contractor shall submit to the Consultant all:
.1
guarantees,
.2
warranties,
April 2009
12 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
.3
certificates,
.4
testing and balancing reports,
.5
distribution system diagrams,
.6
maintenance, spare parts and operating manuals,
and other materials or documentation required to be submitted under the Contract,
together with written proof acceptable to the Owner and the Consultant that the Work has
been substantially performed in conformance with the requirements of municipal,
government and utilities authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall deliver the
materials and documentation listed in this paragraph 5.4.5 in an electronic format that is
readable on the Owner’s information technology infrastructure.
5.4.6
3.21
3.21.1
Where the Contractor is unable to deliver the documents and materials described in
paragraph 5.4.5, then, provided that none of the missing documents and materials
interferes, in a material way, with the use and occupancy of the Work, failure to deliver
shall not be grounds for the Consultant to refuse to certify Substantial Performance of the
Work. Any documents or materials not delivered in accordance with paragraph 5.4.5 shall
be delivered as provided in GC 5.7, "
GC 5.5 - PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE
OF THE WORK
Add new subparagraphs 5.5.1.3, 5.5.1.4 and 5.5.1.5:
"5.5.1.3 Submit a written request for release of holdback including a declaration that no written
notices of lien have been received by it.
5.5.1.4 Submit a Statutory Declaration CCDC 9A-2001.
5.5.1.5 Submit WSIB Clearance Certificate."
3.21.2
Delete from line 1 of paragraph 5.5.2, the words, "the statement" and substitute the
words "the documents".
3.21.3
Delete paragraph 5.5.3 in its entirety.
3.22
3.22.1
GC 5.6 - PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK
"5.6.4
2266168.2
For release of holdback on Subcontract Work which is 100% complete, prior to final
payment, the Contractor shall make application by written request for a review to
determine the date of completion of the Subcontract and shall submit such supporting
material as the Consultant may in his discretion require, and may include statutory
declarations from such persons and dealing with such matters as the Consultant requires.
Such material shall in any event include:
.1
Description of the scope of Work included in the Subcontract.
.2
Declaration of Last Supply by the Subcontractor as prescribed in subsection
31(5) of the Act (Form 5).
April 2009
13 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
.3
Certificate of Completion of Subcontract as prescribed in subsection 33(1) of
the Act (Form 7).
3.23
3.23.1
.4
WSIB Clearance Certificate for the Contractor, the Subcontractor concerned,
and any other subcontractors and suppliers who have provided any services to
the Subcontractor.
.5
Statutory declaration by an officer of the Subcontractor in the form CCDC
Document 9B - 2001.
.6
Contractor's written acknowledgement to the Owner that the requirements of the
Contract Documents will not be altered by early release of the holdback of the
completed Subcontracts.
.7
Confirmation by the bonding company that it has been notified of the intent to
claim early release of holdback and does not object."
GC 5.7 - FINAL PAYMENT
"5.7.1
When the Contractor considers that the Work is completed, the Contractor shall submit
an application for final payment. The Contractor's application for final payment shall be
accompanied by any documents or materials not yet delivered pursuant to paragraph 5.4.5
together with complete as-built Drawings in AutoCad 2008. Should the Contractor fail to
deliver any of the foregoing documents, the Owner shall be at liberty to withhold from
amounts otherwise payable to the Contractor, the sum of Thirty Thousand Dollars
($30,000.00) as security for the obligation of the Contractor to deliver the undelivered
documents."
3.23.2
Delete from the first line of paragraph 5.7.2 the words, "calendar days" and substitute
the words "Working Days".
3.23.3
Delete from the second line of paragraph 5.7.4 the words, "calendar days" and
substitute the words: "Working Days".
3.23.4
"5.7.5
3.24
3.24.1
2266168.2
As additional requirements for release of finishing construction lien holdback, the
Contractor shall submit the following documentation:
.1
Contractor's written request for release of holdback, including a declaration that
no written notices of lien have been received by it.
.2
Contractor's Statutory Declaration CCDC 9A-2001.
.3
Contractor's WSIB Clearance Certificate.
GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER
Add new paragraph 6.2.3 as follows:
April 2009
14 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
"6.2.3 The value of a change shall be determined in one or more of the following methods as
directed by the Owner:
.1
by estimate and acceptance of a lump sum.
.2
by unit prices established in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon. Unit
prices shall include overhead, profit, and other reasonable charges of the
Contractor and shall be the total cost to the Owner. Adjustment to the Contract
Price shall be based on a net quantity difference from the original quantity.
.3
by the amount, net of all credits, of time, materials and Products expended:
(1)
by a Subcontractor applying the labour charge out rates set out in the
wage schedule in the Contract Documents together with the actual
costs, without mark-up of materials and Products utilized in the
change, plus the Subcontractor's mark-up disclosed in the table below
which applies to material and Product costs only;
(2)
by the Contractor applying the labour charge out rates set out in the
wage schedule in the Contract Documents together with the actual
costs, without mark-up, of materials and products plus the mark-up
disclosed in the table below which applies to material and Product costs
only;
(3)
the Contractor shall be entitled to the Contractor mark-up in the table
below on the value of Subcontractor Work even where the
Subcontractor is not entitled to a mark-up on its labour charge out rates
pursuant to paragraph 6.2.3.3(1).
Change in the Contract
Price
Subcontractor Mark-Up (%)
(includes overhead and profit)
Contractor Mark-Up (%)
On Subcontractor Work
(includes overhead and profit)
$0 to no more than $25,000
10
10
$0 to no more than $50,000
10
7.5
$0 to in excess of $50,000
5
5
Interpretive Note: The mark-ups disclosed in the above table are flat not graduated. For
example, a Subcontractor performed change valued at $35,000 attracts a mark-up of 10% for
the Subcontractor and 7.5% for the Contractor. The table is not intended to provide one set of
mark-ups for the first $25,000 of the change and a lower set of mark-ups for the balance.
2266168.2
.4
where the Contractor self performs a change pursuant to paragraph 6.2.3.3(2), it
shall be entitled to the mark-ups described in the "Subcontractor Mark-Up (%)"
column above, subject to the limitation on the mark-up of labour costs described
in paragraph 6.2.3.3(2).
.5
the mark-ups described in paragraph 6.2.3.3 include all necessary supervision,
general account items, general clean-up, small tools, as-built Drawings and job
safety necessary to perform the change. Additional bonding cost is excluded
April 2009
15 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
from the mark-ups but may be included as a cost, using the value declared for
bonding by the Contractor in its bid to the Owner, unless otherwise agreed by
the parties."
3.25
3.25.1
GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE
Further amend paragraph 6.3.6.3 by adding the following to the end of that paragraph:
"Such allowance for overhead and profit shall be as described in paragraphs 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4."
3.25.2
Delete paragraph 6.3.7.1 the introductory language and replace it with the following:
.1
3.25.3
3.25.4
salaries, wages and benefits paid to personnel in the direct employ of the Contractor,
applying the labour rates set out in the wage schedule in the Contract Documents or as
otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor for personnel…"
Delete paragraphs 6.3.7.1(1), (2), (3) and (4) and replace them with the following:
"(1)
carrying out the Work, including necessary supervisory services;
(2)
intentionally left blank;
(3)
engaged in the preparation of Shop Drawings, fabrication Drawings,
coordination Drawings and Project record Drawings: or…
(4)
including clerical staff engaged in processing changes in the Work."
Add new paragraph 6.3.14 as follows:
"6.3.14 Without limitation, the cost of performing the Work attributable to the Change Directive
does not include:
2266168.2
.1
head office salaries and benefits and all other overhead or general expenses,
except only for the salaries, wages and benefits of personnel described in
paragraph 6.3.4.2 and the contributions, assessments or taxes referred to in
paragraphs 6.3.4.3;
.2
capital expenses and interest on capital;
.3
general clean-up, except where the performance of the Work in the Change
Directive causes specific additional clean-up requirements;
.4
wages paid for field supervision of Subcontractors;
.5
wages, salaries, rentals, or other expenses that exceed the rates that are standard
in the locality of the Place of the Work that are otherwise deemed unreasonable
by the Consultant;
.6
any costs or expenses attributable to the negligence, improper Work,
deficiencies, or breaches of Contract by the Contractor or SubContractor; and
.7
any cost of quality assurance, such as inspection and testing services, charges
levied by authorities, and any legal fees unless any such costs or fees are preapproved in writing by the Owner."
April 2009
16 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.26
3.26.1
GC 6.4 - CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS
“6.4.1
3.26.2
The Contractor confirms that, prior to tendering the Project, it carefully investigated the
Place of the Work to fully ascertain existing conditions, circumstances and limitations
affecting the Work, and applied to that investigation the degree of care and skill described
in paragraph 3.14.1. If the Contractor has not conducted such careful investigation, it is
deemed to assume all risk of conditions or circumstances now existing or arising in the
course of the Work which could make the Work more expensive or more difficult to
perform than was contemplated at the time the Contract was executed. No allowances
will be made for additional costs and no claims by the Contractor will be entertained in
connection with conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by such
investigation or other due diligence undertaken prior to the execution of the Contract.”
Amend paragraph 6.4.2 by adding a new first sentence which reads as follows:
“Having regard to paragraph 6.4.1, if the Contractor believes that the conditions of the Place of
the Work differ materially from those reasonably anticipated, or differ materially from those
indicated in the Contract Documents, or were concealed from discovery notwithstanding the
conduct of the investigation described in paragraph 6.4.1, it shall notify the Owner and Consultant
in writing no later than five (5) Working Days after the first observation of such conditions.”
3.26.3
Amend the existing second sentence of paragraph 6.4.2, in the second line, following
the word “materially”, by adding the words “or were concealed from discovery
notwithstanding the conduct of the investigation described in paragraph 6.4.1”.
3.26.4
Delete paragraph 6.4.3 and substitute the following:
“6.4.3
3.27
If the Consultant makes a finding pursuant to paragraph 6.4.2 that no change in the
Contract Price or Contract Time is justified, the Consultant shall report in writing the
reasons for this finding to the Owner and the Contractor.”
GC 6.5 - DELAYS
3.27.1
Delete the period at the end of paragraph 6.5.1, and substitute the following words ",
but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages."
3.27.2
Add new subparagraph 6.5.6.
6.5.6
3.27.3
2266168.2
If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an act or omission of the
Contractor or anyone employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, or by
any cause within the Contractor's control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for
such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide in consultation with the Contractor.
The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable costs incurred by the
Owner as the result of such delay, including all services required by the Owner from the
Consultant as a result of such delay by the Contractor and, in particular, the cost of the
Consultant's services during the period between the date of Substantial Performance of
the Work stated in Article A-1 herein as the same may be extended through the provisions
of these General Conditions and any later, actual date of Substantial Performance of the
Work achieved by the Contractor.”
Add new paragraphs 6.5.7 and 6.5.8 as follows:
April 2009
17 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
“6.5.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, maintenance and protection of the Work
in the event of any suspension of construction as a result of the delay described in
paragraphs 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3. In the event of such suspension, the Contractor shall be
reimbursed by the Owner for the reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor for such
care, maintenance and protection, but excluding the costs of the Contractor’s head office
personnel. The Contractor’s entitlement to costs pursuant to this paragraph 6.5.7, if any,
shall be in addition to amounts, if any, to which the Contractor is entitled pursuant to
paragraphs 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3.
6.5.8
3.28
3.28.1
3.29
3.29.1
Without limiting the obligations of the Contractor described in GC 3.2 –
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS and GC 9.4 –
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY, the Owner may, by Notice in Writing, direct the
Contractor to stop the Work where the Owner determines that there is an imminent risk
to the safety of persons or property at the Place of the Work. In the event that the
Contractor receives such notice, it shall immediately stop the Work and secure the
Project site. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time or
to an increase in the Contract Price unless the resulting delay, if any, would entitle the
Contractor to an extension of the Contract Time or the reimbursement of the
Contractor’s costs as provided in paragraphs 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3.”
GC 7.1 - OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK,
OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
Amend paragraph 7.1.2 by adding the words “or fails or neglects to maintain the latest
construction schedule” immediately following the word “properly” in the first line.
GC 7.2 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK OR
TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
Amend paragraph 7.2.2, in line 1, by deleting “20” and replacing it with “35”.
3.29.2
Delete subparagraph 7.2.3.1 in its entirety.
3.29.3
"7.2.2.3 the Owner fails to pay the Contractor when due the amount certified by the Consultant or
awarded by arbitration or a Court, except where the Owner has a bona fide claim for set
off, or"
3.29.4
3.29.5
Delete from line 2 of subparagraph 7.2.3.4, the words, "OF THE OWNER".
“7.2.5
3.29.6
2266168.2
If the default cannot be corrected within the 5 Working Days specified in paragraph 7.2.4,
the Owner shall be deemed to have cured the default if it
.1
commences the correction of the default within the specified time; and
.2
provides the Contractor with an acceptable schedule for such correction; and
.3
completes the correction in accordance with such schedule.”
April 2009
18 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
"7.2.6 If the Contractor terminates the Contract under the conditions described in this GC 7.2,
the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all Work performed to the date of
termination. The Contractor shall also be entitled to recover the direct costs associated
with termination, including the costs of demobilization, losses sustained on Products and
construction machinery and equipment. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any
recovery for special, indirect or consequential losses or loss of profit or loss of use."
3.30
3.30.1
GC 8.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT
Delete last sentence of 8.1.3 and substitute the following sentence:
"If it is subsequently determined that such instructions were at variance with the Contract
Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out
such instructions which the Contractor was required to do beyond the requirements of the
Contract Documents, including costs resulting from interruption of the Work."
3.31
GC 8.2 - NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION
3.31.1
Amend paragraph 8.2.1 by adding the words "...(the "Rules"), subject to amendments
to the Rules attached to these Supplementary Conditions as Appendix 2..." following
the term "Construction Disputes" in line 1.
3.31.2
Amend paragraph 8.2.4 by adding the words "…subject to the amendments to the
Rules made as described in paragraph 8.2.1", following the words "Construction
Disputes" in the last line.
3.31.3
Amend paragraph 8.2.7 by changing the number "10" in line 1 to "20".
3.31.4
“8.2.9
8.2.10
2266168.2
Within five days of receipt of the notice of arbitration by the responding party under
paragraph 8.2.6, the Owner and the Contractor shall give the Consultant a written notice
containing:
.1
a copy of the notice of arbitration
.2
a copy of supplementary conditions 8.2.9 to 8.2.15 of the Contract, and;
.3
any claims or issues which the Contractor or the Owner, as the case may be,
wishes to raise in relation to the Consultant arising out of the issues in dispute in
the arbitration.
The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Consultant may elect, within ten days of
receipt of the notice under paragraph 8.2.9, to become a full party to the arbitration under
paragraph 8.2.6 if the Consultant:
.1
has a vested or contingent financial interest in the outcome of the arbitration;
.2
gives the notice of election to the Owner and the Contractor before the arbitrator
is appointed;
April 2009
19 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
.3
agrees to be a party to the arbitration within the meaning of the rules referred to
in paragraph 8.2.6; and,
.4
3.32
3.32.1
8.2.11
If an election is made under paragraph 8.2.10, the Consultant may participate in the
appointment of the arbitrator and notwithstanding the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6,
the time period for reaching agreement on the appointment of the arbitrator shall begin to
run from the date the Owner receives a copy of the notice of arbitration.
8.2.12
The arbitrator in the arbitration in which the Consultant has elected under paragraph
8.2.10 to become a full party may:
3.33.1
.1
on application of the Owner or the Contractor, determine whether the
Consultant has satisfied the requirements of paragraph 8.2.10; and
.2
make any procedural order considered necessary to facilitate the addition of the
Consultant as a party to the arbitration.
8.2.13
The provisions of paragraph 8.2.9 shall apply mutatis mutandis to written notice to be
given by the Consultant to any sub-Consultant.
8.2.14
In the event of notice of arbitration given by a Consultant to a sub-consultant, the subconsultant is not entitled to any election with respect to the proceeding as outlined in
8.2.10, and is deemed to be bound by the arbitration proceeding."
GC 8.3 - RETENTION OF RIGHTS
Add new subparagraph 8.3.3:
"8.3.3
3.33
agrees to be bound by the arbitral award made in the arbitration.
If the Owner gives the Notice in Writing described in paragraph 8.2.6 to have a dispute
resolved by arbitration, the Contractor agrees that this paragraph 8.3.3 shall be construed
as a formal consent to the stay of any lien proceedings until an award is rendered in the
arbitration or such dispute is otherwise resolved between the parties. In no event shall the
Contractor be deprived of its right to enforce its lien against the Project should the
Owner fail to satisfy any arbitral award against it in full on the dispute in respect of
which the lien proceedings were commenced. Provided nothing in this paragraph 8.3.3
shall prevent the Contractor from taking the steps required by the Act to preserve and/or
perfect a lien to which it may be entitled."
GC 9.1 - PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
"9.1.1.1 errors in the Contract Documents which the Contractor could not have discovered
applying the standard of care described in GC3.14 STANDARD OF CARE."
3.33.2
Delete paragraph 9.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following new paragraph
9.1.2:
"9.1.2
2266168.2
Before commencing any Work, the Contractor shall determine the locations of all
underground utilities and structures indicated in the Contract Documents or that are
discoverable by applying to an inspection of the Place of the Work the degree of care and
skill described in GC14 STANDARD OF CARE.
April 2009
20 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.33.3
“9.1.5
3.33.4
"9.1.6
3.34
3.34.1
Without in any way limiting the Contractor’s obligations under this GC 9.1, should the
Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier cause loss or damage to trees or other
plantings, whether owned by the Owner or third parties, the Contractor shall be liable for
the replacement cost of the trees or other plantings damaged, including the cost of any
arborist or other Consultant, and such costs may be deducted by the Owner from amounts
otherwise owing to the Contractor.”
The Contractor shall neither undertake to repair and/or replace any damage whatsoever
to the Work of other Contractors, or to adjoining property, nor acknowledge the same
was caused or occasioned by the Contractor, without first consulting the Owner and
receiving written instructions as to the course of action to be followed from either the
Owner or the Consultant. However, where there is danger to life or public safety, the
Contractor shall take such emergency action as it deems necessary to remove the
danger."
GC 9.2 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
Add to paragraph 9.2.6 after the word "responsible", the following new words:
"or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and
which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal
and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the
Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory
requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage
to the property of the Owner or others,".
3.34.2
Add to paragraph 9.2.8 after the word "responsible", the following new words:
"or that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and
which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal
and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the
Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory
requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage
to the property of the Owner or others,".
3.34.3
“9.2.10 Without limiting its other obligations under this GC 9.2, the Contractor acknowledges
that its obligations under the Contract include compliance with the Environmental
Programs. The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner may suffer loss and damage
should the Contractor fail to comply with the Environmental Programs and agrees to
indemnify and hold harmless the Owner with respect to any loss or damage to which the
Owner is exposed by the Contractor’s failure to comply. The Contractor expressly
agrees that such loss and damage shall be included within the scope of the Contractor’s
indemnity described in paragraph 12.1.1. The Contractor acknowledges that should it
fail to comply with the Environmental Programs, such failure will constitute a failure to
comply with the Contract to a substantial degree within the meaning of paragraph 7.1.2.”
2266168.2
April 2009
21 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.35
GC 9.4 - CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
Delete paragraph 9.4.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 9.4.1
"9.4.1
3.35.1
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction safety at the Place of the
Work and for compliance with the rules, regulations and practices required by the
applicable construction health and safety legislation and shall be responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection
with the performance of the Work."
Add new paragraphs 9.4.2, 9.4.3, 9.4.4 and 9.4.5.
"9.4.2
Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner:
.1
a current WSIB clearance certificate;
.2
copies of the Contractor's insurance policies having application to the Project or
certificates of insurance, at the option of the Owner;
.3
documentation of the Contractor's in-house safety-related programs;
.4
a copy of the Notice of Project filed with the Ministry of Labour naming itself
as "constructor" under OHSA.
9.4.3
The Contractor hereby represents and warrants to the Owner that appropriate health and
safety instruction and training have been provided and will be provided to the
Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and Suppliers, before the Work is commenced.
The Contractor also undertakes to provide such health and safety instruction and training
to the Owner’s representatives, the Owner’s own forces and other contractors, should
they fall under the jurisdiction of the Contractor as more particularly described in
paragraph 9.4.1 above.
9.4.4
The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, its agents, officers,
directors, employees, Consultants, successors and assigns from and against the
consequences of any and all safety infractions committed by the Contractor under OHSA,
including the payment of legal fees and disbursements on a solicitor and client basis.
Such indemnity shall apply to the extent to which the Owner is not covered by insurance,
provided that the indemnity contained in this paragraph shall be limited to costs and
damages resulting directly from such infractions and shall not extend to any
consequential, indirect or special damages.
9.4.5
The Owner undertakes to include in its Contracts with other Contractors and/or in its
instructions to its own forces the requirement that the other Contractor or own forces, as
the case may be, will comply with directions and instructions from the Contractor with
respect to occupational health and safety and related matters. The text of such instruction
is attached to these Supplementary Conditions as Appendix 1.”
3.36
GC 9.5 - MOULD
3.36.1
Delete paragraph 9.5.3.3 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 9.5.3.3
"9.5.3.3 extend the Contract Time for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in
consultation with the Contractor. If, in the opinion of the Consultant, the Contractor has
been delayed in performing the Work and / or has incurred additional costs under
2266168.2
April 2009
22 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
paragraph 9.5.1.2, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for reasonable costs
incurred as a result of the delay and as a result of taking those steps, and "
3.37
3.37.1
GC 10.1 - TAXES AND DUTIES
Amend paragraph 10.1.2 by adding the following sentence at the end of that paragraph:
“For greater certainty, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any mark-up for overhead or profit
on any increase in such taxes and duties and the Owner shall not be entitled to any credit relating
to mark-up for overhead or profit on any decrease in such taxes.”
3.37.2
Add new paragraphs 10.1.3, 10.1.4, 10.1.5 and 10.1.6 as follows:
"10.1.3 Where the Owner is entitled to an exemption or a recovery of sales taxes, customs duties,
excise taxes or Value Added Taxes applicable to the Contract, the Contractor shall, at the
request of the Owner or the Owner’s representative, assist with application for any
exemption, recovery or refund of all such taxes and duties and all amounts recovered or
exemptions obtained shall be for the sole benefit of the Owner. The Contractor agrees to
endorse over to the Owner any cheques received from the federal or provincial
governments, or any other taxing authority, as may be required to give effect to this
paragraph.
10.1.4
The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of equipment, material and component
costs reflecting the taxes, customs duties, excise taxes and Value Added Taxes paid.
10.1.5 Any refund of taxes including, without limitation, any government sales tax, customs
duty, excise tax or Value Added Tax, whether or not paid, which is found to be
inapplicable or for which exemption may be obtained, is the sole and exclusive property
of the Owner. The Contractor agrees to cooperate with the Owner and to obtain from all
Subcontractors and Suppliers cooperation with the Owner in the application for any
refund of any taxes, which cooperation shall include, but not be limited to, making or
concurring in the making of an application for any such refund or exemption and
providing to the Owner copies, or where required, originals of records, invoices, purchase
orders and other documentation necessary to support such applications or exemptions or
refunds. All such refunds shall either be paid to the Owner, or shall be a credit to the
Owner against the Contract Price, in the Owner’s discretion.
10.1.6 Customs duties penalties, or any other penalty, fine or assessment levied against the
Contractor shall not be treated as a tax or customs duty for purposes of this GC 10.1.”
3.38
3.38.1
GC 10.2 - LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES
Add to the end of paragraph 10.2.4, the following words:
"The Contractor shall notify the Chief Building Official or the registered code agency where
applicable, of the readiness, substantial completion, and completion of the stages of construction
set out in the Ontario Building Code. The Contractor shall be present at each site inspection by an
inspector or registered code agency as applicable under the Ontario Building Code."
3.38.2
Delete from the first line of paragraph 10.2.5 the word, "The" and substitute the
words:
"Subject to paragraph 3.4.1, the".
2266168.2
April 2009
23 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.39
3.39.1
INDEMNIFICATION
Delete paragraphs 12.1.1 through 12.1.6 and replace them with the following:
“The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant, their agents
and employees from and against all claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or
proceedings (hereinafter called “claims”), by third parties that arise out of, or are attributable to,
the Contractor’s performance of the Contract provided such claims are:
.1
attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of
tangible property, and
.2
caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the
Contractor may be liable, and
.3
made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of
the Work as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within
such shorter period as may be prescribed by any limitation statute of the province or
territory of the Place of Work.
Except as otherwise provided in this Contract, the Owner expressly waives the right to indemnity
for claims other than those stated above.
3.39.2
The obligation of the Contractor to indemnify hereunder shall be limited to $5,000,000 per occurrence
from the commencement of the Work until Substantial Performance of the Work and thereafter to an
aggregate limit of $5,000,000.
3.39.3
The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, the Contractor’s agents and employees
from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of
the Contractor’s performance of the Contract which are attributable to a lack of or defect in title or an
alleged lack of or defect in title to the Place of Work.”
3.40
3.40.1
GC 12.2 - WAIVER OF CLAIMS
Delete paragraphs 12.2.1 through 12.2.10 and replace them with the following:
“12.2.1 As of the date of the final certificate for payment, the Owner expressly waives and
releases the Contractor from all claims against the Contractor including without
limitation those that might arise from negligence or breach of contract by the Contractor
except for one or more of the following:
2266168.2
.1
those made in writing prior to the date of the final certificate for payment and
still unsettled;
.2
those arising from the provisions of GC12.1 – INDEMNIFICATION or GC12.3
– WARRANTY;
.3
those arising from GC9.2 – TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND
MATERIALS and arising from the Contractor bringing or introducing any toxic
or hazardous substances and materials to the Place of the Work after the
Contractor commences the Work;
.4
those made by Notice in Writing within a period of six years from the date of
Substantial Performance of the Work as set out in the certificate of substantial
April 2009
24 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
performance, or within such shorter period as may be prescribed in any
limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work and arising
from any liability of the Contractor for damages resulting from the Contractor’s
performance of the Contract with respect to substantial defects or deficiencies in
the Work for which the Contractor is proven responsible. As used herein,
“substantial defects or deficiencies” means those defects or deficiencies in the
Work where the reasonable cost of repair of such defects or deficiencies
exceeds:
12.2.2
3.41
3.41.1
.1
for a Contract Price of $2,000,000 or less, the sum of $50,000, before
GST;
.2
for a Contract Price of $2,000,000 or more, the sum of $100,000,
before GST.
As of the date of certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor
expressly waives and releases the Owner from all claims which it has or reasonably ought
to have knowledge of that could be advanced against the Owner including without
limitation those that might arise from the negligence or breach of contract by the Owner
except:
.1
those made in writing prior to the Contractor’s application for final
payment and still unsettled; and
.2
those arising from the provisions of GC9.2 – TOXIC AND
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS or GC10.3 –
PATENT FEES.”
GC 12.3 - WARRANTY
Delete from the first line of paragraph 12.3.2 the word, "The" and substitute the
words:
"Subject to paragraph 3.4.1, the…".
3.42
OTHER PROVISIONS
“Add new PART 13 as follows:
3.43
GC 13.1 - OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS
13.1.1
3.44
GC 13.2 - CONSTRUCTION LIENS
13.2.1
2266168.2
Unless otherwise specified, all materials existing at the Place of the Work at the time of
execution of the Contract shall remain the property of the Owner. All Work and
Products delivered to the Place of the Work by the Contractor shall be the property of the
Owner. The Contractor shall remove all surplus or rejected materials as its property when
notified in writing to do so by the Consultant.
In the event that a construction lien is registered against the Project by or through a
Subcontractor or Supplier and provided the Owner has paid all amounts properly due
under the Contract and has otherwise complied with its material obligations under the
Contract, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, post the security necessary to vacate
or discharge such lien, as the case may be. In the event that a lien action is commenced
April 2009
25 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
and a Statement of Claim is issued and served, the Contractor shall take all reasonable
steps to remove the Owner from the main action and to indemnify it and hold it harmless
against such action, except where the Statement of Claim makes substantive claims
against the Owner beyond the recovery of the holdback under the Act.
13.2.2
3.45
3.46
GC 13.3 - CONTRACTOR DISCHARGE OF LIABILITIES
13.3.1
In addition to the obligations assumed by the Contractor pursuant to GC 3.7, the
Contractor agrees to discharge all liabilities incurred by it for labour, materials, services,
Subcontractors and Products, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of
the Work, except for amounts withheld by reason of legitimate dispute and which have
been identified to the party or parties, from whom payment has been withheld.
13.3.2
Notwithstanding any other provision in this Contract, in the event the Owner as a result
of the Contractor’s act or omission or breach of contract, incurs damages, costs, fees or
expenses, including costs of additional services performed by the Consultant and
including the Owner’s reasonable solicitor and own client costs, whether or not such act,
omission or breach results in any lien, lien action or other legal proceeding, and whether
or not such act, omission or breach results in the Owner taking any of the steps provided
in ARTICLE 7.1 – THE OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK OR
TERMINATE THE CONTRACT. All such damages, costs, fees and expenses shall be
charged to the Contractor and the Owner shall be entitled to set off and deduct all such
damages, costs, fees and expenses from any amount owing to the Contractor and any
security or other funds held by the Owner. If there is no amount owing by the Owner to
the Contractor, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all of the said
damages, costs, fees and expenses.
GC 13.4 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
13.4.1
3.47
2266168.2
In the event that the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of paragraph
13.2.1, the Owner may set off and deduct from any amount owing to the Contractor, all
costs and associated expenses, including the costs, as applicable, of borrowing the
appropriate cash, posting a letter of credit or delivering a bond as security together with
all reasonable legal fees and disbursements. If there is no amount owing by the Owner to
the Contractor, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all of the said costs
and associated expenses.
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall prepare asbuilt Drawings and provide them to the Consultant for review in accordance with
paragraph 5.4.5.
GC 13.5 - DAILY REPORTS/DAILY LOGS
13.5.1
The Contractor shall cause its supervisor, or such competent person as it may delegate, to
prepare a daily log or diary reporting on weather conditions, Work force of the
Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers and any other forces on site and also record the
general nature of Project activities. Such log or diary shall also include any extraordinary
or emergency events which may occur and also the identities of any persons who visit the
site who are not part of the day-to-day Work force.
13.5.2
The Contractor shall also maintain records, either at its head office or at the job site,
recording manpower and material resourcing on the Project, including records which
document the activities of the Contractor in connection with GC 3.5, and comparing that
resourcing to the resourcing anticipated when the most recent version of the schedule was
prepared pursuant to GC 3.5.
April 2009
26 of 33
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
13.5.3 The Contractor shall make the records, logs and other materials prepared pursuant to this
GC13.5 available to the Owner and/or the Consultant upon reasonable notice. In such
event, the Owner and/or the Consultant may attend at the Contractor’s premises, review
the materials and logs and make such copies as they may require, such copies to be at the
expense of the Owner and/or the Consultant, as the case may be.
3.48
GC 13.6 - NEUTRAL APPOINTING AUTHORITY
13.6.1
3.49
For purposes of the Rules the term "neutral appointing authority", shall mean the
"Appointing Committee" at ADR Chambers presiding at the time notice of the dispute is
given pursuant to the Contract."
GC 13.7 - PUBLIC STATEMENTS
13.7.1
The Contractor shall not publish, issue or make any statements or news release,
electronic or otherwise, concerning the Contract, the Work, or the Project, without the
express written consent of the Owner.”
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
2266168.2
APPENDIX 1
LANGUAGE FOR OWNER PERSONNEL OR FOR THIRD PARTY CONTRACTORS
ENTERING A PROJECT SITE WHERE THE CONTRACTOR HAS ASSUMED
OVERALL RESPONSIBILITY – IN CONTRACT – FOR OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
AND SAFETY
"The (trade or employee) acknowledges that the Work it will perform on behalf of the
Owner requires it to enter a job site which is under the total control of a Contractor which has a
Contract with
. The (trade or employee) acknowledges that [name
of Contractor] has assumed overall responsibility for compliance with all aspects of the health
and safety legislation of Ontario, including all the responsibilities of the "constructor" under the
Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario). Further, (trade or employee) acknowledges that
[name of Contractor] is also responsible to the
to co-ordinate and
schedule the activities of our Work with the Work of the Contractor.
We agree to comply with [name of Contractor] directions and instructions with respect to
occupational health and safety and coordination. We acknowledge that it will be cause for
termination under our Contract with the Owner should (I/we) fail or refuse to accept the
direction and instruction of the Contractor with respect to matters of occupational health and
safety or matters related to coordination of Work.
We agree to have the Contractor named as an additional insured on our comprehensive
liability policy."
2266168.2
APPENDIX 2
Amendment to Rules for Mediation and Arbitration of Construction Disputes
(CCDC-40, 1994) (the "Rules")
The Rules assume the use of the Standard Construction Documents CCDC2-2008 for a
Stipulated Price Contract, including the Agreement, Definitions, General Conditions and any
amendments or supplementary conditions, if there are any. This Amendment supersedes,
replaces or amends the Rules, as the case may be, as outlined below.
1.
RULES FOR MEDIATION OF CCDC 2 CONSTRUCTION DISPUTES
1.1
Interpretation. Amend clause 1.1(a) so that it reads as follows:
"(a)
1.2
The "Contract" means CCDC2-2008, where such Contract document contains an
agreement to refer disputes to mediation under these Rules."
By Agreement. Delete clause 5.1 and replace it with the following:
"5.1 By Agreement . Where a party desires the appointment of a Project Mediator and gives a
Notice in Writing to that effect, such notice shall include the names of two qualified individuals
who are prepared to act as mediator, ranked in order of preference. Within five Working Days of
receiving such a notice, the other party shall deliver a responding notice including the names of
two qualified individuals who are prepared to act as mediator, ranked in order of preference. From
the names submitted by the parties, the parties shall unanimously appoint a mediator."
1.3
Appointment of Project Mediator. Add a new clause 5.5 which reads as follows:
"5.5 Formal Agreement. When the Project Mediator has been appointed, whether pursuant to
clause 5.1 or clause 5.2, the parties and the mediator shall enter into an agreement in writing
pursuant to which the terms and conditions of the engagement of the Project Mediator shall be set
out. Such agreement shall include an undertaking by the Project Mediator to carry out the
mediation pursuant to these Rules and such agreement shall specifically set out the undertaking of
the Project Mediator and the parties as to "Confidentiality" (Section 4) "Costs of the Mediation"
(Section 12) and "Privileged Process" (Section 13)."
1.4
Representation. Amend clause 8.1 by deleting the last six words of that clause.
1.5
Right To Withdraw. Amend clause 11.1 by deleting the words "of GC8.2.5" toward the
end of line 3.
1.6
Not Compellable. Amend clause 14.2(a) by replacing the word "Contractor" with the
word "Contract".
2.
RULES FOR ARBITRATION OF CCDC 2 CONSTRUCTIONS DISPUTES
2.1
Interpretation. Amend clause 1.1(b) so that it reads as follows:
"(b)
2266168.2
The "Contract" means CCDC2-2008, where such Contract document contains an
agreement to refer disputes to mediation under these Rules."
-2-
2.2
Interpretation. Amend clause 1.1(d) so that, as amended, it reads as follows:
"(d)
2.3
The parties means the parties to the Contract and any other persons who may join in an
arbitration involving the Owner and the Contractor or the Construction Manager and/or a
Trade Contractor, as the case may be."
Location of Arbitration. Add the following as a second sentence to clause 5.1:
"Failing agreement by the parties, the arbitrator may select a location for the arbitration within the
jurisdiction of the Place of Work, which is convenient to both parties".
2.4
Single Arbitrator. Delete clause 8.1 and replace it with the following:
“8.1
The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator who possesses the
qualifications specified in Clause 8.5.”
2.5
Appointment Of Arbitrator. Delete Clause 8.2 in its entirety and replace it with the
words, “intentionally left blank”.
2.6
Appointment of 3 Arbitrators. Delete Clause 8.4 in its entirety and replace it with,
“intentionally left blank”.
2.7
Appointment of Arbitrator. Add a new clause 8.13 which reads as follows:
"8.13
2.8
Where the arbitrator has been appointed pursuant to the Section 8, the parties and the
arbitrator shall enter an agreement in writing setting out, at minimum, the name of the
arbitrator, the undertaking of the arbitrator and the parties to conduct the arbitration
pursuant to these Rules and the terms and conditions of engagement of the arbitrator
including the fees to be paid and expenses to be reimbursed and any arrangements
required to provide for interim payment of fees and/or expenses to the arbitrator."
Procedural Meeting. Add the following new sentence to clause 9.2:
"Such written record shall be deemed to be the procedural code for the conduct of the
arbitration, subject to any further orders of the arbitrator or of the Court of competent
jurisdiction."
2.9
Powers of the Arbitrator. Delete clause 10.1 and substitute the following:
"Subject to these Rules and subject to the written record described in clause 9.2, the
arbitrator may conduct the arbitration in such manner as the arbitrator, acting reasonably,
considers appropriate provided that in all events each party shall be treated fairly and
given a full opportunity to present its case and respond to the case presented by the other
party."
2.10
Exchange of Statements. Delete clause 11.3(a) and replace it with the following:
"(a)
2.11
Disclosure. Delete clause 12.1 and replace it with the following:
"12.1
2266168.2
which are relevant to the issues in dispute, and..".
Production of Documents - The arbitrator may order one or both parties to prepare an
affidavit, within a specified time, in which such party deposes under oath that it has made
a full and complete listing of documents pursuant to clause 11.3(a) where the arbitrator
-3has reason to believe that one or both parties may not have made full and complete
disclosure of the documents relevant to the issues in the arbitration."
2.12
Add a new clause 12.6 as follows:
"12.6
In the event that a party provides the statement or report of an expert witness pursuant to
clause 12.4, the provisions of clauses 15.3 and 15.4 shall apply, with necessary
modifications."
2.13 Hearings and Meetings. Amend clause 13.3 by adding the following language to that
clause:
"..unless otherwise agreed by both parties or directed by the arbitrator."
2.14
Arbitrator Retained Experts. Add clause 15.3(c) as follows:
"(c)
2.15
provide the party with a written summary of any other information, beyond that described
in clauses 13.2(a) and (b), upon which the expert relied in preparing the expert's report."
Consolidation. Amend clause 21.1(a) by adding the following wording to that clause:
"...on the same Project,..".
[Drafting note: Should the Board of the Owner wish to waive its right of appeal under the
Arbitration Act, the following amendment is required:
“Final Award. Amend clause 18.6 by adding the following sentence at the end of that
clause:
‘The parties specifically waive any rights of appeal they may have in connection
with the final award or any interim order or award made by the arbitrator.’
2266168.2
Toronto Catholic District School Board – Bid No. P-001-12 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT
SCHOOL BOARD
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Issued September 22, 2011
Tender for Addition, Renovation and
Restoration to the Senator O’Connor
Estate House
Bid No. P-001-12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
COMPLIANCE....................................................................................................................1
2.
BID DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................1
3.
CONDITIONS OF THE PLACE OF THE WORK ............................................................1
4.
MANDATORY SITE MEETING .......................................................................................2
5.
PREQUALIFICATION .......................................................................................................2
6.
BID AND PERFORMANCE SECURITY ..........................................................................3
7.
AMENDMENTS TO BID DOCUMENTS .........................................................................3
8.
TAXES .................................................................................................................................4
9.
BID COMPLETION ............................................................................................................4
10.
BID SUBMISSION .............................................................................................................5
11.
BID EXPIRY PERIOD ........................................................................................................6
12.
BID OPENING AND EVALUATION ...............................................................................6
13.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION ...................................................................................6
14.
AWARD OF CONTRACT, EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT AND DOCUMENTS
TO BE DELIVERED ...........................................................................................................7
15.
LIMIT OF LIABILITY........................................................................................................7
16.
DISPUTES ...........................................................................................................................7
17.
LOBBYING.........................................................................................................................8
18.
RELEVANT POLICIES......................................................................................................9
1.
COMPLIANCE
1.1
The bidder acknowledges that by submitting a compliant bid, it has accepted an offer
by the Owner to enter into a “bid contract” for the evaluation of bids and the award of
the Contract, if an award is made. The bidder acknowledges that the terms of the “bid
contract” are represented by the Bid Documents.
1.2
A bid which fails to comply with the requirements of these Instructions to Bidders may
be declared non-compliant.
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
2.1
The following documents form the basis of this bid process (the “Bid Documents”):
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.2
Instructions to Bidders
Bid Forms comprising the Base Bid Form and, where required, the
Supplementary Bid Form
Agreement, Definitions and General Conditions of the CCDC 2 - 2008
Specifications (per table of contents)
Drawings (per list of drawings)
Addenda issued during bidding period
Check Bid Documents for completeness upon receipt. Inform Consultant immediately:
.1
.2
should any documents be missing or incomplete;
upon finding any discrepancies or omissions.
2.3
Complete sets of Bid Documents are available at the office of the Consultant. Bid
Documents shall be returned to Consultant within ten (10) days of bid close and the
deposit for additional sets will be refunded provided all Bid Documents are returned
complete and in good order. Costs of replacing damaged Bid Documents will be
deducted from the deposit.
2.4
The Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of submitting bids for the
Project. Availability and/or use of the Bid Documents do not confer a licence or grant
for any other purpose.
2.5
Except as otherwise defined in these Instructions to Bidders, the defined terms in these
Bid Documents are taken from the Contract. The term Contract is defined in the
Agreement.
3.
CONDITIONS OF THE PLACE OF THE WORK
3.1
The Place of the Work is located at 50 Rowena Drive, on the school grounds of Senator
O’Connor Secondary School
Page 1 of 14
Toronto Catholic District School Board – Bid No. P-001-12 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3.2
The following reports prepared or obtained with respect to the Place of the Work are
available through the Consultant: Asbestos, Mould, Lead Survey. O’Connor House, 5
Avonwick Gate, Toronto, Ontario, Report No. 01-9292-3000, dated October 3, 2001,
by Dillion Consulting Limited. An updated report is being prepared by DCS Ltd and
will be available during the 2nd week of the Bid period.
3.3
Before submitting a bid, investigate the Place of the Work to fully ascertain existing
conditions, circumstances and limitations affecting the Work. No allowances will be
made for additional costs and no claims will be entertained in connection with
conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by such investigation or other
due diligence prior to submitting a bid.
4.
BIDDER’S SITE MEETING
4.1
A bidder’s site meeting has been scheduled Tuesday September 27th , 2011, at 1:00 pm.
Meeting will convene at South entry to the House. It is the Bidders responsibility to
review all site conditions and constraints.
4.2
Claims for extra work that could be easily seen on site from site meeting attendance or
by self site visit will not be considered.
5.
PREQUALIFICATION
5.1
The following bidders have been prequalified:
.1
Aquicon Construction
.2
J.D. Strachan Construction Ltd.
.3
Jasper Construction Corp.
.4
M.J. Dixon Construction Ltd.
.5
Percon Construction Inc.
.6
Pre-Eng Contracting Ltd.
.7
Rutherford Contracting Ltd.
.8
Struct-Con Construction Ltd.
.9
Tasis Contactors Inc.
5.2
Bids received from bidders which have not been prequalified shall be returned
unopened.
5.3
Bidders who fail to comply with 5.2 shall be declared non-compliant.
Page 2 of 9
6.
BID AND PERFORMANCE SECURITY
6.1
Each bid shall be accompanied by bid security in the form of a bid bond in the amount
of Ten Percent (10%) of the Bid Price naming the Owner as obligee and issued by a
surety licensed to conduct surety and insurance business in Ontario. The bid security is
for the benefit of the Owner and stands as security that the bidder, if awarded the
Contract, will deliver the performance security described in paragraph 6.4 below and
evidence of insurance and other documents required by these Instructions to Bidders or
by the Contract, and will execute the Contract. The bid security shall remain valid for a
period of 90 DAYS from the date of bid submission (the ”Bid Expiry Period”). No
other form of bid security is acceptable.
6.2
The bid security of the bidder whose bid is accepted will be retained by the Owner to
compensate the Owner for the damages it will suffer should the successful bidder fail to
execute the Contract and/or fail to provide the performance security described in
paragraph 6.4 below and/or evidence of insurance and other documents required by
these Instructions to Bidders or by the Contract.
6.3
The bid security of the bidder whose bid is accepted will be returned after the delivery
of the specified performance security and evidence of insurance and other documents
required by these Instructions to Bidders or by the Contract, and after the execution of
the Contract. The bid security of all other bidders will be returned after the execution
of the Contract or after the Bid Expiry Period without an award of Contract or after the
rejection of all bids.
6.4
Each bid shall be accompanied by an agreement to bond issued by the same surety
company that provides the bid bond, undertaking to provide a fifty percent (50%)
performance bond and a fifty percent (50%) labour and material payment bond, both to
be delivered to the Owner if the bidder is awarded the Contract. In the event that the
Bid Documents require that the successful bidder provide a warranty bond, an
agreement to provide a warranty bond, in the amount specified in the Bid Documents,
shall be submitted with the bid, such agreement to provide that the warranty bond will
be delivered to the Owner if the bidder is awarded the Contract.
6.5
Bids not accompanied by the required bid security and the required agreement to bond
will be declared non-compliant and rejected. Where the Bid Documents require an
agreement to provide a warranty bond, bids not accompanied by such agreement to
bond will be declared non-compliant and rejected.
6.6
Include the cost of all bonds in the bid price.
7.
AMENDMENTS TO BID DOCUMENTS
7.1
Direct questions arising during the bidding period to
Lucy O’Connor at Kearns Mancini Architects Inc.
[email protected]
Page 3 of 9
The Bid Coordinator is the sole contact for bidding on this Project. A bid may be
disqualified where contact is made with any person other than the Bid Coordinator.
7.2
Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for instructions, clarifications
or amendments communicated orally. Instructions, clarifications or amendments which
affect the Bid Documents may only be made by addendum.
7.3
If bidders find discrepancies, omissions, errors, departures from building by-laws,
codes or good practice, and points considered to be ambiguous or conflicting, they shall
bring them to the attention of the Bid Coordinator in writing, and not less than seven (7)
Working Days before the bid closing date, so that the Consultant may, if the Consultant
deems it necessary, issue instructions, clarifications or amendments by addendum to all
bidders prior to the bid closing date. The Consultant will endeavour to issue such
addenda at least seventy-two (72) hours prior to bid closing.
7.4
Addenda issued during the bidding period shall become part of the Bid Documents and
their receipt shall be acknowledged in the space provided on the Bid Form. Addenda
will be sent to all bidders.
8.
TAXES
8.1
9.
The Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) shall not be included in the bid price. All other
eligible taxes shall be included in the bid price. Any taxes or increases to taxes
announced prior to the date of the issuance of the Bid Documents and scheduled to
come into effect subsequent to it shall be taken to be included in the bid price.
BID COMPLETION
9.1
Fill in all blank spaces on the Bid Forms in ink, or typewritten, providing all
information requested, and ensure that an authorized person or persons sign all forms
where indicated. Failure to provide all requested information on the Bid Forms and
failure to fill in all blank spaces may result in a bid being declared non-compliant.
9.2
Use only the Bid Forms issued as part of the Bid Documents for the Project. If any or
all pages of the Bid Forms are amended by addendum, only the amended pages shall be
used to submit a bid. Failure to comply with this paragraph may result in the bid being
declared non-compliant.
9.3
Information provided by bidders on the Bid Forms may be amended prior to bid
closing, provided corrections are initialled by an authorized representative of the
bidder. Other modifications, erasures, additions, conditions, qualifications or uninitialled pre-closing amendments may result in the bid being declared non-compliant.
9.4
Bids that are not originals, are unsigned, improperly signed, un-initialled, incomplete,
conditional or illegible, may be declared non-compliant.
Page 4 of 9
9.5
Bid Price
.1
.2
9.6
Listing of Subcontractors
.1
.2
9.7
10.
The Base Bid Form provides that the bid price shall be provided in numbers only.
Where the Bid Forms require the bidder to provide a breakdown of the bid price,
the bid price shall govern in the case of conflict or ambiguity between the bid
price and the sum of the breakdown of the bid price
As required by the Bid Documents, a bidder shall complete and submit a
Supplementary Bid Form – “List of Subcontractors”, naming the listed
Subcontractors and Suppliers which the bidder will employ to perform an item of
the Work called for by the Contract. Failure of the bidder to provide the listed
Subcontractors and Suppliers, where required, or the listing by a bidder of more
than one Subcontractor and Supplier to perform or supply an item of work listed,
may result in the bid being declared non-compliant.
Where a bidder lists “own forces” in lieu of a Subcontractor, the bidder shall carry
out such item of the Work with its own forces. Where “own forces” have been
listed by a bidder, the Owner reserves the right to obtain information from the
bidder and from third parties respecting the qualifications and experience of the
bidder’s “own forces” for such item of the Work. If the Owner, acting
reasonably, determines that the bidder’s “own forces” are not sufficiently
qualified or sufficiently experienced to undertake such item of the Work, it may
reject the bid.
Separate Prices. Bidders shall complete and submit the Supplementary Bid Form –
“Separate Prices” showing values for each separate price. Failure to provide values for
the Separate prices will result in the bid being declared non-compliant.
BID SUBMISSION
10.1
Submit one (1) completed original of the Base Bid Form, and any required
Supplementary Bid Forms, accompanied by the bid bond and the agreement to bond, in
a sealed opaque envelope. Ensure that the outside of the envelope bears the bidder’s
return address and a label clearly identifying the Project , the Project number and, if one
exists, the bid number for which the bid is submitted.
10.2
Submit the envelope to:
TENDER BOX, 4th Floor, Materials Management Department
Catholic Education Centre
80 Sheppard Avenue East, Toronto, ON
M2N 6E8
Page 5 of 9
10.3
Bids must be received before THURSDAY, OCTOBER 13TH , 3:00 PM local time.
The term “local time” shall mean the time as measured by the Owner’s tender clock
which is located at the reception desk of the Materials Management Department.
10.4
Bids will be date and time stamped at the place receiving the bids. Late bids will be
returned unopened.
10.5
Bids which are submitted by facsimile transmission or by electronic means will not be
considered.
10.6
Bidders are solely responsible for the method and timing of delivery of their bids.
10.7
The Owner acknowledges that the information included in the bids submitted is
“supplied in confidence” within the meaning of Section 10 of the Municipal Freedom
of Information and Protection of Privacy Act (Ontario).
11.
11.1
12.
BID EXPIRY PERIOD
Each bid shall be irrevocable for the Bid Expiry Period, after which the bid expires.
BID OPENING AND EVALUATION
12.1
Bids will be opened in public, in the cafeteria located on the 4th floor of the Catholic
Education Centre, shortly following bid closing.
12.2
In the event that more than one envelope is received from the same bidder, only the last
envelope received will be considered.
13.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
13.1
The Consultant may contact any one or more bidders to request information without
any obligation to contact or request the same information from any other bidder or
bidders.
13.2
Within five (5) Working Days of notification by the Consultant, a bidder shall submit a
trade by trade breakdown of the bid price for analysis by the Consultant. Submission of
an unbalanced or front-end loaded breakdown may result in the bid being rejected.
13.3
Within five (5) Working Days of notification by the Consultant, a bidder shall submit a
preliminary construction schedule. Such preliminary construction schedule shall be
consistent with the time for Substantial Performance of the Work stated in the Bid
Documents. Such preliminary construction schedule may be in bar chart format and
shall include all major subtrades and show Project milestones and critical schedule
items, such as start and completion of major Project components. Failure to submit an
acceptable preliminary construction schedule may result in the bid being rejected.
13.4
A bidder shall submit additional information promptly if requested by the Consultant.
Failure to do so may result in the bid being rejected.
Page 6 of 9
13.5
14.
Requests for a breakdown of the bid price, a preliminary construction schedule, or other
requests for information shall not be construed as acceptance of a bid.
AWARD OF CONTRACT, EXECUTION
DOCUMENTS TO BE DELIVERED
OF
THE
CONTRACT
AND
14.1
Bidders shall not issue or make any statements or news release concerning their bid, the
bid process, the Owner’s evaluation of the bids, or the Owner’s award or cancellation
of the bid process without the express written consent of the Owner.
14.2
The Owner will consider the base bid price with all or any combination of submitted
separate prices in evaluating the winning bid.
14.3
If the Owner decides to award the Contract to a bidder, it will issue a letter of Contract
award.
14.4
Prior to commencing the Work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner:
.1
.2
.3
14.5
15.
the performance bond and the labour and material payment bond described in the
Bid Documents, the form of such bonds to comply with the requirements of the
Contract;
certified true copies of the insurance policies required by the Bid Documents; and
a current Clearance Certificate issued by the Workplace Safety and Insurance
Board.
The Contractor shall execute the Contract and deliver the executed original to the
Owner within ten (10) Working Days of receipt from the Consultant.
LIMIT OF LIABILITY
15.1
The liability of the bidder to the Owner for loss and damage arising out of the bidder’s
breach of the “bid contract” shall be limited to the lesser of the actual loss suffered by
the Owner and the amount of the bid bond submitted as part of the bidder’s bid.
15.2
The liability of the Owner to any bidder for loss and damage arising in tort or for the
breach by the Owner of the “bid contract” shall be limited to the reasonable cost to the
bidder of preparing its bid.
16.
16.1
DISPUTES
In the event of a dispute arising in connection with this bid process including, without
limitation, a dispute concerning the existence of the “bid contract” or a breach of the
“bid contract”, or a dispute as to whether the bid of any bidder was submitted on time
or whether a bid is compliant, the Owner may refer the dispute to a confidential binding
arbitration pursuant to the Arbitration Act, 1991, as amended, before a single arbitrator
with knowledge of procurement/bidding law. In the event that the Owner refers the
dispute to arbitration, the bidder agrees that it is bound to arbitrate such dispute with the
Page 7 of 9
Owner. Unless the Owner shall refer such dispute to binding arbitration, there shall be
no arbitration of such dispute.
16.2
In the event the Owner refers a dispute to binding arbitration, the Owner may give
notice of the dispute to one or more of the other bidders who submitted bids, whether or
not they may be compliant, each of whom shall be a party to and shall be entitled to
participate in the binding arbitration, and each of whom shall be bound by the
arbitrator’s award, whether or not they participated in the binding arbitration.
16.3
In the event the Owner refers a dispute to binding arbitration, the parties to the
arbitration shall exchange brief statements of their respective positions on the dispute,
together with the relevant documents, and submit to a binding arbitration hearing which
shall last no longer than two days, subject to the discretion of the arbitrator to increase
such time. The parties further agree that there shall be no appeal from the arbitrator’s
award.
16.4
This Article is not intended to form part of any “bid contract” that may come into being
between a bidder and any prospective Subcontractor or Supplier of that bidder.
17.
LOBBYING
17.1
The TCDSB has established a prohibition on lobbying during all competitive tenders,
RFP's or RFQ's. The Board will designate a Tender Contact Person for all tenders or
proposal calls to respond to all communications with respect to the call from the time of
issuance, during the competitive process, and up to and including the announcement of
award.
17.2
Vendors or any representatives employed or retained by them, or any unpaid
representatives acting on behalf of either to promote a bid/proposal or oppose any
competing bid/proposal are strictly prohibited from communicating, either verbally or
in writing, with any other Board employees or elected officials from the time of
issuance until the time of award.
17.3
Any vendor found to be in breach of the policy will be subject to disqualification from
this particular call or future calls at the discretion of the Board.
18.
18.1
19.
19.1
COMPLETION OF THE WORK
The Work must attain Substantial Performance by March 15th 2012
RELEVANT POLICIES
The Board has a number of relevant Policies regarding Tenders and Acquisitions.
Proponents should familiarize themselves with the following policies:
Purchasing Policy- http://www.tcdsb.org/policyregister/FP01.html
Page 8 of 9
Sweatshop Free Purchasing- http://www.tcdsb.org/policyregister/FP04.html
Conflict of Interest-Employees- http://www.tcdsb.org/policyregister/HM31.html
Acceptance of Hospitality or Gifts- http://www.tcdsb.org/policyregister/HM33.html
Conflict of Interest for Trustees - http://www.tcdsb.org/policyregister/T01.html
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 9 of 9
Toronto Catholic District School Board - Bid No. P-001-12
BASE BID FORM
NAME OF BIDDER
________________________________________________________________
ADDRESS
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
TELEPHONE
______________________
FAX ____________________________
BID PRICE
I/We the undersigned, having carefully examined the Bid Documents, having received, carefully
examined and incorporated
Addenda No. ______ to No. ______
inclusive, having visited and investigated the Place of the Work, and having examined all
conditions, circumstances and limitations affecting the Work, offer to enter into a Contract with
the Owner to perform the Work identified as BASE BID WORK required by the Bid Documents
for the price of
$ ____________________________________ . [NOTE: insert amount in numbers only]
The price offered excludes Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) but includes all other eligible taxes.
BID SECURITY
Attached to this bid is a bid bond issued by
in
$_______________________ [NOTE: insert amount in numbers only].
the
amount
of
No other form of bid security is acceptable.
AGREEMENT TO BOND
Attached to this bid is a separate agreement to bond issued by ____________________________
____________________________ undertaking to provide the bonds required by the Bid
Documents. Where the Bid Documents require the provision of a warranty bond, attached to this
bid is a separate agreement to provide a warranty bond issued by ____________________
undertaking to provide the specified warranty bond.
DECLARATIONS
I/We the undersigned declare that:
1.
I/We agree to perform the Work, inclusive of mobilization time, in compliance with the
Contract Documents and attain Substantial Performance of the Work by March 15th ,
2012.
Page 1 of 2
Toronto Catholic District School Board - Bid No. P-001-12
BASE BID FORM
2.
No person, firm or corporation other than the undersigned has any interest in this bid or
in the proposed Contract for which this bid is made.
3.
This bid is irrevocable and is open for acceptance by the Owner for the Bid Expiry
Period.
DATE
___________________________________________________________
SIGNATURE
____________________________________________________________
Name and Title
____________________________________________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
Page 1 of 1
Bid No. P-001-12
SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
NAME OF BIDDER
________________________________________________________________
I/We the undersigned propose to employ the following Subcontractors and/or Suppliers to
perform an item of the Work called for by the Contract. I/We confirm that all have been
investigated to confirm their reliability and competency to carry out such work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
I/We acknowledge that the Instructions to Bidders require that we list only one Subcontractor
and/or Supplier for each item of the Work described in this List of Subcontractors. I/We further
acknowledge that where we have entered “own forces” to perform an item of the Work, it is our
intention to use “own forces” for that purpose.
After bid submission, no substitution for a Subcontractor, Supplier or “own forces” will be
permitted except as provided in the Contract.
SUBCONTRACTOR / SUPPLIER
ITEM OF WORK
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
RESTORATION
__________________________________
PLASTER RESTORATION
__________________________________
MECHANICAL
__________________________________
ELECTRICAL
__________________________________
This List of Subcontractors is an integral part of these Bid Documents.
DATE
____________________________________________________________
SIGNATURE
____________________________________________________________
Name and Title
____________________________________________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
Page 1 of 1
SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM
Bid No. P-001-12
SEPARATE PRICES
______________________________________________________________________________
NAME OF BIDDER
_______________________________________________________________
I/We the undersigned offer the following Separate prices for additional work listed here.
Separate Prices are for work which are not included in the bid price listed on Bid Form but which
may be added by the Owner for the price quoted hereunder. The Owner may select all, none or
any combination of separate prices to be included with the Base Bid Work and as such will be
evaluated for acceptance of the bid.
All separate prices, are for complete work, in place, supplied and installed in accordance with
applicable Contract requirements and include all overhead and profit mark-up. Prices listed
hereunder do not include Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) but include all other eligible taxes.
SEPARATE PRICES:
Add to Bid Price
(Separate prices as defined herein and in Contract Documents)
Separate Price No. 1
Work defined in documents relating to the finished Basement
and the East Stair from Basement up to the Second floor.
$_______________________
Work defined in documents relating to Second floor and attic
and the East Stair from the Second floor to the Attic level
$_______________________
Work defined in documents relating to 2nd Floor of Coach House
$_______________________
Work defined in documents relating to Exterior South Portico
$_______________________
This list of Separate Prices is an integral part of these Bid Documents.
DATE
____________________________________________________________
SIGNATURE
____________________________________________________________
Name and Title
____________________________________________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
2266411.2
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 01090 - ABBREVIATIONS
1.
The abbreviations listed below, when used in the Contract Documents, shall have the meanings shown.
2.
See Drawing Abbreviations and Room Finish Schedule for additional abbreviations.
ABBREVIATION MEANING
AA
AAMA
AASHO
ACI
AGA
AIA
AIMA
AISC
AISI
AMCA
ANSI
ASHRAE
ASTM
AWI
AWMAC
AWS
CCA
CCRC
CEC
CFUA
CGA
CGSB
CIQS
CISC
CITC
CLA
CMHC
COFI
CPCI
CRCA
CSA
CSC
CSI
CSPI
CSSBI
CUA
CWB
CWC
DND
FM
FS
IES
IGMAC
LTIC
MIA
MPMDD
NAAMM
NBFU
NBC
NBS
NEMA
NFPA
NHLA
NLGA
NRC
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION
ARCHITECTURAL ALUMINUM MANUFACTURERS` ASSOCIATION
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY OFFICIALS
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE
AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
ACOUSTICAL & INSULATING MATERIALS ASSOCIATION
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE
AIR MOVING AND CONDITIONING ASSOCIATION INC.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIRCONDITIONING
ENGINEERS
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (USA)
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION OF CANADA
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY
CANADIAN CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION
CANADIAN CODE FOR RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION
CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE
CANADIAN FIRE UNDERWRITERS ASSOCIATION
CANADIAN GAS ASSOCIATION
CANADIAN GENERAL STANDARDS BOARD
CANADIAN INSTITUTE OF QUANTITY SURVEYORS
CANADIAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CANADIAN INSTITUTE OF TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
CANADIAN LUMBERMEN`S ASSOCIATION
CANADA MORTGAGE & HOUSING CORPORATION
COUNCIL OF FOREST INDUSTRIES OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
CANADIAN PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE
CANADIAN ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION
CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS CANADA
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE (USA)
CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE INSTITUTE
CANADIAN SHEET STEEL BUILDING INSTITUTE
CANADIAN UNDERWRITERS` ASSOCIATION
CANADIAN WELDING BUREAU
CANADIAN WOOD COUNCIL
DEPARTMENT OF NATIONAL DEFENCE, CANADA
FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
FEDERAL SPECIFICATION (USA)
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY
INSULATED GLASS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION OF CANADA
LAMINATED TIMBER INSTITUTE OF CANADA
MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA
MODIFIED PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (USA)
NATIONAL BOARD OF FIRE UNDERWRITERS
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF CANADA
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS (USDC)
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS' ASSOCIATION
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION
NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (USA)
NATIONAL LUMBER GRADES AUTHORITY
NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL
PROJECT NO. 09-100 – Phase 2
22/09/2011
KMAI
01090-1
SECTION 01090 - ABBREVIATIONS
ABBREVIATION MEANING
OBC
OHSA
OPSS
PCA
PCI
RAIC
SDI
SMACNA
SPMDD
SSPC
TTMAC
ULC
ULI
USAS
WSIB
ONTARIO BUILDING CODE
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT
ONTARIO PROVINCIAL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
PORTLAND CEMENT ASSOCIATION
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE
ROYAL ARCHITECTURAL INSTITUTE OF CANADA
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
STANDARD PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY
STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL
TERRAZZO, TILE & MARBLE ASSOCIATION OF CANADA
UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES OF CANADA
UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES, INC. (USA)
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA STANDARDS INSTITUTE
WORKPLACE SAFETY AND INSURANCE BOARD
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01090-2
SECTION 01050 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Division 1 requirements apply to all Sections of Work.
.2
In case of conflicts between TCDSB Documents Parts 1, 2 or 3 and Division 1 – General
Requirements, the former shall govern over the latter.
2.
SUMMARY OF WORK
.1
Provide all items, articles, materials, services and incidentals, whether or not expressly specified or
shown on Drawings, to make finished work complete and fully operational, consistent with the intent of
the Contract Documents.
.2
Provide all work indicated in Contract Documents, regardless whether located within or outside
Owner's property lines.
3.
Work areas indicated on drawing are a general guideline as to the extent of the Work and may vary
slightly. Large discrepancies in the areas shall be evaluated for valuation based on unit values listed
in the Bid.
.4
The following work is not included in this Contract:
.1
.5
3.
Work designated N.I.C.
The Work is broken into components shown on drawings and generally described herein under the
following designations
.1
Base Bid Work Addition, Ground Floor Renovationa and Exterior Door and Window
Restoration
.2
Separate Price 1 – Basement and East Stair
.3
Separate Price 2 – Second Floor
.4
Separate Price 3 – 2
.5
Separate Price 4 – Restoration of the South Portico columns and Pilasters
floor renovation for Coach House
DIVISION OF WORK
.1
4.
Work specified in the Specification has been divided into technical Sections for the purpose of ready
reference. Division of work among Subcontractors and suppliers is solely the Contractor's
responsibility and Consultant assumes no responsibility to act as an arbiter to establish subcontract
limits between Sections or Divisions of the Work.
METRIC PROJECT
.1
This project is based on The International System of Units (SI). Measurements are expressed in
metric (SI) units and depending on the progress made in the various sectors of the industry are either
hard or soft converted units.
.2
All metric units specified shall be taken to be the minimum acceptable unless otherwise noted.
.3
It is the Contractor's responsibility to check and verify with manufacturers and suppliers on the
availability of materials and products in either metric or imperial sizes.
.4
Where a material or product cannot be obtained in the metric size specified, provide the next larger
imperial size available.
.5
Where both metric and imperial sizes or dimensions are shown, the metric size or dimension shall
govern.
22/09/2011
KMAI
nd
01050-1
SECTION 01050 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
5.
SAFETY AND SECURITY
.1
Be responsible for 24 hour 7 days a week security of all areas affected by work of this Contract until
taken over by Owner. Take steps to prevent entry to the Work by unauthorized persons and guard
against theft, fire and damage by any cause.
.2
Provide suitable surveillance equipment and/or employ guard services, as required to adequately
protect the Work. Minimum security guard visitation every 4 hours. Security to review security of
hoarding and building access.
.3
Maintain fire protection for work. Store paints and volatile substances in a separate and controlled
location and inspect frequently. Inspect temporary wiring, drop cords, extension cables for defective
insulation or connections frequently. Remove combustible wastes frequently. Prohibit smoking in
areas where volatile and flammable substances are used.
.4
Do not cut, bore or sleeve through any loadbearing member, new or existing without Consultant's
written authorization, unless specifically indicated on Drawings.
6.
USE OF SITE
.1
Accept full responsibility for assigned work areas from the time of Contract award until Substantial
Performance of the Work.
.2
Check means of access and egress, rights and interests which may be interfered with. Do not block
lanes, roadways, entrances or exits. Direct construction traffic and locate access to site as directed by
municipality.
.3
Where encroachment beyond property limits is necessary make arrangement with respective property
owners.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01050-2
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT COORDINATION
1.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
.1
Immediately prior to construction, upon notification attend at location of Owner's choice, pre-construction meeting, along with authoritative representatives of certain key subcontractors as specifically indicated in the conference notice.
.2
Purpose of meeting is as follows:
.3
2.
.1
Review project communications procedures.
.2
Review contract administration requirements including submittals, payment and change order
procedures.
.3
Identify all critical points on construction schedule for positive action.
.4
Identify any product availability problems and substitution requests.
.5
Establish site arrangements and temporary facilities.
.6
Review Consultant’s inspection requirements.
.7
Review any points which, in Owner's, Consultant's and Contractor's opinion, require
clarification.
The Consultant shall organize and chair the pre-construction meeting. Consultant shall record
minutes of pre-construction meeting and distribute a copy to each participant within ten days of
meeting.
SITE MEETINGS
.1
Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor together with the Consultant shall mutually
agree to a sequence for holding regular site meetings.
.2
Organize and chair site meetings. Ensure that persons, whose presence is required, are present and
that relative information is available to allow meetings to be conducted efficiently.
.3
Once a month or more often if directed by Consultant include review with Consultant and Owner of
construction schedule and application for progress payment, during or immediately following site
meeting.
.4
Record minutes of each meeting and promptly distribute copies to be received by all participants not
later than seven days after meeting has been held. Distribute minutes of meetings to all Consultants,
whether in attendance or not.
3.
SUPERVISION
.1
Employ an experienced and qualified supervisor who shall be in complete charge of the Work from
commencement to final completion of the Work and who shall be present at the site whenever work is
being carried out. A working foreperson will not be acceptable. The supervisor shall not be changed
after commencement of work without the Consultant's approval.
.2
Supervise, direct, manage and control the work of all forces carrying out the Work, including
subcontractors and suppliers. Carry out daily inspections to ensure compliance with the Contract
Documents and the maintenance of quality standards. Ensure that the supervisory staff includes
personnel competent in supervising all Sections of Work required.
.3
Arrange for sufficient number of qualified assistants to the supervisor as required for the proper and
efficient execution of the Work.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01310-1
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT COORDINATION
4.
DOCUMENTS ON SITE
.1
5.
Contractor's field office shall at all times contain a complete set of Contract Documents (Drawings and
Specifications) with all addenda, site instructions, change orders, reviewed shop drawings and
samples, colour schedule, paint materials schedules, progress reports and meeting minutes.
INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS
.1
Prepare interference and equipment placing drawings to ensure that all components will be properly
accommodated within the spaces provided.
.2
Prepare drawings to indicate coordination and methods of installation of a system with other systems
where their relationship is critical. Ensure that all details of equipment apparatus, and connections are
coordinated.
.3
Ensure that clearances required by jurisdictional authorities and clearances for proper maintenance
are indicated on drawings.
.4
Upon Consultant's request submit copies of interference drawings to Consultant.
6.
SLEEVING AND INSERT SETTING DRAWINGS
.1
Prepare sleeving drawings showing size and location of all penetrations through load bearing
elements. Submit sleeving drawings to Consultant for review not less than 15 days prior to
construction of affected elements.
.2
Prepare insert setting drawings for work to be cast into concrete and / or mortared into masonry
elements. Submit insert setting drawings to Consultant for review not less than 15 days prior to
construction of affected elements.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01310-2
SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES
1.
.1
GENERAL
Comply with GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES and GC 4.2 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE.
.2
Cash allowances are designated for additional work and services deemed to be necessary by Owner,
from time to time, throughout the execution of the Work. Where a cash allowance refers to an item or
category of work already included in Contract Documents, it shall be assumed to cover work or
services in addition to that indicated, unless specifically indicated otherwise.
.3
Contractor may be required from time to time to assist in tendering of certain items of work covered by
allowance, as directed by Consultant.
2.
AUTHORIZATION
.1
Expenditures from allowances included in the Contract must be authorized in writing by the
Consultant.
.2
Work covered by allowances shall be performed for such amounts and by such persons as directed by
the Consultant.
3.
CASH ALLOWANCES
.1
Cash allowances include supply and installation unless specifically indicated otherwise.
.2
Supply only allowances shall include:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Supply and install allowances shall include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.4
Net costs of products
Deliveries to site
Applicable taxes and duties (excluding GST)
Net costs of products
Deliveries to site
Unloading, storing, handling of products on site
Installations, finishing and commissioning of products
Applicable taxes and duties (excluding GST)
Inspection and testing allowances shall include:
.1
.2
Net costs of inspection / testing services
Applicable taxes (excluding GST)
.5
Other costs related to work covered by cash allowances are not covered by the allowance but shall be
included separately in Contract.
.6
Include the following cash allowances in the Contract:
.1
Independent Inspections and Testing
$
10,000.00
.2
Hazardous Material Removal
$
10,000.00
.3
New Door Hardware
$
20,000.00
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01210-1
SECTION 01320 - PROJECT PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
.1
Within 14 days of Contract award, submit in format acceptable to Consultant, minimum 6 copies of
Contractor's critical path construction schedule.
.2
Substantial Performance is required for March 15 2012.
.3
Provide computer generated Schedule using suitable scheduling, software such as Gantt or Microsoft
Project.
.4
Set up format to permit plotting of actual construction progress against scheduled progress.
.5
Schedule shall show:
th
.1
Commencement and completion dates of Contract.
.2
Commencement and completion dates of construction stages/phases, if any.
.3
Commencement and completion dates of each trade. Major trades shall be further broken
down as directed by Consultant; generally follow Specification format.
.4
Order and delivery dates for major or critical equipment.
.5
Critical dates for shop drawing/sample submissions.
.6
Any other information relating to orderly progress of Contract, considered by Contractor or
Consultant to be pertinent.
.6
Consultant, together with Contractor shall review construction progress once a month during or
immediately following regular site meeting, or more often as directed by Consultant.
.7
Update construction schedule, whenever changes occur, in manner and at times acceptable to
Consultant.
.8
Plot actual construction progress or schedule at least once a week.
.9
Submit copy of updated schedule to Consultant once a month, concurrently with application for
payment.
2.
CASH FLOW CHART
.1
Within 7 days after award of Contract, submit, in form approved by Consultant, cash flow chart broken
down on a monthly basis in an approved manner. Cash flow chart shall indicate anticipated
Contractor's monthly progress billings from commencement of work until completion.
.2
Update cash flow chart whenever changes occur to scheduling and in manner and at times
satisfactory to Consultant.
3.
PROGRESS RECORD
.1
Maintain on site, permanent written record of progress of work. Record shall be open to inspection by
Consultant at all times and copy shall be furnished to Consultant upon request.
.2
This record shall show weather conditions, dates of commencement, progress and completion of
various trades and items of work. Particulars pertaining to erection and removal of forms, pouring of
concrete, installation of roofing and other critical or major components as well as number of
employees of various trades and type and quantity of equipment employed daily, shall be noted.
.3
Display a copy of the construction schedule in the site office from start of construction to completion.
Superimpose actual progress of work on schedule at least once each week.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01320-1
SECTION 01320 - PROJECT PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
4.
RECORD DRAWINGS
.1
An electronic construction set of documents (AutoCAD 2004) will be provided to the contractor by the
Consultant. The Contractor is to print a complete and separate set of blackline white prints for as-built
recording.
.2
Note clearly, neatly, accurately and promptly as the work progresses all architectural and structural
changes, revisions and additions to the work and deviations from the Contract Documents.
.3
Accurate location, depth, position, size and type of concealed and underground services, both inside
and outside shall be included as part of these record drawings.
.4
Update electronic drawing file monthly and print for review with Consultant as part of progress draw
review.
.5
Refer to Section 01770 for requirements on submission of record drawings.
5.
PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
.1
6.
Concurrently with monthly application for payment submit two sets of four 200 mm x 250 mm coloured,
glossy photographs or digital files in jpeg format as follows:
1.
Up to four photographs shall be taken from positions determined by Consultant.
2.
Photographs shall be properly exposed and in focus; views shall be unobstructed.
3.
Identify each photograph stating name of project, name of photographer, description of view
and date of photograph taken.
PRODUCT DELIVERY CONTROL
.1
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the supplier or distributor of materials specified
or alternatives accepted, which he intends to use, has materials on the site when required. The
Contractor shall obtain confirmed delivery dates from the supplier.
.2
Provide equipment delivery schedule, coordinated with construction and submittals' schedule, showing
delivery dates for major and/or critical equipment.
.3
The Contractor shall contact the Consultant immediately upon receipt of information indicating that any
material or item, will not be available on time, in accordance with the original schedule, and similarly it
shall be the responsibility of all subcontractors and suppliers to so inform the Contractor.
.4
The Consultant reserves the right to receive from the Contractor at any time, upon request, copies of
actual purchase or work orders of any material or products to be supplied for the work.
.5
If materials and products have not been placed on order, the Consultant may instruct such items to be
placed on order, if direct communication in writing from the manufacturer or prime suppliers is not
available indicating that delivery of said material will be made in sufficient time for the orderly
completion of the Work.
.6
The Consultant's review of purchase orders or other related documentation shall in no way release the
Contractor, or his subcontractors and suppliers from their responsibility for ensuring the timely ordering
of all materials and items required, including the necessary expediting, to complete the work as
scheduled in accordance with the Contract Documents.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01320-2
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTALS
1.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
2.
Make the following submissions in accordance with requirements specified elsewhere:
.1
Applications for payment:
GC 5.2
.2
WSIB certificates of clearance:
GC 10.4
.3
Insurance certificates:
GC 11.1
.4
Bonds:
GC 11.2
.5
Construction schedule:
Section 01320
.6
Cash flow chart:
Section 01320
.7
Progress photographs:
Section 01320
.8
Equipment delivery schedule:
Section 01320
.9
Purchase order documentation:
Section 01320
.10
Certified site plan:
Section 01320
.11
Waste audit and reduction plans:
Section 01410
.12
Maintenance and operations data:
Section 01770
.13
Record drawings:
Section 01770
.14
Maintenance materials:
Section 01770
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Make submittals to the Consultant, at Consultant’s office, as called for throughout the Contract
Documents and as the Consultant may reasonably request, in conformance with this Section.
.2
Submit with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in the Work.
Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time
and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.
.3
Work affected by a submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.
.4
Review submittals prior to submission to the Consultant. This review shall certify that each submittal
has been checked and coordinated with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.5
All submittals must bear the stamp of the Contractor, indicating the date reviewed and the signature of
a responsible official in the Contractor's organization indicating in writing that such submittals have
been checked and coordinated by the Contractor, and that they conform to the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
.6
Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to the specific project will be returned without
being examined and shall be considered rejected.
.7
Notify the Consultant in writing of changes made in the submittals from the Contract Documents.
.8
The review of submittals by the Consultant or revisions made by the Consultant to submittals shall not
relieve the Contractor from responsibility for changes made from the Contract Documents not covered
by the Contractor's written notification to the Consultant.
01330-1
22/09/2011
KMAI
.9
The review of submittals by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with
the general design concept. This review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design
inherent in the submittals, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor submitting the
same.
.10
Verify and coordinate field measurements and affected adjacent work.
.11
Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in his submission is not relieved by Consultant's
review of submittals and for deviations in his submission from requirements of Contract Documents.
.12
The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any conflicts occurring between Subcontractors, which
result from lack of comparison and coordination of submittals of the work of the affected
subcontractors..
.13
The Consultant's review of submittals does not authorize changes in cost or time.
.14
The Work shall conform to reviewed submittals subject to the above conditions.
.15
Make any changes in submittals which the Consultant may require, consistent with the Contract
Documents and resubmit unless otherwise directed by the Consultant.
.16
Delays caused by the rejection of, or requirements for resubmissions of submittals are the
responsibility of the Contractor.
.17
Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.
3.
SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
.1
Within 15 days of submission of construction schedule submit a schedule of submittals for product
data, shop drawings, samples, lists of materials and other documentation requiring Consultant's
review.
.2
For each item requiring submission and review show anticipated date of submission and critical date
for return of reviewed submission.
.3
Design sequence of submissions to reflect requirements of construction schedule.
.4
Allow up to 15 working days for Consultant's review for each submission. Stagger submissions as
much as possible to permit adequate review time for each item submitted. If several submissions are
made at the same time or within a short time of each other, indicate order of priority in which
submissions should be reviewed. Multiple submissions made at the same time will not be reviewed
simultaneously.
.5
Include sufficient time to permit corrections and resubmission, if necessary, without affecting
construction schedule.
4.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
.1
Not less than 15 days prior to first application for payment, submit schedule of values in accordance
with requirements of GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT.
.2
Follow specifications table of contents as basis for degree of breakdown required. Show breakdown
for different construction phases/stages if required by Consultant.
.3
Break down cost for large items of work as directed by Consultant.
.4
Provide additional cost breakdown information if requested by Consultant.
5.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings required by Contract Documents, in accordance with requirements of GC 3.11
01330-2
22/09/2011
KMAI
SHOP DRAWINGS.
.2
In addition to shop drawings specified in other Sections of the Work, submit shop drawings of
hoardings, protective canopies, barricades, shoring and bracing, temporary offices, temporary storage
sheds, and other similar items upon Consultant’s request.
.3
Adjustments made on shop drawings by the Consultant are not intended to change the Contract Price
or Contract Time. If adjustments affect the value of Work, state such in writing to the Consultant prior
to proceeding with the Work.
.4
Make changes in shop drawings as the Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents.
When resubmitting, notify the Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested.
.5
Submit one transparency and 4 whiteprints or photocopies of each shop drawings required.
.6
Submit 4 copies of Product data sheets or brochures for each Product required where shop drawings
will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of Product.
.7
If upon review by the Consultant, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are
made, the transparency will be returned and fabrication and installation of work may proceed. If shop
drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings,
through the same procedure indicated above, shall be performed before fabrication and installation of
work may proceed.
.8
Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams,
connections, explanatory notes, and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where
articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have
been coordinated, regardless of the Section under which the adjacent items will be supplied and
installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.
.9
Indicate all dimensions on shop drawings required for the proper completion of the work in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and as may be required by the Consultant to assist
in his review of the Shop Drawings. Where dimensions are not clearly inferable from the Contract
Documents Contractor shall indicate dimensions as per his calculations and request verification of
these dimensions from the Consultant.
.10
Product data shall be detailed and complete including but not necessarily limited to the following, as
applicable:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.11
Manufacturer’s name
Product name
Generic description
Technical information
References to testing data
Installation requirements
Precautions for safe use
Connection and commissioning data.
Shop Drawings shall show all pertinent information including but not necessarily limited to::
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Plans, elevations, sections and details;
Dimensions;
Configurations, types and sizes required: identify each unit type on drawing and on product;
Placing patterns, spacing, layout, locations, erection diagrams;
Integral reinforcement, framing, fabrication;
Anchoring: method and devices;
Control joints, joints and connections between elements;
Preparation and reinforcement for other products to be attached clearly indicating adjacent
construction and assembly;
Welds: For structural welds use AWS symbols and clearly show net weld lengths and sizes;
Design loads for engineered products such as, trusses; mechanical and electrical equipment;
01330-3
22/09/2011
KMAI
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
Descriptions of materials;
Material: thicknesses;
Finishes, shop and integral including thicknesses, colours, textures;
Glues, adhesives, joinery;
Installation details and instructions (for products to be installed by other Sections);
Functions;
Indication of work to be performed by other Sections;
Adjacent work and its relationship to the work of the section submitting the drawing.
.12
Shop drawings requiring a professional engineer’s seal and signature, but submitted without, will be
rejected and returned to the Contractor without being reviewed.
.13
The Contractor shall be responsible for duplicating and distributing reviewed shop drawings and
product data for all purposes required and to all parties affected, including but not limited to the
following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
6.
Owner
Jurisdictional authorities
Sub-contractors
Site office
Operation and maintenance manuals
Independent testing agencies.
SAMPLES
.1
Submit for review identical samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections.
Label samples as to origin and intended use in the Work.
.2
Deliver samples prepaid to Consultant's business address.
.3
Notify the Consultant in writing, at the time of submission of deviations in samples from requirements
of Contract Documents.
.4
Adjustments made on samples by the Consultant are not intended to change the Contract Price to
Time. If adjustments affect the value of Work, state such in writing to the Consultant prior to
proceeding with the Work.
.5
Make changes in samples which the Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents.
.6
Samples: show the following specified or proposed:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Materials;
Construction;
Finish;
Colour, texture, pattern (full range).
.7
One of each pair of accepted samples will be returned to the Contractor who shall hold it on Site until
removal of it from the Site is permitted by the Consultant.
.8
Any materials or assemblies, whether incorporated in the Work or not, which do not match approved
samples, shall be removed and replaced at no extra cost to the Owner.
7.
SHOP DRAWING AND SAMPLE FORMAT
.1
Drawing linework/image: non-erasable, clear, readable, reproducible, black, or dark colour, or colour
contrasting with paper.
.2
Drawing sheets: conform to: CAN3-A31-M75 (R1999) CAN/CSA-Z234.1-89 (R1995)
.1
Manual on Metric Building Drawing Practice, National Research Council, 1976, as revised to
June 1977, for size, shape, and folding of sheets and for borders and title blocks.
01330-4
22/09/2011
KMAI
.2
.3
.3
Drawings: conform to the Manual on Metric Building Drawing Practice, National Research Council,
1976, revised to 1977, as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.4
.2
.3
.4
9.
Be constructed of the same material as specified or proposed for the sampled element of the
Work.
Be large enough to show all relevant detail and pattern and no larger.
Prepare samples of assemblies to hold together as a unit.
Be full scale unless permitted otherwise by the Consultant.
Each sheet or sample shall bear a title block or label giving the following information:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
8.
Site plans: 1:200
Key plans: 1:300, 1:500, as required
General floor plans: 1:100, 1:50
Detail plans: 1:50, 1:20, as required
Details: 1:20, 1:10, 1:5, 1:2, 1:1, as required.
Samples: conform to the following:
.1
.5
Sheet size shall be from 'A' Series. Largest sheet size for this Work shall be A1. Smallest
size sheet for this Work shall be A4
Transparent sheets shall have a clear area 100x250 or 150x200 in size set aside exclusively
for the review stamps of the Consultant.
Name of the Work;
Descriptive name of subject matter;
Name, address and telephone number of fabricator;
Name, address and telephone number of person responsible for preparation of submittal;
Fabricator's project and submittal reference numbers;
Date prepared, and scale;
Date approved and initial of authorized person;
Stamp of engineer where required by the Contract Documents or Authorities.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
.1
Applications for monthly payments shall be submitted on CCDC Forms 15-77, 15A-1982 and 15B-77
showing the full schedule of values. Four (4) copies of the formal application for payment shall be
submitted to the Consultant.
.2
Change orders as approved during the preceding month shall be entered on the appropriate
application form and shall be kept up-to-date month by month.
.3
All expenditures against cash allowances shall be similarly claimed for the month that they were
invoiced and must be supported by accompanying invoices at that time. All invoices require
Consultant’s review and written annotation prior to being submitted as part of an application for
payment. Show change orders and allowances individually and in total and remainder of contingency
allowance on each application.
.4
The Contractor shall provide, with each application after the first, a Statutory Declaration on C.C.A.
Form 9B certifying that all accounts have been paid for which he has received payment. C.C.A. Form
No. 9A shall be used for the final application.
.5
The Contractor shall provide with each application a current Workplace Safety and Insurance Board
Certificate of Clearance.
.6
Suppliers and Subcontractors shall notify the Consultant in writing, if the Contractor fails to make
payment when due. Failing notice, the Consultant shall assume the payments have been duly made.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
01330-5
22/09/2011
KMAI
.1
Refer to GC 2.2.6 and 2.2.7.
.2
Upon award of Contract, prior to commencement of the Work on site, thoroughly review all Contract
Documents and identify any errors, inconsistencies and omissions.
.3
Submit requests for information (RFI) to Consultant in hard copy delivered by hand, fax, mail or
courier; or via e-mail; c.c. RFI’s to relevant subconsultant and the project manager.
.4
Consecutively number requests for information as directed by Consultant.
.5
Allow for sufficient response time which the Consultant may reasonably require. In case of multiple
submissions identify order of priority.
.6
Indicate clearly, in writing, the reason for the submittal and make specific reference to the Contract
Documents and requirements of the Work requiring interpretation or clarification. Provide sketches
and marked up drawings when requested by Consultant to facilitate Consultant review. Failure to
comply with this requirement will result in rejection of the submittal.
.7
Submittal will be rejected, if information requested in the submittal is contained in, or reasonably
inferable from the Contract Documents
.8
Contractor may make a request for information for the following purposes;
.9
10.
.1
To request an interpretation or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents
.2
To indicate an error or omission in the Contract Documents and to request direction.
Upon review of the request for information the Consultant may respond as follows:
.1
Consultant will interpret or clarify the requirements of the Contract Documents via a Site
Instruction
.2
Consultant will issue a Contemplated Change order where if in his opinion a change to the
Contract Time or Price is required as a result of the clarification or interpretation.
.3
Consultant will reject requests for information if not submitted in compliance with
requirements specified.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE
.1
Any variation in the Contract involving a change in the total amount of the Contract Price shall be
initiated by the Consultant in the form of a Proposed Change (PC) describing the work proposed under
the variation and requesting a quotation from the Contractor.
.2
Three copies of the PC will be issued to the Contractor, and Owner.
.3
The Contractor shall inform all Subcontractors and suppliers of the contemplated change.
.4
The Contractor shall return two copies of the PC with his quotation for the work.
.5
The Contractor's quotation shall cover all work described in the PC and all other work caused,
however incidentally, by the contemplated change plus effect on Contract Time. Once the quotation is
accepted by the Consultant no further extra costs or time will be accepted in relation to the
contemplated change. Similarly, it is understood that the Owner is served notice of the contemplated
change upon its issue and shall indicate any objection thereupon.
.6
The Contractor shall return a PC with quotation promptly.
.7
If the quotation received is unacceptable to the Consultant with regard to price or time, the Consultant
will reject same and request a revised quotation from the Contractor. If an acceptable quotation is not
received within 30 days of the original issue of a PC, the Consultant shall proceed with GC 6.2.5.
01330-6
22/09/2011
KMAI
.8
When the Consultant deems the Contractor's quotation is acceptable, or if the Consultant has
evaluated the PC himself as stated above and if no objection is received from the Owner, the
Consultant shall prepare a Change Order (CO) for the change including the acceptable variations from
the Contract Price and Time.
.9
Four copies of the CO will be forwarded to the Owner for approval and for signature, three signed
copies shall be returned to the Consultant, two shall be forwarded to the Contractor, who shall keep
one copy in his head office and one copy at the Site.
.10
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all relevant Subcontractors with the required copies
of a CO.
11.
CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS
.1
Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workplace Safety and Insurance Board status
certificate and transcripts of insurances and bonding.
END
01330-7
22/09/2011
KMAI
SECTION 01350 - SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
1.
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS
.1
Contractor's use of site and premises is limited to permit Owner’s use of existing facilities to continue
with the least amount of interference possible.
.2
At all times restrict access, parking, material deliveries execution of work, operations and procedures
to assigned locations and times and do not deviate there without prior approval by Owner.
.3
Periodically review proposed construction operations with Owner and Consultant and co-operate as
required to ensure that Owner’s interests and requirements are not unduly compromised.
.4
Schedule excessively noisy work outside regular school hours, as directed by the Owner.
.5
Do not execute overhead work above or adjacent to occupied areas, public walkways, exits, except
where it can be demonstrated that adequate protective devices are in place.
.6
Cap or provide temporary filters at returns of existing air systems.
.7
Prevent spread of dust and noxious fumes, odours to occupied areas.
.8
Prevent disruption of existing life safety systems in occupied areas including fire detection and alarm
systems, fire protection systems, exits, emergency lighting. Comply with "Guidelines for Maintaining
Fire Safety During Construction in Existing Buildings" issued by the Office of the Fire Marshal, dated
January, 2003.
.9
Work within occupied areas may not be carried out except during previously mutually arranged and
authorized periods outside regular business hours, authorized by Owner.
.10
Where work is permitted to be carried out within occupied spaces take the following action upon
completion of each authorized work period:
Restore disturbed surfaces by patching, covering, painting, finishing as directed by Consultant.
Remove construction materials, equipment tools and debris.
2.
PHASING / SCHEDULING
.1
3.
Execute the work in accordance with the following phasing /scheduling requirements:
.1
Commence work upon receipt of letter of Intent. Work that is temperature sensitive i.e.
exterior restoration while exterior temperatures are consistently above 5 degrees Celsius.
.2
Substantial completion of Work must be attained by March 15 2012
.3
Work on Base and accepted Separate Price Phases to all achieve substantial performance
th
by March 15 , 2012.
.4
Separate Price 3 2 Floor Coach House Renovation phase if accepted, to proceed
concurrently with other phases.
.5
Coach House Renovation to co-ordinate with school occupancy on Ground Floor.
th
nd
ALTERATIONS, MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP
.1
Cut, alter, modify existing work as required to accommodate new work.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01350-1
.2
Materials used in patching, making good and refinishing of existing construction and/or components
shall be of a standard equal to that specified for new construction and if not specified, equal to or
exceeding that of original existing work.
.3
Quality of workmanship employed in alterations work shall be equal to that specified for new work if
not specified, equal to or exceeding original existing work.
.4
Existing materials and equipment which are to be used in new work shall be repaired and refinished as
necessary or additional new materials and components required to facilitate reinstallation of such
existing materials and equipment.
.5
Unless otherwise shown, as part of the work of this Section, remove and relocate, or temporarily
remove and reinstall, existing materials and equipment as required to complete work of the Contract.
.6
Make good by restoring to original condition or to an altered finished condition acceptable to
Consultant, existing construction, equipment, materials, finishes, features, not scheduled for
alterations but damaged or disturbed due to work of this Contract.
.7
Prepare existing surfaces scheduled to receive new finish by grinding, filling, overcoating, washing,
etching, shot blasting or other chemical or mechanical means, as required to ensure satisfactory
installation of new finish.
.8
Unless otherwise detailed finish new surfaces flush with existing surfaces. Make junctions between
existing and new work, or at replaced or remedial work visually undetectable. Make surfaces adjacent
to one another of the same material, unit sizes, colour, and texture. If this is impossible, make a
proposal of intended method of making good for approval, before proceeding.
4.
CUTTING NEW OPENINGS
.1
5.
Prior to cutting any new openings into / through existing reinforced concrete elements, conduct radar
survey, or other type of non-destructive survey, of areas to be cut, to locate presence of reinforcing
steel, conduits and other embedded items. Make adjustment in locations to be cut, to avoid
embedded items. Surveys employing X-ray technique may only be carried out when building is
unoccupied.
EXISTING SERVICES
.1
Ensure that existing services (including but not limited to hot and cold water, drainage, power, heating,
ventilation cooling, life safety and security systems) required for occupied areas are not damaged or
interrupted during execution of work. Reconfigure, relocate, extend, modify existing services as
required, to maintain services.
.2
Should existing services be accidentally disrupted, make complete restoration immediately and ensure
adequate protection to avoid future disruption.
.3
Where existing building security system is breached due to Contractor's negligence, Contractor shall
be responsible for any damage or theft, regardless if area where damage or theft occurred is under
Contractor's control or not.
.4
Schedule required disruptions of services to occupied areas during times acceptable to Owner. Notify
Owner minimum 48 hours prior to executing any work which would disrupt services to occupied areas
and obtain permission to proceed. Restore systems to their proper operating condition at the end of
each interruption.
6.
DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES
.1
If, in the execution of the Work, any unknown and not previously identified designated substances (as
defined by Bill 208 of the Occupational Health and Safety Act) are encountered cease work in area
22/09/2011
KMAI
01350-2
affected and inform Consultant immediately. Do not proceed with work in areas affected until receiving
instructions from Consultant.
7.
PROTECTION
.1
Keep area of work safe and secure at all times, denying access to unauthorized personnel.
.1
8.
Hoardings:
.1
Exterior hoardings: erect temporary hoardings in accordance with requirements of
Section 01500, to separate exterior work, staging and storage areas from Owner
occupied areas.
.2
Interior hoardings: erect temporary dustproof, fire resistant partitions in interior
locations, to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas. Temporary
partitions shall be finished with painted gypsum board and resilient wall base
where facing Owner occupied areas. Where required for Contractor’s access
provide painted, lockable steel door and frame. Submit layout of temporary
partitions.
.2
Protect existing work, services, and equipment from damage. Make good any damage caused.
.3
Provide minimum 12.5 mm thick plywood when working on top of existing roofs.
.4
Ensure that no part of the existing structure is overloaded due to work executed under this
Contract.
.5
Take special measures when moving heavy loads or equipment. Protect floors, jambs and soffits
of openings used as passageways or through which materials are moved. Use rubber
tired conveyances only when moving materials and equipment inside building. Provide
suitable coverings as required to protect existing work.
.6
Provide adequate guards, barricades and other temporary protection to prevent injury to persons.
.7
Protect existing building interiors from damage by weather, when executing work which affects
integrity of exterior walls and roof. Schedule activities during dry periods and/or provide
temporary weatherproof closures to protect openings made in exterior walls and roof. At
no cost to Owner, replace interior finishes damaged by weather as a result of the Work of
this Contract.
SCHOOL SAFETY & SECURITY
.1
The Contractor shall understand, and ensure that all Trades understand that student safety is the
first priority in all instances.
.2
The buildings shall remain secure from intrusion at all times particularly from the school
population. Adjacent buildings which have a surveillance system shall have the surveillance
system operational at all times. In such cases where the surveillance system must be shut down
by the Contractor to do repairs or other alterations of any description the Contractor shall be to
protect the premises outside the school's normal hours of operation, with full time on site security
service personnel.
.3
All personal injury incidents and property damage, no matter how minor, which occur on school
property, shall be reported immediately to the school principal.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01350-3
9.
10.
ACCESS TO AND DRIVING IN SCHOOL YARDS
.1
Access to School Yard:
Vehicles shall not enter or be parked in school yards without first obtaining the authorization of the
school principal or his/her designate, usually the Chief Caretaker.
.2
Driving in School Yards:
When a vehicle is being driven on the school grounds, the driver shall observe normal safe driving
practices consistent with proximity to school zones, and escorted by a designated “flagman” on
foot.
.3
No vehicle shall be left unsupervised with keys in the ignition, nor with its engine running
SCHOOL OPERATION & USE OF EXISTING PREMISES
.1
The Contractor shall organize his work at the school in cooperation with the Principal, through the
Owner’s Representative, so that the academic programme of the school is not disrupted. The
Contractor shall include in the Contract, all costs required to phase or stage the project so that
construction does not interfere with normal operations of the school.
.2
Take reasonable measures for the control of noise, vibration and dust during operations while the
building is in use.
.3
Prevent excessive noises which will be disturbing to school operation. Machine tools which are set
up in fixed locations shall be so located as to minimize noise and suitable sound deflectors shall
be used if directed by the Consultant. Air compressors and pneumatic hammers shall be used only
with the express authorization of the Consultant at times as directed by him. Gasoline welding
machines or gasoline driven compressors shall not be used. The Contractor may be requested
from time to time to suspend noisy or otherwise objectionable operations during certain functions,
should such operations cause undue interference with the said functions. The Contractor will be
expected to extend the fullest co-operation and courtesy in such cases.
.4
Parking is available only within the construction compound and areas designated on drawings.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01350-4
SECTION 01410 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.
PERMITS, LICENCES, FEES
.1
Comply with requirements of the TCDSB.
.2
Where permits, licences and inspection fees are required by authorities having jurisdiction for specific
trade functions, they shall be obtained by particular subtrade responsible for that work.
.3
Review building permit set with Consultant immediately following receipt of building permit and jointly
determine whether or not changes to Contract are required.
.4
Be responsible for ensuring that no work is undertaken which is conditional on permits, approvals,
reviews, licences, fees, until all applicable conditions are met. No time extension will be allowed for
delay in obtaining necessary permits.
.5
Report to the Consultant in writing any condition which would prohibit granting of any permit or
approval before work affecting such items is commenced.
.6
Give notice of completion of project prior to occupancy, as required by applicable legislation.
2.
BUILDING CODE, BY-LAWS, REGULATIONS
.1
Carry out work in accordance with requirements of the Ontario Building Code, latest issue, including all
amendments and revisions.
.2
Comply with requirements, regulations and ordinances of other jurisdictional authorities.
.3
Where it is necessary to carry out work outside property lines, such as sidewalks, paving or concrete
curbs, comply with applicable municipal requirements.
.4
Promptly submit written notice to Consultant, of observed variance of Contract Documents from
requirements of Building Code and authorities having jurisdiction. Assume responsibility for work
known to be contrary to such requirements and performed without notifying Consultant.
3.
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
.1
Be governed by pertinent safety requirements of Federal or Provincial Governments and of municipal
bodies having authority, particularly the Ontario Construction Safety Act, and regulations of Ontario
Ministry of Labour, and work in conjunction with proper safety associations operating under the
authority of Ontario Workers' Compensation Act.
.2
Do not, in the performance of the work, in any manner endanger the safety or unlawfully interfere with
the convenience of the public.
.3
Notify the Ontario Ministry of Labour of intended work of this Contract as required by the Occupational
Health and Safety Act. One copy of the "Notice of Project" shall be handed to Consultant.
4.
FIRE PROTECTION
.1
Refer to technical Sections of Specifications and Drawings for fire protection requirements.
.2
Test methods used to determine fire hazard classification and fire endurance rating shall be as
required by Ontario Building Code.
.3
Upon request, furnish Consultant with evidence of compliance with project fire protection
requirements.
5.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
.1
Comply with provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Act as amended to include WHMIS
(Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System).
.2
Ensure that Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available on site prior to first delivery to site of
22/09/2011
KMAI
01410-1
SECTION 01410 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
any controlled material or substance.
.3
Maintain on site for duration of Contract a hazardous materials log containing all required MSDS.
.4
Log shall be open for inspection for Owner, Consultant and all personnel on site.
.5
Ensure that workers are instructed in the purpose and content of MSDS.
6.
WASTE MANAGEMENT
.1
Comply with applicable regulations of the Ministry of Environment and Energy governing waste
management.
.2
Prepare and submit waste audit and waste reduction plan and source separation plan in accordance
with applicable regulatory requirements.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01410-2
SECTION 01450 - QUALITY CONTROL
1.
INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AND TESTING
.1
Requirements specified herein apply to independent inspection and testing specified under technical
Specification Sections, Divisions 2 to 9. Owner will pay separately for independent inspection and
testing services.
.2
Requirements specified herein do not apply to the following:
.1
Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of public
authorities.
.2
Testing, adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical systems and equipment.
.3
Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor’s convenience.
.4
Tests specified in Division 2 to 9 inclusive, to be included in Contract such as mill tests,
certificates of compliance and testing to be carried out by Contractor under direction of
Consultant.
.3
Failure by independent inspection and testing agency to detect defective work or materials shall not in
any way prevent later rejection, when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate Consultant for
final acceptance.
.4
Independent inspection and testing agency (hereinafter referred to as testing agency) is expected to
do the following:
.1
Act on a professional and unprejudiced basis and carry out inspection and testing functions
to establish compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.
.2
Check work as it progresses and prepare reports stating results of tests and conditions of
work and state in each report whether specimens tested conform to requirements of Contract
Documents, specifically noting deviations.
.3
Distribute reports as follows:
.1
Owner: 1 copy
.2
Consultant: 2 copies
.3
Subconsultants affected: 1 copy
.4
Contractor: 2 copies
.5
Building Department: 1 copy
.5
Testing agency is not authorized to amend or release any requirements of Contract Documents, nor to
approve or accept any portion of work.
.6
Contractor shall do the following:
.7
.1
Notify testing agency minimum 48 hours in advance of operations to allow for assignment of
personnel and scheduling of tests without causing delay in work.
.2
Provide testing agency with access to work at all times.
.3
Supply material samples for testing.
.4
Supply casual labour and other incidental services required by testing agency.
.5
Provide facilities for site storage of samples.
.6
Make good work disturbed by testing agency.
When initial inspection and testing indicates non-compliance with Contract Documents, any
subsequent re-inspection and retesting occasioned by non-compliance shall be performed by same
testing agency and cost thereof borne by Contractor.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01450-1
SECTION 01450 - QUALITY CONTROL
2.
MOCK UPS
.1
Where required by Contract Documents construct mock-ups of work on site, in size and at location
directed by Consultant.
.2
Construct mock-ups prior to start of affected work. Allow sufficient time for Consultant's review. Work
affected by mock-ups may not commence prior to acceptance of mock-up.
.3
Construct mock ups to include all related specified materials and workmanship. Make revisions as
directed by Consultant, in accordance with intent of Contract Documents, until mock-ups are
acceptable.
.4
Mock ups, reviewed and accepted by Consultant, shall become the standard of quality against which
installed work will be measured.
.5
Mock ups, by prior arrangement, may be incorporated into finished work if approved by Consultant.
3.
TOLERANCES
.1
4.
Unless more stringent tolerances are required by a Section of the Specifications or a referenced
standard, meet the following tolerances for installed work:
.1
"plumb" shall mean plumb within ± 3 mm in 3 m from true plumb
.2
"level" shall mean level within ± 3 mm in 3 m from true level
.3
"square" shall mean not in excess of 30 seconds less or more than 90°.
.4
"straight" shall mean within ± 3 mm in 3 m under a 3 m straightedge.
BUILDING ENVELOPE
.1
Requirements specified herein apply to all elements of the exterior building envelope.
.2
Anchor exterior cladding components to structure in manner suitable to accommodate structural
deflection and creep. Design anchorage to withstand expected wind loads, positive and negative, in
accordance with applicable regulations.
.3
Ensure that air spaces within exterior building components are firestopped in accordance with
applicable regulations.
.4
Ensure that air spaces on the outside of vertical air barrier/vapour retarder (walls) are constructed with
adequate drainage provisions to the exterior.
5.
DRAINAGE
.1
Lay out and construct work to ensure that positive drainage is provided to roof drains and floor drains,
as set in their final position, preventing undrained areas and ponding.
.2
Ensure that allowable construction tolerances and structural deflection do not cause ponding of water.
.3
Report to Consultant in writing prior to executing work affected, in case adequate drainage cannot be
provided.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01450-2
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1.
GENERAL
.1
Provide all temporary facilities and controls required for the proper execution of the work.
.2
Provide and maintain temporary systems in accord with applicable regulations and requirements.
Arrange for, obtain and pay for any permits required.
2.
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY & LIGHTING
.1
Provide temporary electrical lighting and power system for use by all Sections. There is no power or
water available in the existing buildings. There is an existing transformer on site that can be access
for power at the Contractor’s expense.
.2
Arrange, obtain and pay for service, including meter, of sufficient size to allow use of required tools
and equipment and to ensure adequate lighting levels for the proper execution of work.
.3
Install and maintain temporary electrical systems in accord with Construction Safety Association's
"Temporary Wiring Standards on Construction Sites", the Ontario Electrical Code and other authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.
TEMPORARY HEATING
.1
Furnish equipment, labour and fuel to provide temporary heat as required for proper execution of work.
.2
Heat enclosed building to minimum 15 C at all times until taken over by Owner. Provide intermittent
o
heating up to 21 C as required for proper execution of work.
.3
Use propane or natural gas heaters of a type where the flame is not exposed. Open flame heaters are
not permitted.
.4
Uniformly distribute heat to avoid hot and cold areas and to prevent excessive drying.
4.
o
TEMPORARY VENTILATION
.1
Provide minimum 1 air change per hour for enclosed areas receiving architectural finishes.
.2
Prior to commencement of work where hazardous or volatile adhesives, coatings or substances are
used, install adequate mechanical ventilation.
.3
Do not allow excessive build-up of moisture inside building.
5.
TEMPORARY TELEPHONE
.1
Provide site telephone service for duration of Contract until completion.
.2
Make telephone available to Owner and Consultant.
.3
Provide and maintain in operation on a separate line a fax machine on site for duration of Contract.
6.
TEMPORARY WATER
.1
Provide temporary water supply, for use by all Sections.
.2
Water shall be clean and potable.
7.
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
.1
Provide temporary toilet facilities, including handwash facilities, for all personnel on site.
.2
Keep facilities clean and sanitary and provided with required supplies at all times.
.3
Except where temporary sanitary facilities are connected to municipal sewer system, periodically
remove wastes from site.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01500-1
8.
TEMPORARY FIRST-AID FACILITIES
.1
9.
Provide site equipment and medical facilities necessary to supply first-aid service to injured personnel
in accordance with regulations of the Workers' Compensation Act. Maintain facilities for duration of
Contract.
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
.1
Provide and maintain in proper working order at least four fire extinguishers on each floor, prominently
placed, until completion of work.
.2
Fire extinguishers shall be minimum 9 kg 4A 60BC type.
.3
Remove fire extinguishers from site, upon completion of work or when directed by Consultant.
.4
Where gas welding or cutting is to be done within 3 m or above combustible material, or above space
that may be occupied by persons, interpose shields of non-combustible material. Tanks supplying
gases for welding or cutting shall be placed at no greater distance from the work than is necessary
and shall be securely fastened in an upright position. Such tanks shall be free from exposure to the
sun or high temperature.
10.
TEMPORARY USE OF NEW PERMANENT SERVICE & EQUIPMENT
.1
Do not use any new permanent service or equipment without Owner's written approval.
.2
Where permission is granted to use permanent services and equipment provide competent persons to
operate services and equipment; inspect frequently and maintain facilities in proper operating
condition at all times.
.3
Permanent services and equipment shall be turned over to Owner in "as new" and perfect operating
condition.
.4
Use of permanent systems and equipment as temporary facilities shall not affect the warranty
conditions and warranty period for such systems and equipment. Make due allowance to ensure that
Owner will receive full benefits of equipment manufacturers warranty after project takeover.
11.
CONSTRUCTION AIDS
.1
Provide temporary stairs, ladders, ramps required for movement and placing of materials, equipment
and personnel.
.2
Provide mechanical hoisting equipment and fully qualified operators as required during construction.
.3
Erect required scaffolding independent of walls, arranged to avoid interference with work of other
Sections as much as possible.
.4
Provide and maintain required shoring and bracing in accordance with Construction Safety Act and
other applicable regulations.
.5
Shoring and all false work over one tier in height shall be designed and shall bear the stamp of a
registered professional engineer, having experience in this field.
.6
The use of explosive power tools will not be permitted under any circumstances unless equipped with
a device which positively prevents free flight of the stud.
12.
BARRIERS
.1
Protect public and workers from injury.
.2
Provide and maintain required hoardings, barricades, guardrails, and lights in accordance with
applicable regulations.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01500-2
.3
13.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide around assigned work and storage areas 2.4 m high fencing, as
follows:
.1
Steel pipe or tee posts driven into ground minimum 1 m at maximum 2400 mm o.c.
.2
50 mm hot dip galvanized chain link mesh wire tied to posts.
.3
Where required, for construction access, hinged, lockable chain link gates.
TREE PROTECTION
.1
Within Contractor's assigned work and storage areas and adjacent to designated access routes,
protect existing trees and other plants scheduled to remain. Provide minimum 1.8 m high chain link
fencing outside of dripline of trees or groups of trees and other plants.
.2
Leave fenced areas undisturbed; do not use areas for storage, stockpiling or any other purpose. Do
not dump or flush any contaminants in areas of tree feeder roots.
.3
Do not attach rigging cables to trees.
.4
Where limbs or portions of plants are required to be removed to accommodate new work, they shall be
removed in accordance with accepted arboricultural practice.
.5
Where root systems of protected trees adjacent to construction are exposed or damaged, they shall be
neatly trimmed and the area backfilled with suitable material to prevent desiccation.
.6
Where necessary give plants an overall pruning to restore the balance between roots and top growth
and/or to restore appearance.
.7
Except at locations where specific procedures are included in Contract Documents do not alter grades
around existing trees/plants without first obtaining Consultant's consent and directions.
14.
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
.1
Provide protective coverings to protect work against damage caused by weather, including but not
necessarily limited to rain, snow, ice, wind, frost and excessive heat.
.2
Provide wind breaks and sun shades to allow proper setting and curing of cementitious materials.
.3
Protect building materials from freezing.
.4
Prevent sprayed materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing temporary
enclosures.
.5
Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris.
.6
Prevent tracking of mud and dirt from work area to paved surfaces. Construct mud trap at truck exit
points. Clean paved surfaces daily as requested, removing mud and dirt with scrapers and shovels
and subsequently wash surfaces to satisfaction of Owner and municipal authorities.
15.
PEST CONTROL
.1
16.
Provide rodent control and other pest control programs during construction, in accordance with
requirements of jurisdictional authorities.
TEMPORARY DRAINAGE
.1
Provide and maintain adequate temporary pumping and drainage systems to keep excavations and
structures free of water. Prevent flow of surface water into excavations. Locate sumps away from
foundations. Prevent pumped water from carrying soil in suspension in sufficient quantity to cause
settlement of adjacent earth. Provide sufficient standby equipment to ensure continuity of pumping
systems.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01500-3
.2
Control drainage on site to prevent flooding, erosion and run-off onto adjacent properties as a result of
construction operations.
.3
Dispose of water containing silt in suspension in accordance with requirements of jurisdictional
authorities.
.4
Conform to sedimentation and erosion control requirements of the conservation authority having
jurisdiction. Provide and maintain until completion of work or until directed by Consultant to be
removed, sediment control devices at catch basins, drainage courses and at other locations on site as
directed.
17.
SIGNS
.1
Except as specified here do not erect any signs unless approved by the Consultant.
.2
Erect signs relating to safety on the work, or mandatory regulation notices.
.3
Prior to commencement of work wherein hazardous or volatile cements, coatings, or substances are
used, barricade entire area and post adequate number of "NO SMOKING" signs.
18.
FIELD OFFICE AND SHEDS
.1
Maintain, until completion of Contract, for Contractor's use, a temporary office as required for work,
large enough to accommodate site administrative activities and site meetings, complete with light,
o
heating and cooling equipment to maintain 21 C, ventilation, telephone, fax machine (on separate
line), copier (not combination fax/copier), table and chairs. Do not store materials, tools, equipment in
meeting area; keep clean and tidy.
.2
Provide temporary covers, sheds and platforms of weatherproof construction as may be required for
protection and preservation of materials, small tools, equipment which may be susceptible to damage.
19.
EXISTING FACILITIES
.1
Where services of sufficient capacity are available to existing building, make arrangements with Owner
for us e of electrical power and water. Use facilities as directed and protect them from damage. Make
good any damage caused at no extra cost to Contract.
.2
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide, at no cost to Contract, temporary distribution
systems required to convey power and water from points where they are available to points where they
are required.
.3
Existing washroom facilities may not be used.
.4
Owner will operate existing building heating and cooling systems. Provide additional equipment and
facilities required for work of this Contract.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01500-4
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS
1.
PRODUCT QUALITY
.1
Products supplied for work shall be new and as far as possible and unless otherwise specified, of
Canadian manufacture.
.2
Materials used for temporary facilities are not required to be new, provided they are structurally sound
and in suitable and safe operating condition.
2.
STANDARDS AND TERMINOLOGY
.1
Where a standard has been adopted by these Specifications, incorporate minimum requirements of
such standard into the work. Where requirements of Specifications are more stringent than those of
the standard, follow more stringent requirements.
.2
Reference to standards, specifications, handbooks and manufacturer's catalogues refer to latest
edition thereof and all amendments or revisions applicable at bid closing date, unless date suffix is
included with document number.
.3
Wherever words "acceptable", "approved", "satisfactory", "selected", "directed", "designated",
"permitted", "inspected", "instructed", "required", "submit", or similar words or phrases are used in
standards or elsewhere in Contract Documents, it shall be understood, that "by (to) the Consultant"
follow, unless context provides otherwise.
.4
Where the word "provide" is used in these Contract Documents, it shall be taken to mean "supply and
install" unless specifically noted otherwise.
3.
CERTIFICATION
.1
Building materials, components and elements specified without the use of trade or proprietary names
shall meet requirements specified.
.2
If requested by Consultant, submit evidence of meeting requirements specified. Evidence shall
consist of certification based on tests carried out by an independent testing agency.
.3
Certification based on previous tests for same materials, components or elements is acceptable.
Certification shall be in form of written test reports prepared by testing agency.
4.
AVAILABILITY AND SUBSTITUTIONS
.1
Products which are specified by their proprietary names or by part or catalogue number form the basis
for Contract. No substitutes for these may be used without Consultant's approval in writing.
.2
Where it is found that specified materials have become unavailable for incorporating into work, notify
Consultant immediately of proposed substitution.
.3
Proposed substitution shall be any top quality product considered by Consultant to be of equal quality
and value to that specified, and suitable for purpose intended.
.4
Products proposed as substitutions, and which are considered by Consultant to be suitable for
purpose intended, but which are in his opinion of lesser value and quality than those specified shall
only be accepted as substitution if reasonable credits are allowed for their use.
.5
In order to substantiate equivalency of proposed materials, products or processes, submit samples,
printed product descriptions, test data, installation instructions, standards, certification, sample, guarantee/warranty forms, list of successful projects incorporating such proposals, and similar
information requested by Consultant.
.6
Whenever a substitute is proposed, any change to contract price as a result of acceptance of
proposed product shall include any adjustments to adjacent structure or space in order to accept minor
differences in size or weight between proposed items and corresponding specified items.
.7
Prevent any substitution or request for substitution from delaying construction progress in any way.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01600-1
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS
.8
5.
Requests for substitution resulting from failure to place orders in time will not be entertained. Be
responsible for ordering products in time to ensure their required delivery; bear all costs for failure to
comply with these requirements.
PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
.1
Suitably pack, crate and protect products during transportation to site to preserve their quality and
fitness for the purpose intended.
.2
Store products in original, undamaged condition with manufacturer's labels and seals intact until they
are being incorporated into completed work.
.3
Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's and supplier`s recommendations and
so as to ensure preservation of their quality, appearance and fitness for work.
.4
Arrange materials so as to facilitate prompt inspection, and remove faulty, damaged or rejected
materials immediately from site.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01600-2
SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
1.
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine the site, existing premises and surrounding areas and be fully informed as to the conditions
and limitations under which the work has to be executed. Claims for additional costs will not be
entertained with respect to conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by an inspection
prior to bid closing.
.2
Prior to commencement of work, make careful examination of previously executed work, existing
conditions, levels, dimensions and clearances. Promptly advise Consultant of unsatisfactory
preparatory work and substrate conditions; commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions.
2.
PROTECTION
1.
Ensure that no damage is caused to existing structures, buildings, foundations, pavement, fences,
curbs, grounds, plants, property, utilities, services, finishes during the progress of Work. Repair and
make good any damage caused at no extra cost to Owner to the complete satisfaction of the
respective property owners and authorities having jurisdiction. Do not proceed with repairs or remedial
work without written permission of the Consultant. Only trades specifically capable of performing the
work will be allowed to make remedial or repair work.
.2
Keep surfaces to receive finished flooring dry and free from oil and grease. Stockpiling of damp or wet
building materials and use of mixing boxes or water buckets without protecting floors from moisture
gain by approved means, is prohibited.
.3
Keep municipal roads clean of mud and debris resulting from construction traffic.
.4
Prevent soiling of pavement due to spillage, mixing of material or any other cause. Make good any
damage caused.
.5
Protect new work from damage with suitable protective coverings.
.6
Protect work during periods of suspension, regardless of reason for suspension.
3.
SERVICES AND UTILITY SYSTEMS
.1
Consult with utility companies and other authorities having jurisdiction to ascertain the locations of
existing services on or adjacent to site.
.2
Information as to the location of existing services, if shown on the Drawings, does not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to determine the exact number and location of existing services.
.3
Give proper notices for new services as may be required. Make arrangements with authorities and
utilities for service connections required.
.4
Pay any charges levied by utilities or authorities for work carried out by them in connection with this
Contract, unless specified otherwise.
.5
Operate and maintain all utility systems affected by work of this Contract, until the building or specific
portions thereof have been accepted by the Owner.
.6
Report existing unknown services encountered during excavation to Consultant for instructions; cut
back and cap or plug unused services. Be responsible for the protection of all active services
encountered and for repair of such services if damaged.
4.
SLEEVES, SUPPORTS, AND FASTENERS
.1
Unless specified in other Sections, furnish, set and secure inserts, hangers, sleeves, fasteners,
adhesives, anchors and other supports and fittings required for proper installation of work.
.2
Use exposed metal fastenings and accessories of same texture, colour and finish as base metal on
which they occur.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01700-1
.3
Select appropriate type of anchoring and fastening devices and in sufficient quantity and in such
manner as to provide positive permanent anchorage of unit to be anchored in position. Keep exposed
fasteners to a minimum, evenly spaced and neatly laid out.
.4
Fasteners shall be of permanent type. Do not use wood plugs.
.5
Fasteners which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is being made shall not be
used.
.6
Fasteners in contact with preservative pressure treated wood shall be stainless steel unless otherwise
approved by Consultant.
5.
CONCEALMENT
.1
Conceal ductwork, piping, conduit and wiring located in finished areas, in ceiling spaces and furred
construction unless specifically noted to be exposed.
.2
If any doubt arises as to means of concealment, or intent of Contract Documents in this connection,
request clarification from Consultant before proceeding with portion of work in question.
6.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
.1
Regardless of which Section of work is responsible for any portion of cutting and patching, in each
case tradesmen qualified in work being cut and patched shall be employed to ensure that it is correctly
done.
.2
Any cost caused by omission or ill-timed work shall be borne by party responsible therefore.
.3
Do not endanger any work by cutting, digging or otherwise altering, and do not cut nor alter any
loadbearing element without written authorization by Consultant. Provide bracing, shoring and
temporary supports as required to keep construction safely supported at all times.
.4
Cut holes carefully and not larger than required after they are located by Sections requiring them,
using suitable equipment and tools.
.5
Patching and making good work shall be undetectable in finished work.
7.
WORKMANSHIP
.1
All work shall be carried out in accordance with the best trade practice, by mechanics skilled in the
type of work concerned. Requirements for each trade is listed in each respective Section.
.2
Products, materials, systems and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used
cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's printed directions.
.3
Where specified requirements are in conflict with manufacturer's written directions, follow
manufacturer's directions, but inform Consultant in writing prior to proceeding with affected work.
Where specified requirements are more stringent than manufacturer's directions, comply with specified
requirements.
8.
LINES AND LEVELS
.1
Verify all elevations, lines, levels and dimensions as indicated and report errors, any conflicts, or
inconsistencies to the Consultant before commencing work or as soon as discovered.
.2
Arrange to have building base lines laid out by an Ontario Land Surveyor.
.3
Accurately lay out work and establish lines and levels in accord with requirements of Contract
Documents.
.4
Set up, maintain and protect permanent reference points and provide general dimensions and elevations for all Sections of Work.
22/09/2011
KMAI
01700-2
9.
DIMENSIONS
.1
Check and verify dimensions wherever referring to work. Dimensions, when pertaining to work of
another Section, shall be verified with Section concerned. Details and measurements of work which is
to fit or conform with work installed shall be taken at site.
.2
Do not scale Drawings. If there is ambiguity, lack of information or inconsistency, immediately consult
Consultant for directions. Be responsible for extra costs involved through the disregarding of this
notice.
.3
Walls, partitions and screens shall be considered as extending from floor to underside of structural
deck unless specifically indicated otherwise on Drawings.
10.
LOCATION OF FIXTURES
.1
Location of fixtures, apparatus, equipment, fittings, outlets, conduits, pipes and ducts shown or
specified, but not dimensioned, shall be considered approximate.
.2
Request direction from Consultant to establish exact location. Any relocation caused by Contractor's
failure to request direction from Consultant shall be done by Contractor at no extra cost. Where job
conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make changes at no
additional cost.
.3
Conserve space and coordinate with work of other Sections to ensure that ducts, pipes, conduits and
other items will fit into allocated wall and ceiling spaces, while ensuring adequate space for access
and maintenance.
.4
Where ducts, piping and conduits are permitted to be exposed they shall be neatly and uniformly laid
out parallel to adjacent building lines and parallel to each other where they run in the same direction.
Review exposed installations with Consultant prior to start of work. At no cost to Owner make changes
to exposed work as directed by the Consultant where such work is not installed in accordance with
Consultant's prior review.
.5
Except where locations are specifically noted on Drawings, install exposed mechanical and electrical
fixtures including outlets, switches, thermostats, panels and other items, located on walls, in orderly
and neatly laid out manner, lining up with each other and grouped together where possible. Review
installation with Consultant prior to start of rough-in work. Relocate at no cost to Owner any work
which does not meet this requirement.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01700-3
SECTION 01740 - CLEANING
1.
GENERAL
.1
Be responsible for cleanliness of assigned work areas to satisfaction of Consultant. Maintain work
areas in neat and orderly condition at all times.
.2
Periodically, or when directed by the Consultant, remove from work areas rubbish and waste materials.
.3
Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
.4
Use cleaning material only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
2.
CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
.1
Remove debris, packaging and waste materials frequently.
.2
Keep dust and dirt to an acceptable level, as directed.
.3
Remove oily rags, waste and other hazardous substances from premises at close of each day, or more
often if required.
.4
Clear sidewalks of snow and ice, adjacent to construction site.
3.
FINAL CLEANING
.1
Upon completion of work, or, where work is phased, upon completion of each phase, thoroughly clean
all surfaces and components. Provide professional cleaning by a recognized, established cleaning
company, to allow Owner to occupy without further cleaning except where specifically indicated
otherwise.
.2
Remove stains, dirt and smudges from finished surfaces.
.3
Clean exposed finished surfaces in accordance with respective material manufacturer's
recommendations.
.4
Clean mechanical and electrical fixtures and other fittings of labels, wrappings, paper and other foreign
material.
.5
Replace heating, ventilation and air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction.
Clean inside of ducts, blowers and coils.
.6
Remove from work areas all waste and surplus materials from all areas, including roofs and ceiling
spaces.
.7
Steam clean existing masonry which becomes an interior exposed wall surface.
.8
Remove snow and ice from driveways, parking areas and walks.
.9
Power wash paved surfaces.
.1
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
All waste materials resulting from construction activities belong to the Contractor and shall be removed
and legally disposed unless clearly stated otherwise.
4.
.2
Separate recyclable/reusable materials to maximum extent possible from general waste stream and
transport to recycling/reuse facilities.
.3
Fires and burning of waste materials is not permitted on site.
.4
Do not bury waste or materials on site.
.5
Do not dispose of liquid waste or volatile materials into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
01740-1
SECTION 01770 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.
REFERENCE STANDARD
.1
2.
Comply with provisions of OAA, OGCA Document No. 100, April 1997 "Take-Over Procedures" except
as modified in these Specifications.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
.1
Provide operation and maintenance manuals. Data shall be contained in D-ring binders with soft vinyl
covers. Binders shall have clear plastic pocket at back of spine identification containing label
"Operation and Maintenance Manual" and project name and volume number, if applicable. Each
manual shall contain a title sheet listing project name, date and volume number and names and
addresses of Contractors and Subcontractors, Consultant and Subconsultants.
.2
Provide operating and maintenance data, prepared on 8 1/2" X 11" sheets in printed or typewritten
form.
.3
Data shall be assembled in systematic order, generally following the specification format. Provide
labelled, celluloid covered tabs fastened to hard paper dividers to identify different Sections.
.4
Provide the following material as applicable to work of this Contract:
3.
.1
List of contents. If more than one volume is required, provide a cross-reference contents
page at front of each volume.
.2
Complete list of subcontractors and suppliers, showing name, address, telephone/fax
numbers, name of contact person and description of work done.
.3
Complete list of products used in the work showing product name, part number or code and
manufacturer for each listing; follow specification format.
.4
Copy of finish hardware list, complete with all amendments and revisions.
.5
Schedule of paints and coatings. Include sufficient explanation to fully identify each surface
with the applicable paint or coating used. Enclose copy of colour schedule.
.6
Maintenance instructions for all finished surfaces.
.7
Brochures, cuts of all equipment and fixtures.
.8
Operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment.
.9
Valve manual.
.10
Controls schematics.
.11
Extended warranties.
.12
Maintenance contracts.
.13
Other data required elsewhere in Contract Documents or deemed necessary by Consultant.
EXTENDED WARRANTIES
1.
Definition: Warranty = guarantee.
2.
Submission Requirements:
.1
Submit extended warranties as part of "Operating and Maintenance Manuals".
.2
Arrange extended warranties in systematic order matching Specification format. Include a
table of contents listing warranties in same order.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
01770-1
.3
Each warranty must show:
.1
.2
.3
4.
.4
All extended warranties must be presented under Contractor's letterhead, seal and signature
and must bear similar wording to that specified in Contract Documents.
.5
Submit manufacturers' Product warranties in accordance with GC 12.3.6.
RECORD DRAWINGS
.1
Using the updated AutoCAD drawing specified in Section 01320, finalize the as-built construction
documents including all schedules and detail books.
.2
Clearly and prominently mark each drawing "RECORD DRAWING prepared by ___________
________________________(name of Contractor).
.3
Submit CAD file of record drawings and one set of whiteprints of updated CAD file to Consultant prior
to application for Final Payment.
5.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
.1
Deliver to the location directed by Consultant maintenance materials as required elsewhere in these
Specifications. Obtain receipt for delivered materials and submit copy of receipt to Consultant.
.2
Package materials so that they are protected from damage and loss of essential properties.
.3
Label packaged materials for proper identification of contents and project name.
6.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Prior to requesting Substantial Performance, at a time acceptable to Owner and Consultant, but not
before operating and maintenance data has been reviewed and accepted by Consultant, instruct
designated Owner's representatives in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment.
.2
Arrange training sessions for each type of operating system and equipment. Sessions shall be
conducted by qualified instructors and shall be of sufficient duration and depth to adequately instruct
participants.
.3
Throughout the training sessions make reference to reviewed operation and maintenance manuals to
familiarize participants with the data provided.
.4
Prepare an attendance record for each training session, to be signed by each participant upon
conclusion of session. Show date and time of session, subject of session and name, title and
organization of each participant. Submit a copy of each record to Consultant.
.5
Subcontractor whose work is subject of training session and Contractor shall be represented during
training session by qualified personnel.
7.
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
.1
Prior to requesting Substantial Performance submit the following:
.1
Three copies of operating and maintenance manuals (manuals must be submitted minimum
6 weeks prior to requesting Substantial Performance).
.2
Inspection and acceptance certificates required from regulatory agencies.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
Name and address of Project
Name of Owner
Section Number and Title
01770-2
.2
Advise the Consultant in writing, when work has been substantially completed. If Consultant agrees
that this stage has been reached, prepare a complete list of deficiencies and submit this list to
Consultant.
.3
On receipt of the above deficiency list in a satisfactory form, the Consultant, accompanied by
Subconsultants, the Contractor and the Owner, if deemed desirable, will carry out an inspection of the
Project.
.4
Add to the deficiency list, in accordance with Consultant's directions, any additional deficiencies which
are identified during inspection and reissue updated deficiency list.
.5
Upon completion, inspection and acceptance of work, Owner will take over and occupy completed
work. Refer to Supplementary Conditions for procedures relating to certification of Substantial
Performance and release of holdback.
8.
FINAL SUBMISSION
.1
9.
Prior to claiming Final Payment do the following:
.1
Submit record drawings.
.2
Submit one complete set of reviewed shop drawings, folded to 8-1/2" x 11" size, contained in
heavy duty manila envelopes, numbered and labelled. Follow specification format with no
more than one Section per envelope.
.3
Submit maintenance materials.
.4
Submit a final accounting of all approved changes to the Contract Price, including
adjustments to cash allowances.
WARRANTY INSPECTION
.1
The Contractor shall organize a warranty inspection to take place two weeks prior to the expiration of
the standard one-year warranty. The Consultant, subconsultants, the Contractor, subcontractors and
the Owner's representatives shall attend.
END
22/09/2011
WESPEC
01770-3
SECTION 02220 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
Comply with requirements of Division 1.
RELATED WORK
.1
New Masonry openings
Section 04200
.2
Removal of deteriorated wood work.
Section 06400
.3
Deteriorated plaster removal
Section 09280
.4
Paint and wall paper stripping, deteriorated plaster removal
Section 09900
.5
Cutting and coring for Mechanical and Electrical services
1.3
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Obtain and pay for necessary permits for work of this Section. Give required notices, and make
submissions required by regulatory agencies.
.2
Comply with applicable requirements of jurisdictional authorities and CSA S350-M1980 "Code of
Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures".
.3
Hire and pay for a registered professional engineer in accordance with requirements of OBC
2.3.2.3(1).
.4
Comply with applicable regulations of the Ministry of Environment and Energy governing waste
management.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide written method statement outlining schedule, sequence and extent of demolition, shoring and
bracing details, protection details and noise and dust control measures.
.2
Where shoring and other temporary supports are required, provide documentation illustrating such
requirements. Documentation shall be prepared and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to
practice in Ontario.
.3
Submit field review reports from professional engineer whose seal and signature appears on
the demolition procedures proposal, or his authorized representative.
.4
Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval, drawings, diagrams or details
showing sequence of disassembly work or supporting structures and underpinning. Drawings for
structural elements shall bear stamp of qualified professional engineer.
1.5
PROTECTION
.1
Prevent uncontrolled movement, settlement, or damage. Provide shoring and bracing required.
.2
Take steps to positively prevent uncontrolled falling of demolished materials.
.3
Ensure that no part of existing structure is overloaded due to work carried out under this Section.
.4
Prevent debris from blocking drainage systems.
.5
Ensure that temporary guards, hoardings are provided in accordance with applicable safety
regulations.
22/09/2011
KMAI/JG
Divisions 15 & 16
02220-1
1.6
EXAMINATION
.1
Visit the site and the existing building so as to fully understand all existing conditions, limitations and
circumstances, and extent of work required. No increase in cost or extension of performance time will
be considered for conditions, limitations and circumstances which could reasonably be determined
prior to submission of bid.
.2
Demolition drawings provide general scope of demolition only. Detailed requirements and extent of
demolition to be ascertained on site by Contractor. Demolition required to accommodate new Work
that is not shown on the demolition drawings shall be considered to be in contract.
1.7
COORDINATION
.1
Refer to Division 15 and 16 to determine demolition work reuired by them and coordinate.
.2
Verify all mechanical and electrical routing with Consultant before commencing chasing and
demolition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Ensure that affected building areas are unoccupied and discontinued in use and that required
separations between work areas and Owner occupied areas are in place prior to start of demolition
and clearing work.
.2
Verify that existing services in areas affected by demolition work are disconnected, capped, removed
or relocated, prior to start of work.
.3
Prior to cutting of any structural concrete elements arrange to carry out X-ray survey to locate
reinforcing and electrical conduits in area to be cut.
3.2
SALVAGE
.1
Prior to start of demolition carefully remove and temporarily store in protected location items
designated for salvage or reuse.
.2
Review items to be salvaged with Consultant prior to commencing demolition. Salvage items to
include, light fixtures, some plumbing fixtures doors and door hardware, wood sash, reusable trim
components, kitchen cabinets and counters. Store salvage components in the basement after
basement demolition is complete.
3.3
DEMOLITION
.1
Demolish existing work as shown and as required to accommodate new work. Demolition in excess of
that which is required shall be rectified by restoring, rebuilding work to its original condition at no extra
cost to Owner.
.2
Demolition includes removal of all garbage and debris, carpets, curtains, defunct plumbing, plumbinbg
fixtures, surface mechanical and electrical systems, and systems within demolished wall and floor
areas.
.3
Demolish work in a safe and systematic manner, from top to bottom.
.4
Do not throw or drop demolished materials from heights. Use chutes, conveyors, or hoisting equipment
to lower materials.
22/09/2011
KMAI/JG
02220-2
.5
Demolish in a manner to minimize dusting. Keep dusty materials wetted but prevent flooding or
contaminated runoff.
.6
Demolish masonry and concrete elements in small sections.
.7
Carefully remove and lower in controlled manner structural framing members and other heavy or large
objects.
.8
At all times leave work in safe condition, so that no part is in danger of uncontrolled toppling or falling.
3.4
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
.1
Demolish and remove existing work as required to accommodate or receive new work.
.2
Coordinate with structural, mechanical, electrical and other Sections of work to effect
required selective demolition in orderly and timely fashion.
3.5
DISPOSAL AND CLEAN-UP
.1
All materials, rubbish and debris resulting from demolition work shall become the Contractor's property
and shall be removed from site and legally disposed of unless specifically indicated otherwise.
.2
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on site. Promptly, as work progresses, remove and
legally dispose of materials away from site.
.3
Selling, burning and burying of materials on site is not permitted.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Professional engineer whose seal and signature appear on the demolition procedures
proposal, or his authorized representative shall review the work in progress, to ensure that
procedures contained in proposal are being followed, that work is proceeding in a safe
manner and in compliance with applicable regulatory requirements.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI/JG
02220-3
Senator O’Connor Estate House Renovation
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
.1
1.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Ontario Building Regulations
CSA-A23.1-04
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction
CSA-A23.2-04
Methods of Test for Concrete
CSA-S269.1-R2003
Falsework for Construction Purposes
ACI SP4 Chapter 5 - 05
Formwork for Concrete
ACI Standard 347 - 04
Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
CSA-086.1-01
Engineering Design in Wood (Limit States Design)
CSA-O121-08
Douglas Fir Plywood
CSA-O153-M1980 R08
Poplar Plywood
TOLERANCES
.1
1.5
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
.2
1.4
Provide all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to supply, erect, and
strip all formwork and falsework for poured-in-place concrete shown or indicated on
the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
.2
1.3
Section 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 1
The tolerances for all concrete work shall conform to the requirements of CSA
Standard CSA-A23.1, Section 10.
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
Protect formwork materials before, during, and after installation and protect
installed work and materials of other trades.
.2
In the event of damage immediately make required repairs or replacements
necessary to the approval of the inspector and at no extra cost to the Owner.
Read Jones Christoffersen Ltd.
Section 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 2
1.6
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings for falsework and formwork; indicating method, sequence
and schedule of construction, shoring, stripping and re-shoring procedures.
.2
Indicate formwork and falsework design data, including loads for review. Review
by the Consultant does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for formwork
and safety during construction.
.3
Shop drawings submittals shall bear stamp and signature of a qualified
professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario.
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
FORMWORK MATERIALS
.1
.2
Form Material:
.1
Exposed surfaces - metal, plywood or plywood lined. Plywood to: CSA
0121 – Douglas Fir Plywood, or CSA 0153 – Poplar Plywood.
.2
Unexposed surfaces - metal, plywood to CSA 0121 or CSA 0153, or wood
lumber to CAN/CSA 086.1.
.3
Plywood and wood formwork materials shall conform to CSA S269.1, be
free from warp and sawn straight so that lines and shapes will be
accurately retained.
.4
Formwork for unexposed surfaces shall be made with a good grade of
lumber or plywood and fitted so that there will be no leakage of mortar.
.5
Use metal forms, plywood lined forms or plywood forms of sufficient
structural strength for exposed surfaces. Plywood for lining shall be new
material GIS exterior grade fir plywood manufactured with waterproof
glue.
Ties and Spreaders:
.1
Form ties shall be of a type, which are adjustable in length to permit
tightening of forms. Use only the snap-off type of form tie, which will
leave no metal within 25-mm of the concrete surface after removal.
Twisted wire form ties will not be accepted.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.3
Form Release Agent:
.1
.4
Form release agent shall be a pre-approved chemical agent, not an oil
based product.
Void Form:
.1
Void form shall be of a deteriorating material such as Wax-Mat as
supplied by National Concrete Accessories Ltd. or approved equal.
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
.1
.2
Section 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 3
Lines and Levels:
.1
Verify lines, levels, and column centers before proceeding with work and
ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.
.2
Co-ordinate and co-operate with all other trades in forming and setting of
recesses, chases, sleeves, inserts, bolts, and hangers.
Design:
.1
Design, construct, and erect formwork in accordance with CSA A23.1,
CSA 269.1, ACI 347, and all applicable construction safety regulations for
the place of work.
.2
Build forms sufficiently strong and rigid to sustain the weight or fluid
pressure of the concrete without noticeable deflection. Ensure forms are
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.
.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for design and construction of
falsework. The method and scheduling of re-shoring shall be submitted to
the Engineer for review prior to fabrication.
.4
Do not exceed the safe live load of the structure with any construction or
shoring loads considering the age and strength of the concrete.
.5
Provide 20mm x 20mm chamfers strips for exposed corners or edges of
columns, walls, beams, and slabs.
Section 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 4
.3
.4
.5
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Construction:
.1
Construct forms so that the finished concrete will conform to the shape
and dimensions specified.
.2
Construct forms so that they may be dismantled and removed without
damaging the concrete.
.3
Set shores on wedges or use adjustable shores so they may be removed
without causing undue strains in the concrete.
.4
Provide temporary openings at the bottom of column and wall forms to
facilitate cleaning and inspection. Use water to flush out cuttings,
shavings, debris, snow and ice, and foreign matter. Ensure that water and
debris fully drain to the exterior through clean-out ports, and close the
openings with a patch, flush on the inside.
.5
Inform the Consultant when formwork is complete and has been cleaned,
to allow for inspection.
Treatment of Forms:
.1
Use a non-staining form release agent free from volatile constituents for
treating forms.
.2
Install form release agent on form surfaces and allow to dry prior to
placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices and embedded parts.
.3
Untreated forms shall be kept wetted down to prevent shrinkage prior to
placing concrete and shall be surface wetted at time of placing.
Alignment:
.1
Provide suitable means for checking the alignment and elevation of
formwork. Check these items frequently during placement of the
concrete.
.2
Carry out corrective wedging as required until concrete is in place.
.3
The Consultant shall have the right to order concrete removed which has
become misaligned during placing.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.6
.7
Section 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 5
.4
Align forms to ensure movement and deflections of the finished product
are confined. Tolerances for all concrete work shall conform to the
requirements of CSA Standard CSA-A23.1 and ACI 347.
.5
Formwork for slabs and beams shall be cambered as shown on the
drawings. For the calculation of such cambers, an allowance for
settlement, closure of form joints, elastic shortening of forms and shoring,
must be made and added to camber requirements.
Stripping:
.1
Formwork shall not be removed until the concrete has gained sufficient
strength to carry dead loads and all possible construction loads likely to be
imposed upon it. Notify the Consultant before removing formwork.
.2
Remove Falsework progressively, in accordance with CSA 269.1 and
ensure that no shock loads or unbalanced loads are imposed upon the
structure.
.3
Loosen forms carefully, and in a method that will prevent spalling and
other damage to the concrete surface or edges. Do not use wedge pry bars,
hammers or tools against exposed concrete finish surfaces.
.4
Leave forms loosely in place for protection until curing requirements are
complete.
.5
Completely remove the forms from under steps and similar void spaces,
through temporary openings if necessary.
.6
Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping
off inside the wall surface. Point up and patch the resulting pockets to
match the surrounding areas.
Re-Use of Formwork:
.1
Forms may be re-used after adequate cleaning provided the surfaces are
not cracked or become roughened. Such formwork shall be trimmed and
properly patched.
Section 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
Page 6
3.2
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
INSERTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS
.1
Sleeves, openings, etc., shown on structural drawings must be checked with the
Architectural and Mechanical drawings. Sleeves, openings, etc. not shown on the
structural drawings must be approved by the Structure Consultant.
END OF SECTION
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
.1
1.2
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
1.4
Provide all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to supply and
install new reinforcing steel work shown on indicated in all the Contract Drawings
and Specifications including accessories such as hanger bars, spirals, wire ties,
support bars, chairs, spacers supports or other devices required to position
reinforcing properly.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
.2
1.3
Section 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 1
CSA-A23.1-04
Construction
CSA-G30.5-M1983 R98
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement
CSA-G30.18 09
Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A775M/A775M-07b Standard
Specification
for
Epoxy-coated
Reinforcing Steel Bars
ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
ACI 316
Manual of Standard Practice for Detailed
Reinforced Concrete Structures
CSA W186-M1990-(R2007) Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced
Concrete Construction
Reinforcing Steel Institute of Ontario (RSIO) Manual of Standard Practice.
CSA – S413-07
Parking Structures
SUBMITTALS
.1
Mill Tests:
.1
Upon request, provide the Consultant with a certified copy of mill tests of
steel supplied, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 2-weeks
prior to commencing reinforcing work.
Section 03200
Page 2
.2
1.5
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Shop Drawings:
.1
Prepare shop drawings for concrete reinforcement, bar support and
accessories in accordance with (RSIO) Reinforcing Steel Institute of
Ontario – Manual of Standard Practice.
.2
If requested by the Consultant, submit shop drawings in accordance with
the General Requirements.
.3
Shop drawings shall clearly indicate bar sizes, grades, spacing, location,
bending details, and quantities of reinforcing mesh, bar supports,
mechanical splices, and accessories and identifying code marks to permit
correct placement without reference to structural drawings.
.4
Placing drawings and bar lists will be reviewed for number and size of
bars only. The Consultant's review of reinforcing shall be a visual
inspection of in-situ work as required to determine general conformity to
the engineering drawings. The Consultant’s review shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of his responsibility for carrying out the Work in
accordance with the drawings.
.5
Substitution of imperial reinforcing sizes and grades will only be accepted
if drawings showing imperial sizes are submitted to the Structural
Consultant for review. Written approval must be obtained before any work
is commenced.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Store and protect reinforcement in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and
fouling with dirt, grease, form-oil and other bond-breaking coatings.
.2
Reinforcement at the time concrete is placed shall be free from excessive rusting,
mud, oil or other coatings that adversely affect its bonding capacity.
.3
Special care shall be taken when handling epoxy-coated reinforcing steel to
prevent damage to the epoxy-coating. Bundle and transport epoxy-coated
reinforcement in accordance with ASTM A775M. Epoxy-coated reinforcing bars
shall not be dropped or dragged, and shall be lifted with spreaders and nonmetallic slings. Bar-to-bar abrasion and excessive handling of bundles must be
prevented.
.4
The contractor shall repair all damages to the epoxy coating using a
manufacturer’s approved epoxy patching materials. If damaged areas rust before
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Section 03200
Page 3
being repaired, the rust shall be completely removed before the steel surfaces are
repaired.
.5
Coat cut ends of epoxy coated reinforcing with approved epoxy patching material.
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.2
.1
Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to CSA G30.18 (grade 400 MPa) unless
otherwise specified herein or on the drawings. Plain finish.
.2
Reinforcing bars to be welded shall conform to CSA G30.18.
.3
Welded wire fabric shall conform to CSA G30.5. Sizes and gauges as shown on the
drawings.
.4
Bar supports shall conform to ACI 316 unless otherwise approved by the
Consultant.
.5
Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers shall be epoxy coated or plastic. The use of
pebbles, pieces of broken stone or brick, pipe, or wooden blocks will not be
permitted.
.6
Tie wire for coated reinforcing shall be plastic-coated.
.7
Mechanical splices, to Consultant’s approval.
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate reinforcing to CSA-A23.1 and reviewed shop drawings.
.2
Fabricate reinforcing steel within the following tolerances:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Sheared length plus or minus ................................................. 25 mm
Depth of truss bar plus or minus ............................................ 10 mm
Outside dimension of stirrups, ties and spirals, plus or minus10 mm
Other bends plus or minus ..................................................... 25 mm
.3
Colour-code each bar to correspond with code mark appearing on bar list.
.4
Ship bundles of bar reinforcement clearly identified in accordance with bar lists.
Section 03200
Page 4
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.5
Bars shall not be field bent, straightened, or re-bent, except where indicated or
authorized by the Consultant. When field bending is authorized, bend without
heat, applying slow and steady pressure. Replace bars that develop cracks or
splits.
.6
Splicing of reinforcing bars, unless indicated on the drawings, is prohibited except
with the written approval of the Consultant. Such splices shall conform to the
splice length for that class of splice according to CAN3-A23.3. Splices, where
possible, shall be staggered.
.7
Fabrication, handling and shipping of epoxy-coated steel shall conform with MTO
Form 905. and CSA-S413.
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the positions shown on the drawings,
firmly tied, and supported by bar supports and side form spacers to assure proper
concrete cover and spacing within allowable tolerances before and during placing
of concrete.
.2
Bar supports shall be sufficient in number and strength to carry the reinforcement
they support and prevent displacement by workers or equipment before and during
concreting. Bars shall be tied at all intersections, except where spacing is less
than 250-mm in each direction, when alternate intersections shall be tied.
.3
Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances unless noted otherwise.
.1
Clear concrete protection of reinforcement ......................... 5 mm ±.
.2
Where the depth of a flexural member, thickness of a wall or smallest
dimension of a column is:
.1
.2
.3
200 mm or less ......................................................... 5 mm ±.
larger than 200 mm but less than 600 mm ............. 10 mm ±.
600 mm or larger .................................................... 20 mm ±.
Lateral spacing of these bars shall be within 30 mm ± of the specified
spacing.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.4
3.2
3.3
Section 03200
Page 5
.3
For longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars ......... 50 mm ±.
.4
As Item 3 at discontinuous ends of members .................... 20 mm ±.
.5
Specified spacing between bars ......................................... 10 mm ±.
Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel,
conduits or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter or
enough to exceed the specified tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall
be subject to approval of the Consultant.
WELDING
.1
Any welding of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with CSA W186.
.2
Copies of the Canadian Welding Bureau approved welding procedure and
certificate of current operator qualification shall be submitted to the Consultant
prior to commencement of welding.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
.1
No concrete shall be placed until the Consultant has completed his review of
reinforcing in place. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 24 hours notice
of the time when the reinforcement will be substantially in place and ready for the
Consultant’s review.
.2
Inspection and testing of factory coated reinforcement to be conducted by a testing
agency designated by the Consultant. The Owner will pay cost of inspection and
testing described in this Section.
.3
Inspection and testing of reinforcement coated in place shall include visual
inspection with flashlight and mirror.
END OF SECTION
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.2
.1
Cast-in-place concrete materials, including production, mixing, handling, testing,
transporting, placement and curing of concrete.
.2
Requirements for construction joints and slab-on-grade.
.3
Fabricated components, anchor bolts, bearing sleeves, plates and other inserts to
be built into concrete.
.4
Low-Permeability Silica Fume concrete shall be incorporated in the suspended
parking decks’ concrete slab, beam and girder elements.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
.2
1.3
.3
.4
.5
.6
Concrete Formwork
Concrete Reinforcement
CSA - A23.1-04
Construction
CSA - A23.2-04
Methods of Test for Concrete
CSA - A23.3-04
Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings
CSA A3000-08
Cementitious Materials Compendium
CSA – S413-07
Parking Structures
WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
.1
1.5
Section 03100
Section 03200
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
.1
.2
1.4
Section 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 1
Anchor bolts, hangers, sleeves and other inserts for casting into concrete shall be
supplied by applicable trades. Build in and/or set these items and assume full
responsibility for correct positioning.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Concrete Mix Design:
.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for mix designs as detailed in CSA
A23.1 Table 11, Alternate 1. The minimum requirements are indicated on
Section 03300
Page 2
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
the drawings.
.2
.2
The proposed mix designs shall be submitted to the Consultant for review,
a minimum of 2-weeks prior to placement. Do not proceed with concrete
placement until review is complete and mix design has been accepted by
the Consultant.
.3
The mix designs shall note the constituents by weight, the properties
required, and the structural elements for which the mix is to be used.
.4
Provide concrete to meet the minimum structural design requirements and
the minimum durability requirements indicated on the drawings and as
defined in CSA A23.1. The most severe exposure requirement governs
over the design requirements and other less severe exposure conditions.
Concrete Test Results:
.1
.3
Transit-Mix Delivery Slips and Placing Records:
.1
.4
Submit details of proposed methods of concrete curing and provisions for
weather protection to the Consultant for review.
Construction Joints:
.1
.6
Keep a record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of
concrete, together with a transit-mix delivery slip certifying contents of
pour. Make the record available to the Owner for his inspection upon
request. Upon completion of this portion of work, submit placing records
and delivery slips to the Owner.
Curing Procedures:
.1
.5
One copy of the results shall be submitted directly from the Testing
Agency to each of the Owner, the Contractor and the Consultant.
Submit plan locations and details of construction joints for the
Consultant’s review.
Mix Design and Testing Requirements for Low-Permeability, Silica Fume
Concrete
.1
Low permeability concrete shall meet the requirements of CSA Standard
S413-07. It shall have a Coulomb rating not exceeding 1500 after 56-
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Section 03300
Page 3
days, based on three (3) specimens tested in accordance with ASTM
Standard C1202, and CSA-S413.
.2
The qualification of low-permeability concrete shall be established prior to
construction.
Contractor shall submit samples of proposed lowpermeability concrete mix for 28-day and 56-day permeability testing, to
qualify properties of proposed mix. Testing shall also include slump, air
content and 28-day compressive strength. The Contractor shall be
responsible to ensure that sufficient time is provided in the project
schedule for testing and qualification of the low-permeability concrete
mix.
.3
Once testing has confirmed that proposed mix design meets the specified
requirements, submit mix design for the qualified concrete mix, and the
results of 28-day and 56-day testing for Consultant’s review a minimum of
2-weeks prior to placement.
.4
The constituents and proportions of the qualified concrete mix shall not be
changed without the Consultant’s approval.
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
Cast-in-place concrete shall satisfy the requirements of the Reference Standards
unless where specified otherwise, herein or on the drawings.
MATERIALS
.1
Materials shall conform to the following requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Portland Cement to CSA-A5.
Aggregate: Natural stone to CSA-A23.1.
Water: Potable and to CSA-A23.1.
Air entraining agents to CSA Standards CAN3-A266.1
Chemicals admixtures to CSA Standard CAN3-A266.2 and CSA Standard
CAN3-266.4. Calcium chloride is not permitted.
Pozzolanic mineral admixtures to CSA Standard CAN3-A266.3.
Silica Fume to CSA-A23.5, Type U, with a SiO2 content of at least 85%,
of a maximum of 6% ignition loss, and no more than 1% Si03 content.
Superplasticizing admixtures to CAN3-A266.6.
Section 03300
Page 4
2.3
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.2
Grout shall be non-expanding and non-shrink type with a minimum strength of 35
MPa at 28 days.
.3
Chemical curing compounds, if permitted, shall conform to the specifications and
shall be compatible with specified floor hardeners, covering adhesives and
waterproofing.
MIX PROPORTION
.1
Concrete for all parts of the Work shall be homogeneous and when hardened shall
have the required strength, resistance to deterioration, durability, resistance to
abrasion, water-tightness, appearance and other specified properties.
.2
Concrete mixes shall be proportioned by the supplier to meet the requirements for
cement type, compressive strength, class of exposure, maximum aggregate size,
slump, air content, and admixtures specified herein. All concrete shall be normal
weight. Proportioning mixing and delivery to the site shall meet the requirements
of CSA Standard CSA-A23.1.
.3
Add dispersing agent to concrete according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
.4
Do not add calcium chloride to concrete.
.5
Concrete requirements specified may require the use of superplasticizers, set
retardants or silica fume. Costs associated with the use of such materials shall be
included in the contract price.
.6
Pump mix slumps shall also conform to the above and shall be tested before the
addition of superplasticizing agents.
.7
Pump mix designed for use in parking slabs shall not contain superplasticizing
agents and shall be supported with evidence of satisfactory air void system in the
concrete at the point of discharge in accordance with the standard.
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
All phases of concrete work shall be in accordance with the standard unless
otherwise specified herein or on the drawings. The work shall be done by workers
who are skilled and experienced in their trade.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.2
3.2
3.3
Section 03300
Page 5
Contractor shall notify the Consultant at least 24 hours before any concrete is
placed to allow the Consultant to review the work.
MIXING AND PLACING
.1
Concrete shall be machine mixed. Mixing and placing shall be in accordance with
CSA Standard CSA-A23.1.
.2
Pre-wet formwork prior to concrete placement. Excess water (ponding or
standing water) shall be removed from the formwork surface prior to concrete
placement.
.3
Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of deposit by methods that
will ensure the required quality of concrete. Equipment for conveying the
concrete shall be of such size and design as shall ensure a practically continuous
flow of concrete at the delivery end without separation of materials.
.4
Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practicable to its final
position to avoid rehandling. The vertical height of free fall shall not exceed
3000mm unless special precautions approved by the Consultant are utilized.
.5
Depositing shall be continuous throughout each division and the concrete shall be
so placed and worked that a uniform texture will be produced.
.6
Depositing shall be continuous until the unit of operation as approved by the
Consultant is complete and sufficiently rapid to ensure the bonding of successive
layers.
.7
No concrete shall be placed later than one half hour after leaving the mixer. No
re-tempered concrete shall be permitted.
.8
Cement slurry used to prime a concrete pump shall be discarded and not placed
into the structure.
ADDITION OF WATER
.1
To conform to CSA – A23.1, clause 18.4.3.
.2
No water shall be added after the initial introduction of the mixing water for the
batch except when, at the start of discharge, the measured slump of the concrete is
less than that specified and no more than 60 minutes have elapsed from the time
of batching to the start of discharge. In this case water may be added only under
the direction of the producer’s Quality Control Inspector who shall be dispatched
Section 03300
Page 6
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
from the plant to the site. In no case shall an amount of water exceeding 16 litres
per cubic metre be added. The resulting concrete must satisfy the specified
requirements. The responsibility for the product will remain with the producer.
However, the concrete may be used as long as it is of such slump that, in the
opinion of the representative of the Engineer, it can be placed and properly
consolidated without the addition of any other water to the batch but in no case
shall the time between batching and complete discharge exceed 120 minutes.
3.4
3.5
COMPACTION
.1
All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated during and immediately after
depositing, by internal vibration. Concrete shall be consolidated by means of
sufficient vibrators of adequate size operated by competent workmen that have
been instructed in their use.
.2
The use of vibrators to transport concrete shall not be permitted.
.3
Concrete shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement, around embedded
items and into corners of forms, eliminating all air or stone pockets that may cause
honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness.
CURING
.1
After concrete has sufficiently set, its exposed surfaces shall be kept continuously
moist for a period of at least seven (7) days after depositing, as per CSA-A23.1.
Concrete shall be protected from harmful effects of sunshine, drying winds, cold,
running or surface water and mechanical shock. Curing compounds are not
allowed.
.2
When the air temperature is below 5°C or when in the opinion of the Consultant,
there is a possibility of its falling below 5°C no concrete shall be placed until after
the Consultant has approved the provisions made to ensure proper curing of
concrete. These provisions shall conform to the requirements of CSA Standard
CSA-A23.1, Section 21.
.3
Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating the concrete materials and
protecting the concrete from freezing or near freezing temperatures. No frozen
materials or materials containing ice shall be used. All concrete materials and all
reinforcement, forms, existing concrete and ground with which the concrete is to
come into contact, shall be free from frost. Whenever the temperature of the
surrounding air is below 5°C all concrete placed in the forms shall have a
temperature of between 15°C and 32°C and adequate means shall be provided for
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Section 03300
Page 7
maintaining a temperature of not less than 21°C for 3 days of 10°C for 5 days
except when high early strength concrete is used, the temperature shall be
maintained at not less than 32°C for 2 days or 10°C for 3 days or for as much
more as is necessary to ensure proper curing of the concrete. Under no
circumstances may dry heat be used. Means shall be taken to humidify the air
within the enclosure and to ensure that the moisture requirements for curing are
maintained. No dependence shall be placed on calcium chloride or other
chemicals for the prevention of freezing.
.4
3.6
LOADING
.1
3.7
In extreme weather conditions, either hot, windy or freezing, all slab surfaces shall
receive a protective covering to prevent respectively, excessive evaporation or
freezing.
The Contractor shall not permit the new structure to be unduly loaded with
materials, but shall distribute them to the approval of the Consultant.
INSERTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS
.1
The Contractor shall notify all trades sufficiently in advance to ensure that
provision is made for openings, inserts and fasteners. The contractor shall
cooperate with all trades in the forming and setting of all slots, sleeves, bolts,
dowels, hangers, inserts, conduits, clips, etc., whether they are in his scope of
work or not. Ensure that all of these inserts are secure and not displaced during
the placing of concrete.
.2
Provide all necessary chases, grooves and reglets, required for adjacent work of
other trades. Set all bolts as shown or as required for mechanical equipment
settings.
.3
Junction boxes, fixture boxes and other services cast in the concrete shall be
plastic or galvanized metal. Electrical conduit shall be placed in the centre of the
slab after the reinforcement is placed.
.4
Embedded metal sleeves and drains shall be fusion-bonded epoxy coated.
.5
On post-tensioned work, inserts required to hang electrical/mechanical equipment
shall be placed prior to placing concrete. Neither drilled nor powder activated
fasteners longer than 20-mm will be permitted unless the slab is x-rayed to miss
strands.
.6
On post-tensioned work, all drilled or cored openings must receive the Engineer’s
Section 03300
Page 8
approval before proceeding.
reinforcement will be cut.
3.8
3.9
X-rays shall be used to ensure no strands or
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
.1
Location and detail of construction joints not indicated on the drawings shall be
submitted to the Consultant for review.
.2
Construction joints shall be located and designed to least impair the strength and
appearance of the structure. The reinforcement shall continue through the joint
unless noted otherwise.
.3
Where necessary, bearing strength at the joint shall be provided by mortises or
keys formed in the concrete by inclined reinforcement or by other means
satisfactory to the Consultant.
.4
Construction joints in columns or walls shall be located at the underside of floor
members.
.5
At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing concrete in columns or walls before
depositing concrete in the floor system.
.6
Construction joints in the floor system shall be located at or near the middle of the
span in slabs, beams or girders, unless a beam intersects a girder at this point, in
which case the joint in the girder shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width
of the beam. In this last case, provision shall be made for shear by the use of
inclined reinforcement and keys, or as directed by the Consultant.
.7
The existing concrete surface at construction joints shall be wetted thoroughly
prior to placement of new concrete.
.8
Special care shall be taken in compacting the new concrete at construction joints.
TOLERANCES
.1
3.10
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Concrete surfaces shall be floated and trowelled to produce a smooth surface. The
surface shall not vary more than 3-mm under a 3-meter long straightedge.
FINISHING
.1
Finishing shall conform to CSA-A23.1 - Section 22 as a minimum. Care shall be
taken during finishing to maintain the cambers specified on the structural
drawings.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.2
3.11
3.13
All formed surfaces shall be treated in accordance with CSA-A23.1, Section 24 as
a minimum.
OPENINGS THROUGH STRUCTURAL WORK
.1
3.12
Section 03300
Page 9
If, after any part of the structural work has been completed, it is required that
additional openings be made through the structure, the Consultant shall be so
informed. No opening, including cored sleeves, shall be made through completed
work without authorization in writing by the Consultant.
PATCHING AND CUTTING
.1
Honeycomb, exposed reinforcement, deviations in formwork and other defects of
a minor nature that have occurred as a result of poorly consolidated concrete may
be patched by the Contractor, at his cost, using materials and procedures preapproved by the Consultant. Cut out defect to sound concrete and fill with an
approved pre-manufactured repair material.
.2
Immediately after the removal of forms, all bolts, ties, nails or other metal not
specifically required for construction purposes shall be removed or cut back to a
depth of 25 mm from the surface of the concrete, then filled with cement mortar.
Mortar shall not be more than 1-our old, and mortar patches shall be cured as per
Item 3.5 –Curing.
.3
Where concrete surfaces are exposed, grind off or otherwise remove fins, ridges
and other imperfections immediately after removal of forms. Remove segregated
concrete aggregate to sound material. Repair as directed by the Consultant.
.4
Soffits of structural slabs where plywood joints have vertical deviations in excess
of 3-mm are to be prepared and patched.
.5
Holes drilled or cored through in-place concrete shall be subject to pre-approval
by the Consultant. Care shall be taken to ensure that no reinforcement is cut.
REJECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
.1
In the event that concrete tests do not conform to the requirements of this
specification, or when conditions are such to cause doubt about the safety of the
structure, test that portion of the structure in accordance with CSA -A23.1 and
CAN3 - A23.2. Such test shall be made at the expense of the Contractor and to
the satisfaction of the Consultant.
Section 03300
Page 10
.2
3.14
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Where, in the opinion of the Consultant, material or workmanship fails to meet
the requirements of the specification, such work may be rejected. Work rejected
shall be replaced or repaired to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional
cost to the Owner.
TESTING
.1
Concrete testing will be as required by CSA-A23.1 unless noted otherwise.
Testing methods shall conform to CSA-A23.2.
.2
Testing agency shall be selected and paid for by the Owner. The contractor shall
arrange with the Testing Agency for performing all required testing.
.3
The Contractor shall notify the Consultant at least 24 hours before any concrete is
placed to allow the Consultant to review the work.
.4
Contractor shall provide casual labour to the testing agency’s field personnel for
the purpose of obtaining and handling sample materials. Provide suitable access
to the Work for obtaining samples. Provide and maintain facilities for storage of
concrete test cylinders for the first 24-hours.
.5
Take at least one concrete test (3 cylinders) for each 60 cubic meters or fraction
thereof, of each type of concrete placed in any one day. One moist cured cylinder
to be tested in 7 days and two tested in 28 days. Take one slump test and one test
for air entrainment for each concrete test.
.6
Results of concrete tests shall be forwarded to the Owner, Consultant and
Contractor. Included with the test results shall be the following information:
Name of Project, Date of sampling, Name of supplier, Delivery truck number,
Identification of sampling and testing technicians, Exact location in the structure
of the concrete sampled, Air temperatures and concrete temperature, Design
strength of concrete sampled, Admixtures, cement type, maximum aggregate size.
.7
Testing Agency personnel are not authorized to revoke, relax, enlarge or release
any requirements of the specification, nor to approve or disprove any portion of
the Work.
.8
If additional testing is required to demonstrate the adequacy of any concrete not
meeting the requirements for strength or which has been placed before formwork
and reinforcement have been reviewed by the Consultant, the Contractor shall pay
the cost of such testing.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 04060 - MORTAR AND GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.2
1.3
Masonry, including mortar joint workmanship:
REFERENCES
.1
ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
.2
ACI 530.1 – Specifications for Masonry Structures.
.3
ASTM C5 – Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
.4
ASTM C91 – Masonry Cement.
.5
ASTM C94 – Ready-Mixed Concrete.
.6
ASTM C144 – Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
.7
ASTM C150 – Portland Cement
.8
ASTM C207 – Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
.9
ASTM C270 – Mortar for Unit Masonry.
.10
ASTM C387 – Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete.
.11
ASTM C404 – Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
.12
ASTM C476 – Grout for Masonry
.13
ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement.
.14
ASTM C780 – Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit
Masonry
.15
ASTM C1019 – Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
.16
ASTM C1072 – Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength.
.17
ASTM C1142 – Ready-Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry.
.18
ASTM E447 – Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms
.19
ASTM E518 – Test Method of Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry
.20
CSA A5/A8/A362 – Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, Blended Hydaulic Cement.
.21
CSA A179– Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.
.22
IMAIC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council) – Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Quality Standards: meet requirements of CSA A179-04.
22/09/2011
KMAI
Section 04200
04060-1
.2
Source of Material: for mortar to remain exposed in finished project, brands of cementitious materials
and source of supply of sand, shall remain the same for duration of work.
.3
Owner may arrange and pay out of allowance carried in Section 01210 for testing of mortar and grout
by an independent testing agency.
1.5
TESTING
.1
Provide for testing of existing original mortar composition to provide lime content, aggregate
composition and sieve analysis of sand.
.2
Provide same test analysis of proposed replacement mortar.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
Section 01330: Submission requirements.
.2
Include design mix, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.
.3
Provide 4 cured and dry 100 mm diameter x 50 mm mortar sample patties for colour match and testing
for each mortar type being used in the Work.
.4
Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of component mortar materials to
requirements of CSA A179-04.
.5
Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to
requirements of CSA A179-04.
.6
Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that mortar and grout meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.7
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
Section 01600: Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site
.2
Store cementitious materials in clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign
matter so as to prevent moisture absorption from any source. Do not use material affected by
moisture.
.3
Store mortar aggregate materials to prevent contamination. Do not use contaminated materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Water: potable and non-staining.
.2
Sand: CSA A82-56-M1976. Sieve tests to match existing mortar
.3
Portland cement: CSA-A5-03, Type 10.
.4
Masonry cement: CSA-A8-03, Type H.
.5
Lime: ASTM C207-91 (1992), Type S.
.6
Colour pigment: ground natural aggregates to match existing with metal oxide pigment) or type
recommended by mortar manufacturer. Colour to match existing original mortar..
22/09/2011
KMAI
04060-2
2.2
MORTAR
.1
Pre-bagged Restomix (1:2:8-9) type O mortar mix, manufactured by Daubois Inc., with type S hydrated
lime, white type 10 non-staining Portland cement, and custom pre-mixed aggregates (standard
grey/beige range) matching sieve sizes from test samples.
.2
Pre-bagged Betomix Plus (1:1:6) type N and S mortar mix , manufactured by Daubois Inc., with type S
hydrated lime, white type 10 non-staining Portland cement, and pre-mixed aggregates (standard
grey/beige range).
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
.1
Mix mortar and grout in accordance with CSA A179-04 except as specified herein.
.2
Place an experienced and competent person in direct charge of proportioning and mixing operations.
.3
Mortar for entire project shall be factory premixed type, requiring only addition of water on site.
Supplied by Daubois
.4
Add water on site in quantity required to establish optimum workability.
.5
Except where specified otherwise do not add admixtures of any kind to mixes.
.6
All mortar shall be mixed for a period of not less than 3 minutes and not more than 10 minutes.
.7
Mix grout in different mixer from mortar.
.8
Mix coloured mortar in colour selected by Consultant, in accordance with pigment manufacturer's
recommendations. Make adjustments in colour mix as directed by Consultant.
3.3
TIME LIMITS AND RETEMPERING
.1
Use and place mortar in final position within following time limits after mixing:
.1
.2
Air Temp. above 25°C - 2 hours.
Air Temp. below 25°C - 2.5 hours.
.2
Standard mortar that has stiffened within above time limits because of evaporation of water may be
retempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore required consistency. Discard mortar
not used within above time limits.
.3
Do not retemper coloured mortar. Discard coloured mortar not used within time limits specified.
3.4
MORTAR SCHEDULE
.1
Exterior veneer face and tuck pointing Type O mortar.
.2
Bearing walls including interior wythe of all cavity walls: Type S mortar.
.3
Back pointing of exterior veneer walls : Type N mortar.
.4
Provide coloured mortar at exterior face masonry.
.5
Provide standard grey mortar at all other locations.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
04060-3
SECTION 04200 - MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Mortar and grout:
Section 04060
.2
Sealants
Section 07920
.3
Supply of steel door frames:
Section 08110
.4
Aluminium Doors and Frames
Section 08120
.5
Glazed Curtain Wall
Section 08900
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
.2
ACI 530.1 – Specifications for Masonry Structures.
.3
ASTM C5 – Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
.4
ASTM C91 – Masonry Cement.
.5
ASTM C94 – Ready-Mixed Concrete.
.6
ASTM C144 – Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
.7
ASTM C150 – Portland Cement
.8
ASTM C207 – Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
.9
ASTM C270 – Mortar for Unit Masonry.
.10
ASTM C387 – Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete.
.11
ASTM C404 – Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
.12
ASTM C476 – Grout for Masonry
.13
ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement.
.14
ASTM C780 – Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit
Masonry
.15
ASTM C1019 – Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
.16
ASTM C1072 – Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength.
.17
ASTM C1142 – Ready-Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry.
.18
ASTM E447 – Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms
.19
ASTM E518 – Test Method of Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry
.20
CSA A5/A8/A362 – Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, Blended Hydaulic Cement.
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-1
.21
CSA A179– Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.
.22
IMAIC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council) – Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
1.4
WORK INSTALLED BUT SUPPLIED BY OTHERS
.1
Build into masonry elements inserts, anchors, bolts, sleeves and other items supplied by other
Sections and which are required for installation and performance of work of other Sections.
.2
Install loose steel lintels required for support of masonry elements.
.3
Install lateral support brackets.
.4
Install steel door frames and access doors occurring in masonry elements.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Meet requirements of CSA A370-04, CSA A371-04 and CSA S304.1-04.
.2
Ensure that work is executed under the continuous supervision and direction of a competent
supervisor.
.3
Comply with requirements of Section 01410 when constructing fire rated walls and partitions. Solidly
fill around beams and joists penetrating fire rated walls/partitions in accordance with requirements of
Ontario Building Code.
.4
Masonry units used in partitions/walls designated to provide a fire separation shall be of thickness and
material required to achieve required rating. Hollow masonry units used in fire separation shall have
the necessary percentage of solid material to meet required rating. Concrete block used in fire
separation shall be suitably identified to permit verification of fire resistance rating.
.5
Provide standard tests carried out by an approved testing company on the actual production run of
face brick showing compression, absorption and saturation coefficient. Provide 50-cycle freeze-thaw
resistance test.
.6
Prior to start of exterior wall masonry arrange for a meeting with Consultant, independent testing
agency, mortar supplier, spray foam applicator, window installer and roofing Subcontractor to review
all aspects of exterior wall construction including interfacing and tie-in with other building elements.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Submit layout drawing, in duplicate, showing location of all masonry control joints. Use building
elevations for exterior control joints. Floor plans may be used for interior control joints.
.3
Submit duplicate full size samples of all masonry materials, including reinforcing, anchors, ties,
fasteners, flashings, weep holes, mortar dropping control device.
.4
Manufacturer of cavity wall connectors shall submit certification signed and sealed by a professional
engineer licensed to practice in Ontario, confirming that cavity wall connectors meet requirements of
CSA A370-04.
1.7
SITE MOCK-UPS
.1
Construct sample panel, minimum 600 x 600 m, of each type of masonry requiring coloured mortar, to
determine acceptability of each mortar colour. Make adjustments as directed by Consultant and
repeat procedure until each mortar colour is approved.
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-2
.2
Construct sample panel of an exterior cavity wall including reinforcement, air barrier, insulation,
flashings and weep holes, minimum 1.2 m high x 2.5 m wide. Build sample panel in steppedbacked fashion to expose each material used (brick, insulation, back-up block). Locate panel where
directed by Consultant. Sample may not be incorporated into finished work.
.3
Construct panel to meet project requirements. Select masonry units to represent maximum texture and
colour variations.
.4
Do not begin masonry work until panels are approved by Consultant. Approved panel shall represent
minimum standard of quality for project masonry.
1.8
.1
Deliver and handle masonry units so as to prevent soiling and chipping.
.2
Store masonry units above and off ground on level platforms which permit air circulation under stacks.
.3
During storage, protect masonry units against moisture absorption, damage and staining.
1.9
PROTECTION
.1
When work is not in progress, cover tops of completed masonry elements exposed to weather with
non-staining weatherproof covers. Covers shall be at least 600 mm wider than masonry elements and
shall be well secured against displacement.
.2
Protect finished work at corners, sills, projections and other areas likely to be damaged, with suitable
coverings until completion of building. Protect precast concrete elements from mortar droppings and
other damage.
.3
Adequately brace masonry walls and partitions to resist effects of wind and other lateral forces.
1.10
HOT AND COLD WEATHER WORK
o
.1
When outside temperature is below or likely to go below 5 C provide heat to maintain temperature of
o
materials and surrounding air at 5 C or higher during laying and for 72 hours thereafter. Submit for
approval the proposed method of protecting masonry against low temperatures. Salamanders will not
be permitted.
.2
Keep units completely free from ice and frost. Preheat mortar materials and mortar boards.
o
o
Temperature of mortar to be between 21 C and 48 C. Protect mortar from frost. Do not use admixtures
or antifreezes in mortar.
.3
Maintain dry beds for masonry and use dry masonry units only. Do not wet masonry units in winter.
.4
Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly, by means of waterproof, non-staining coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Concrete Block:
.1
CSA A165 Series-04:
.1
Normal weight: H/15/A/M and S/15/A/M.
.2
Lightweight: H/15/C/M and S/15/C/M
.2
Units must be cured for at least 28 days before delivery and shall have a moisture content of
not more than 30% of total absorption.
.3
Size: unless indicated 190 x 390 x thickness as shown.
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-3
.2
.3
.4
.4
Exposed concrete block units shall be uniform in size, free of perceptible warp or twist,
without chipped, ragged or broken edges; have a uniform surface texture, free of cracks,
blemishes or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
.5
Where indicated provide solid or semi-solid units.
.6
Provide manufacturer's catalogued special units such as bullnose, corner, lintel block, ledge
block and others as indicated.
Brick :
.1
Custom Brick by Vintage Brick Supplier.
http://www.vintagebrick.ca
.2
Colour: Custom Colour to match existing.
.3
Units must be cured for at least 28 days before delivery and shall have a moisture content of
not more than 30% of total absorption.
.4
Size: to match existing custom Imperial Ontario Modular 66.68 mm x 104.78 mm x 219.08
mm (2-5/8”x 4-1/8” x 8-5/8”)
.5
Brick units shall be uniform in size, free of perceptible warp or twist, without chipped, ragged
or broken edges; have a uniform surface texture, free of cracks, blemishes or defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.
.6
Where indicated provide solid or semi-solid units.
.7
Provide manufacturer's catalogued special units such as bullnose, corner and others as
indicated.
Metal Reinforcement:
.1
Steel wire, cold drawn high tensile strength, to ASTM A82, with hot dip galvanized finish after
fabrication to ASTM A153, Class B2.
.2
Steel wire, cold drwn high tensile strength to ASTM A82, with mill galvanized finish to ASTM
A116, Class 3.
.3
Steel wire, stainless steel: ASTM A580, Type 304.
.3
Horizontal reinforcement exterior walls: truss type with 4.8 mm diameter hot dip galvanized
steel side and cross rods; side rods centred on concrete block face shells; prefabricated
corner and intersection assemblies: BLOK-TRUS BL30 by Blok-Lok or equivalent product by
Dur-O-Wal. Provide stainless steel reinforcement where reinforcement is integral with cavity
wall connectors.
.4
Horizontal reinforcement, interior walls: truss type with 3.6 mm diameter mill galvanized steel
side and cross rods; side rods centred on concrete block face shells; prefabricated
assemblies at corners and intersections: BLOK-TRUS BL30 by Blok-Lok or equivalent
product by Dur-O-Wal.
Connectors, Anchors and Ties:
.1
Materials
.1
Steel: hot dip galvanized.
.2
Stainless steel: ASTM A167 Type 304.
.3
Wire materials: as specified for metal reinforcement.
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-4
.4
.2
.3
Cavity wall connectors at walls with exterior wall steel stud framing: one of the following
types:
.1
Slotted Side Mounting Rap Tie, with V tie and polyethylene insulation support plate:
by Fero.
.2
Stud Klamp, S Type, anchor plate, wire tie and Wedge-Lok insulation fastener: by
Blok-Lok.
Cavity wall connectors at walls with concrete block back-up: one of the following types:
.1
.4
Use hot dip galvanized cavity wall connectors at walls up to 13 m in height; use
stainless steel connectors at walls in excess of 13 m in height.
Fero Slotted Block Tie (Type 1) consisting of 1.6 mm thick connector plate of length
to suit insulation and concrete block thickness, wire V-tie, 4.8 mm diameter and
polyethylene insulation support by Form and Build Supply (Toronto) Inc. (905) 6290241.
Cavity wall connectors at walls with concrete back-up: one of the following types:
.1
Fero Rap Tie consisting of slotted connector plate of length to suit insulation
thickness, anchored with predrilled concrete anchors, and wire V-tie, 4.8 mm
diameter and polyethylene insulation support by Form & Build Supply.
.2
Predrilled, self-tapping 8 mm diameter helical stainless steel anchors with plastic
insulation retainer: Helifix and Wedge-Lok by Blok-Lok, or Helix Spiro-Tie and
Vista-Fix by JV Building Products.
.5
Interior masonry to concrete: 2.5 mm galvanized anchor and 4.8 mm diameter glavanized
wire tie with galvanized dovetail anchor slots: Dovetail Anchors BLT8 by Blok-Lok.
.6
Lateral support angles and channels:
.1
Prime coated steel angles or channels, 75 mm high x 200 mm long x 6 mm thick.
.2
Steel: CAN/CSA-G40.21-04, minimum 260W.
.3
Primer: CAN/CGSB-1.40-97.
.4
Fasteners: Expansion type concrete anchors, two per angle.
.5
Dampproof course and membrane flashing: Blueskin TWF.
.6
Flashing back-up: minimum 0.9 mm thick hot dip galvanized sheet steel; Z275 zinc coating.
.7
Weep and Vent Holes: Cell Vent Weep-Hole Ventilator by Dur-O-Wal, size to suit face brick; colour
selected by Consultant.
.9
Premoulde3d joint filler, non-fire rated locations: semi-rigid mineral fibre board by Roxul or Partek..
.10
Mortar dropping control device (cavity drainage mat): high density polyethylene or nylon mesh in
trapezoidal configuration designed to facilitate effective drainage of moisture to weep holes; thickness
to suit air space: "The Mortar Net" by JV Building Supply (905) 851-3744.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION - GENERAL
.1
Lay masonry work in uniform manner. No one portion of any section of work shall rise more than 750
mm above general level. Do not lay more than 1500 mm in height of any wall in any working day.
.2
Unless otherwise noted, all walls and partitions shall extend to the underside of the structural deck.
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-5
.3
Cut exposed masonry units with power driven table model masonry saw only. Ragged or chipped
edges will not be permitted.
.4
Consult with other Sections to avoid cutting and patching. Co-operate in setting and aligning built-in
items. Build in conduit and piping so that they are not exposed. Do not break masonry bond to
accommodate concealed built-in items.
.5
Grout solid with mortar all spaces around built-in items.
.6
Build in metal nailing plugs, grounds, inserts, anchor bolts, bearing plates, loose and miscellaneous
items of steel and iron, isolated beams, lintels and shelf angles, sleeves, blocking and items furnished
by other Sections.
.7
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken its initial set.
3.2
CHASES, OPENINGS AND HOLES
.1
Chases and openings shall be built in during erection of masonry work, and purpose-made chased
units shall be built into proper position.
.2
Openings in masonry work exceeding 200 mm opening width shall be provided with lintels in
accordance with lintel schedule.
.3
Chasing of completed walls or formation of holes shall only be carried out with Consultant's prior
approval, and then only with a tool designed to cleanly cut masonry units.
.4
Chases shall be plumb and shall be minimum of one unit length from jambs of openings.
.5
Horizontal or diagonal chases are not permitted.
3.3
MASONRY BEARING
.1
Masonry bearing shall extend full thickness of wall.
.2
Unless otherwise indicated, provide at least 200 mm of bearing for lintels and beams.
.3
Bearings of block masonry walls: use minimum 2 courses of solid or grouted block units except where
concrete bearing pads are required.
.4
Build masonry neatly around beam, and lintel bearings.
3.4
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
.1
Where fresh masonry joins partially or totally set masonry, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and
remove loose mortar and foreign material prior to laying fresh masonry.
.2
If necessary to stop off a horizontal run of masonry, rack back one-half masonry unit length in each
course. Toothing will not be permitted unless approved by the Consultant.
3.5
BLOCKWORK
.1
Blockwork shall be laid up in running bond except where shown otherwise. Unless otherwise
indicated, blocks shall be of thickness required to produce total wythe thickness.
.2
Provide lightweight concrete block in exposed locations except where otherwise indicated.
.3
Do not wet blocks before laying.
.4
Units shall be laid with webs aligning one over the other in full bed of mortar over entire laying surface
including webs.
.5
Exposed faces shall be full units laid out to minimize cutting with not less than 100 mm any at vertical
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-6
edge or corner.
.6
Top course of block walls shall be laid with semi-solid blocks at doors, at wall changes to brick and
where shown.
.7
Use solid block for at least two courses under all point bearing loads.
.8
Form exposed external block foundation corners with end units.
.9
Provide bullnose block at all exposed vertical and horizontal block corners. Where directed by
Consultant provide square corner block at first course above floor; grind corner above base to match
bullnose above.
.10
Where directed by Consultant provide square corner block at the first course above floor; grind square
corner above base, after installation of base, to blend with bullnose above.
.11
Provide minimum 400 mm solid or grouted block for jambs of openings and at ends of walls.
.12
Cope or cut with power saw exposed units to accommodate flush mounted electrical outlets, grilles
and other components. Leave maximum 5 mm clearance. Cover plates and flanges must cover cut
edges.
.13
Take special care to prevent mortar or other substances from staining exposed block faces. Replace
stained blocks as directed by the Consultant at no extra cost to Contract.
.14
Provide recesses at elevator walls to accommodate switches, controls, pull stations and other wall
mounted items.
3.6
BLOCK LINTELS
.1
Build block lintels; provide reinforcement and concrete fill in accordance with requirements of Division
3. Unless otherwise detailed make lintels 200 mm high.
.2
Lintels shall have minimum 200 mm bearing, with care taken in layout of wall to ensure that lintel
jointing coincides with regular bond of wall.
.3
Provide building paper in joint at bearings and a vertical joint at ends of block lintels to break bond.
.4
Provide shoring for block lintel construction. Do not use door frames as support.
3.7
BRICKWORK
.1
Lay face brick inFlemish bond (match existing) except where shown otherwise. Provide header,
soldier, rowlock and special band courses as indicated. Provide solid soldier course units at outside
corners; 45° cut units will not be accepted.
.2
Completed brickwork shall appear uniform and well blended, free of contrasting areas. Replace at no
extra cost to Contract any brickwork which does not meet this requirement.
.3
Brickwork with an absorption rate of over 1 g/min./ 1000 mm , when tested in accordance with
ASTM C67 shall be dampened before laying.
.4
Tops of walls which have been left exposed for any length of time shall be dampened before work is
commenced again, if required.
.5
Brickwork at different levels shall be stepped in regular proportion between levels.
.6
Brickwork shall be laid up with the shove joint method in full bed of mortar with vertical and horizontal
joints filled flush. Slushing mortar into joints after laying of brick is not permitted.
.7
All joints in brickwork, including bed and collar joints, shall be filled flush as each course is laid. Pull
down and rebuild walls/partitions which do not meet this requirements as directed by Consultant and at
no extra cost to Contract.
2
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-7
.8
Variations in size of brick shall be evenly distributed in wall so that mortar joints are uniform
throughout.
.9
At first brick course over steel lintel place brick directly on membrane flashing without mortar.
.10
At external corners other than 90° provide special custom shape corner units.
3.8
CAVITY WALLS
.1
Ensure that air barrier , insulation and cavity compartment seal installation is complete and has been
inspected and accepted by Consultant prior to installation of exterior wythe masonry. Coordinate with
Sections 07200 and 07270.
.2
After the first course of face brick is laid install one continuous row of mortar dropping control device at
bottom of cavities and veneer air space; place device on top of membrane flashing, with "zig-zag" side
up. Where cavity / air space is larger than 25 mm use multi-layer mortar dropping control device of
thickness designed to fill space completely.
.3
Keep the cavity clean and free from mortar droppings or projections. Bevel the “Cavity” edge of the
mortar bed immediately after “stringing” the mortar.
.4
Reinforce back up masonry with continuous metal reinforcement at maximum 400 mm o.c. vertically.
Provide additional reinforcing at openings as specified hereinafter. Provide first row of reinforcing at
first joint above support. Place reinforcement in alternate courses to cavity wall connectors.
.5
Provide cavity wall connectors at maximum 400 mm o.c. horizontally and vertically, unless other
spacing, supported by manufacturer's engineering analysis is accepted by jurisdictional authorities.
Locate first row of connectors / ties at 200 mm above foundations and loose lintels and at maximum
400 mm above shelf angles; install connectors / ties above through wall metal flashings. Locate last
row of connectors / ties maximum 200 mm below openings and below top of parapets. Locate
connectors / ties maximum 300 mm from inside and outside corners and at maximum 200 mm each
side of expansion and control joints.
3.9
REGLETS AND RECESSES
.1
Form continuous reglets and recesses in masonry elements as indicated and as required to
accommodate work of other Sections.
.2
Rake out mortar joints and/or make sawcuts in masonry units as required.
.3
Make reglets 25 mm deep, unless otherwise shown.
3.10
JOINT WORK
.1
Make joints uniform and 10 mm thick unless otherwise shown.
.2
Joints in exposed and painted surfaces, and in masonry behind wall mounted and built-in fixtures shall
be tooled when thumbprint hard with a 25 mm o.d. plastic tool to produce a concave joint.
.3
Joints in unparged masonry below grade shall be pointed tight with a trowel.
.4
Joints directly behind resilient base, rigid insulation, ceramic tile and gypsum board shall be struck
flush.
3.11
ANCHORING, BONDING AND REINFORCEMENT
.1
Anchor or bond walls and partitions at points where they intersect.
.2
Except where stack bond is required bond each wythe or masonry walls and partitions at corners by
alternately bonding 50% of units of each wall and partition at corner intersection.
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-8
.3
Bond non-loadbearing walls and partitions to loadbearing walls with ties spaced at 400 mm o.c.
vertically. Provide one tie for each 100 mm thickness, or part thereof, of wall or partition.
.4
Anchor masonry walls and partitions to concrete and steel elements with anchors spaced at 400
mm vertically.
.5
Unless otherwise indicated reinforce all concrete block walls and partitions with continuous horizontal
metal reinforcement, installed at 400 mm o.c. vertically. Place first row of reinforcment at first joint
above support.
.6
Comply with requirements indicated on structural drawings. Where requirements shown are in
conflict, comply with most stringent requirements.
.7
At wall openings place continuous reinforcement in first and second mortar joints above and below
openings. Additional reinforcement at openings shall extend 610 mm beyond both sides of openings.
.8
Install prefabricated corner assemblies at corners.
.9
Lap continuous reinforcement 150 mm at splices. Cut reinforcement at control joints.
.10
Provide lateral support angles at top of non-loadbearing masonry partitions/walls. Anchor angles to
structural deck or beam at 10 x partition/wall thickness each side of partition, and maximum 0.6 m from
ends and corners.
3.12
CONTROL JOINTS
.1
Provide control joints at masonry walls supported by foundation walls at approximately 7.5 m o.c. and
at masonry walls supported on framed slabs at approximately 4 m o.c., and where shown. Confirm
actual locations of control joints with Consultant before starting work.
.2
Provide control joints at intersection of bearing and nonbearing walls.
.3
At cavity walls, offset control joints at outer and inner wythe as shown.
.4
Construct control joints as shown. Unless otherwise shown make control joints 10 mm wide.
Interrupt masonry reinforcement at control joints.
.5
Control joints must be constructed during erection of masonry, and may not be sawcut later.
3.13
MEMBRANE FLASHINGS AND DAMPPROOF COURSE
.1
Install dampproof course on top of foundation walls above grade.
.2
Install membrane flashing at the following locations:
.1
Door heads
.2
Window heads
.3
Below precast concrete elements
.4
Immediately above horizontal interruptions within exterior walls.
.5
Where indicated.
.3
Lap dampproof course/membrane flashing 100 mm at joints; seal lap with adhesive; extend membrane
flashings up to create end dams at all window sill conditions and other termination points.
.4
Install double layer of membrane flashing over joints and gaps at shelf angles and where required.
.5
In all cases extend membrane flashing 13 mm beyond outside face of wall or outside edge of steel
lintel. Trim as required to Consultant's later instructions.
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-9
3.14
WEEP AND VENT HOLES
.1
Form weep and vent holes by inserting weep and vent hole inserts into brick mortar joint immediately
above all membrane flashings, and where shown; space weep and vent holes at maximum 600 mm
o.c. horizontally at brick and at maximum 400 mm o.c. at block.
.2
Keep face of inserts back from face of brick minimum 6 mm. Keep holes free of mortar.
.3
Provide vents at top of cavity compartments, below parapet, below openings, below shelf angles, at
maximum 600 mm o.c. at brick and a maximum 800 mm o.c. at block.
3.15
STEEL ELEVATOR DOOR FRAMES
.1
Install steel frames in masonry walls. Build in frames rigid, true and plumb. Fill voids between frames
and masonry with grout. Fill fixed centre mullions with grout.
.2
Brace frames solidly in position while being built in. Provide temporary horizontal wood spreader at
mid-height of frames to ensure maintenance of required frame width until masonry work is completed.
For frames over 1200 mm width provide temporary vertical support at centre of head.
.3
Comply with installation requirements specified under Section 08110.
3.16
MISCELLANEOUS
.1
Where non-loadbearing, non-fire rated partitions extend to underside of structure, tightly pack space
between top of partition and underside of structure with rockwool insulation, leaving no voids. At
exposed locations set back packing to permit installation of sealant by Section 07920.
.2
Provide continuous 0.1 mm thick polyethylene bond breaker at base of partitions and walls which bear
on concrete slabs.
.3
Provide paper backed galvanized steel lath as required for support of grout and mortar fill within
masonry elements.
.4
Install access doors occurring in masonry elements, required by Divisions 15 and 16. Install access
doors plumb, level, properly aligned and securely anchored, in locations directed by Divisions 15 and
16.
.5
Coordinate with Section 07620 for installation of roof flashings, where flashings are built into masonry
walls.
3.17
REINFORCED MASONRY
.1
Conform to requirements of CSA A371.
.2
Reinforce masonry walls as indicated on the structural drawings.
.3
For stack bond assemblies, joint reinforcing is required in every course.
.4
Grout beneath bearing plats: fill voids beneath steel bases bearing on masonry with approved nonshrink grout having minimum compressive strength at 28 days cure time of 35 MPa. In addition, use
non-ferrous grout where grout is exposed to view, in-service moisture conditions, and weather.
.5
Reinforced block lintels:
.1
Install reinforced block lintels over doorways, other openings and recesses as indicated.
Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated.
.2
Support masonry units of reinforced block lintels built in place. Provide a level platform, true
to the proper elevation and of sufficient strength to support the load without visible deflection.
Maintain supports in place for a minimum of 7 days and for a period sufficient to permit the
concrete to cure and gain sufficient strength to safely support all loads.
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-10
3.18
.3
Lay masonry units with full mortar coverage on abutting edges with joints shoved tight.
Where masonry construction is continued above the lintel, place the first course of masonry
units on the lintel in full mortar bed.
.4
Fill voids of masonry units that form the fill depths of lintel beams at one time per beam, with
non-shrink grout having minimum compressive strength at 28 days curing time of 35 MPa.
.5
Make joints in lintels and bond beams to match adjacent walls.
PARGING
.1
Provide parging at locations shown.
.2
Parging mix: 1 part Portland cement and 3 parts sand by volume, mixed with sufficient water to
produce workable mix.
.3
Bond coat mix: 24 kg Portland cement and 4L Sternson Surfacrtete Concentrate and 4L water.
.4
Prepare substrate and apply bond coat in accordance with bonding agent manufacturer's
recommendations. Apply parging while bond coat is still moist and tacky. Apply parging minimum 6
mm thick, trowelled to smooth surface.
3.19
CLEANING
.1
At completion of work, holes and other defects in masonry joints shall be repaired, and masonry
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned.
.2
Holes in masonry joints shall be filled with mortar and suitably tooled. Cut out and repoint defective
joints.
.3
Dry brush masonry surfaces at end of each day's work and after all final pointing.
.4
Remove mortar smears and droppings from concrete block masonry surfaces after such smears and
droppings have dried. When mortar joints are dry and hard, clean block masonry surfaces by rubbing
down with abrasive blocks and stiff fibre brushes.
.5
Clean clay masonry surfaces in accordance with brick manufacturer’s recommendations.
.6
Upon completion of work, clean blockwork by brushing and washing. In extreme cases a 65% solution
of muriatic acid may be used preceded and followed by a copious bath of clean water. Clean
blockwork to be painted to suit requirements of Section 09900.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
04200-11
DIVISION 5 – METALS
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
.1
1.2
Section 03300:
Section 05400:
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Testing of Structural Steel and Steel Deck
REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
1.4
Provide all labour, materials, equipment and services to supply and erect structural
steel required and/or indicated on the drawings or specified herein:
RELATED WORK
.1
.2
1.3
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 1
Reference Standards are to be latest editions.
Ontario Building Code
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94(R2000) - Steel Structures for Buildings (Limited States
Design).
CSA S136-07 - Cold Formed Steel Structural Members
CSA W47.1-09 - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
Structures.
CSA W59-03(R2008) - Welded Steel Construction (Metal-Arc Welding).
CAN3-G40.20-04 - General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality
Steel.
CAN3-G40.21-04 - Structural Quality Steels.
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Structural steel fabricator shall have not less than five (5) years experience in the
fabrication of structural steel.
.2
Erector shall have not less than five (5) years experience in erection of structural
steel.
.3
The steel fabricators and erectors must be certified under the requirements of
CAN/CSA W47.1 as required by CAN/CSA-S16.1.
.4
Welding procedures, welders and welding operations shall be qualified in
accordance with the Canadian Welding Bureau Standards.
.5
All connections shall be designed by a C.I.S.C. approved Fabricator unless
otherwise noted.
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 2
1.5
1.6
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
EXAMINATIONS
.1
All dimensions taken from the Drawings are to be confirmed on site prior to
fabrication.
Contractor is to be responsible for the correctness of such
measurements and report to the Consultant in writing all discrepancies between
measurements at building and those shown on drawings prior to commencing work.
Verify location of anchor bolts and embedded steel and ensure that work prepared
by other trades is at a proper elevation, on-line, level, and true.
.2
Contractor to locate all mechanical/electrical openings required in structural
members for existing systems prior to fabrication.
.3
Contractor responsible for all costs associated with site location of existing strands
and embedded conduits.
SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTAL
.1
Drawings, which accompany these specifications, are to be used for estimating
purposes only, and show in general the type of construction that shall be followed,
but must not be considered as fabrication drawings.
.2
Submit detailed erection and shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a
Registered Professional Engineer in accordance with the General Requirements.
Where pre-engineered or fabricator designed elements are part of the shop drawings,
the shop drawings shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in Ontario.
.3
The shop drawings shall clearly show all shop and erection details, including cuts,
copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners, splices and welds. All welds, both
shop and field, shall be indicated by AWS welding Symbols as specified in CSA
Standard W59 Appendix D and E.
.4
Shop drawings shall be submitted in an orderly sequence and sufficiently in advance
of the work proceeding so as to not affect the schedule of the Work. The Contractor
and the Consultant shall jointly determine the schedule for which the shop drawing
submissions shall occur.
.5
The Consultant’s review of the shop drawings is for general conformance only and
does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for errors or omissions that may
be present in the shop drawings.
.6
Upon request by the Consultant, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the shop
drawings.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
1.7
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 3
.7
Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for the installation of anchor
bolts, plates and other devices.
.8
Structural drawings are not prepared to be used in sepia form as erection drawings.
.9
Shop drawings shall show complete details necessary for fabrication and erection of
the component parts of the structure, including location, type, size and extent of all
welds, as well as all mechanical/electrical openings required. Splices not shown on
the shop drawings will not be accepted.
.10
Prior to starting erection work, submit a description of the methods, sequence of
erection and type of equipment proposed for use in erecting structural steel.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
.1
The Owner will engage and pay for the services of a welding Engineer and a testing
agency.
.2
Allow free access to all parts of the work area for the purposes of inspection at all
times.
.3
Prior to commencement of work provide a schedule of shop fabrication.
.4
Submit certified results of testing in accordance with CAN3-G40.20 properly
correlated to the elements being fabricated.
.5
High tensile bolts will be tested in accordance with Clause 22.7 of CAN3-S16.1.
.6
For the purpose of bidding, assume all welds will be examined by a non-destructive
testing method.
.7
Testing of all connections and splices not indicated on the design drawings shall be
undertaken by the Owner’s testing agency and will be to the Contractor’s account.
.8
The Contractor shall advise the testing agency of the scheduling of all shop and field
work pertaining to this Project. The Contractor shall permit the testing agency full
access to the fabrication shop and the site for the purpose of carrying out his work
and he shall provide assistance required to aid in the performance of the inspection
and testing.
.9
If more than 5% re-inspection is required due to faulty workmanship, the Contractor
will be required to pay for this re-inspection.
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 4
.10
1.8
1.9
The Engineer may reject at any time during the progress of the work a piece of
material for any member which he may find defective or not in accordance with the
detailed drawings. This material may be rejected notwithstanding any previous
acceptance and components so rejected shall be replaced at no expense to the
Owner. In case of dispute, the decision of the Engineer shall be final.
STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all steel work during
fabrication, shipping, storage, and construction. All small bends and damage shall
be reported to the Engineer for instruction. Steel work, which is bent, broken, or
otherwise damaged, shall be replaced by the Contractor prior to erection, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, at no cost to the Owner.
.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for proper scheduling of delivery and erection
for the structural steel, all in accordance with the construction schedule.
.3
Structural steel members shall be stored at the site above ground on platforms,
skids, or other devices.
.4
Steel shall be protected from corrosion.
.5
Other material shall be stored in a weather tight and dry place until ready for use in
the Work.
.6
Package materials shall be stored in their original unbroken packages or container.
SUPPLY OF ALTERNATE PRODUCTS
.1
1.10
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Should the rolled sections shown on the drawings not be procurable from Canadian
Mills, or should substitution for those sections be desired, sections of equivalent
strength, may be substituted if approved by the Consultant. In each case full
particulars thereof must be submitted prior to the closing of Bid. Material
substitutions after the closing of Bid, if accepted, will be at the Contractor’s cost.
CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
.1
Supply all necessary instructions and drawings to other trades for setting bearing
plates, anchor bolts, and other members that are built in with the work of other
trades. Supply the necessary material in accordance to the construction schedule.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.2
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 5
.1
Rolled shapes, rolled plate, and welded wide flange sections shall be to CAN3G40.21-300W.
.2
Hollow structural sections shall be to CAN3-G40.21-350W Class C.
.3
High strength bolts shall be to ASTM A325M or A490.
.4
Welding material shall be in accordance with CSA Standard W59.
.5
Anchor bolts and nuts to ASTM A307.
.6
Embedment anchors shall be Nelson headed anchors with fluxed ends or approved
equal conforming to ASTM. A.108-73.
.7
Bar anchors shall be Nelson deformed bar anchors or approved equal conforming to
ASTM.A-496.
.8
Structural steel (exterior exposure) not to receive shop or field paint shall be hot Dip
galvanized to Z275 G90 designation.
.9
Touch-up primers for exterior exposure not to receive a shop or field paint finish
shall be zinc chromate Type - 1, conforming to C.G.S.B. 1-GP-40d.
.10
Primers used in a multi-coat system where a final shop or field paint finish is to be
applied shall be selected and pre-approved based on surface preparation, exposure
conditions and compatibility with subsequent coatings.
DESIGN
.1
All connections and beam web openings shall be designed by the fabricator to the
reference standards unless otherwise noted.
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
FABRICATION
.1
Verify all dimensions and take necessary field measurements before fabrication.
.2
All fabrication shall be to CAN3-S16.1.
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 6
3.2
3.3
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.3
All welding shall be to CSA W59.
.4
All fabricated units shall be straight and true and without sharp kinks or bends.
.5
All hollow structural sections shall be closed airtight with end plates sealed with
welds.
.6
All plates and shapes shall be inspected visually for laminations. Repair plates or
shapes that contain laminations in a manner approved by the Consultant.
.7
Provide punched holes for the convenience of other trades in attaching wood
blocking or other materials. Co-ordinate with drawings of other disciplines for
location and details.
.8
Obtain Consultant’s approval for holes required through structural steel that are not
shown on the drawings.
CLEANING AND PRIMING
.1
All steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose mill scale, loose rust, oil, or dirt.
.2
All steel shall be primed (exterior exposure) except for steel to be encased in
concrete, steel to be fireproofed, steel which will receive shear studs, and fraying
surfaces of friction connections.
.3
Structural steel to be primed for exterior exposure or to receive a shop or field paint
finish shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning”.
.4
All primers shall be applied strictly in accordance with the Manufacturers
instructions. Apply one (1) coat of primer thoroughly and evenly and work well into
the joints and other open spaces.
.5
After erection and after connections are completed, provide a field touch up coat of
primer to all surfaces that had no shop coat, or have been chipped or scraped.
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Steel shall be painted with shop primer meeting the requirements of CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-S16.1 unless noted otherwise.
.2
Architecturally Exposed Steel:
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
3.4
3.5
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 7
.3
Cleaning, preparation of steel and the paint product shall be compatible with
requirements of finish painting.
.4
Use paint as prepared by manufacturer without thinning or adding admixtures.
Execute painting on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, and grease. Do not paint in
temperatures lower than [50 deg. F] [8 deg C].
.5
Interior structural steel - steel surfaces to be encased in concrete, welded,
fireproofed, zinc coated, galvanized or to receive shear connector studs or
embedment anchors shall not be painted.
.6
Clean contact surfaces by effective means before assembly but do not paint.
.7
Where shop painting is required give two coats of paint (preferably of different
colours) to parts inaccessible after final assembly.
.8
Touch-up welds, bolts, and burnt or scratched surfaces of painted steel after
completion of erection.
COLUMNS AND BASES
.1
All flame cut steel columns shall have their ends milled.
supporting columns shall be flat.
.2
Base plates and cap plates are to be seal welded to HSS columns.
Steel base plates
CONNECTIONS
.1
Use connections of the type and detail shown on the Drawings. Modifications to the
specified connection types and details will not be permitted without prior approval
from the Consultant.
.2
Connections designed by the fabricator shall be in accordance with CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-S16.1 and stamped and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in
the Province of Ontario.
.3
All connections shall be designed to carry the loads specified on the Drawings. If
loads are not given, the connection shall have the capacity not less than the members
being connected.
.4
Column to beam and girder connections shall allow for a horizontal stability force in
all directions equal to 2% of the design column axial load in addition to all other
loads.
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 8
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.5
Structural steel members spliced for ease of fabrication or transportation shall have
splices designed to develop the full strength and stiffness of the member. Splices
shall be subject to non-destructive testing as directed by the Consultant. The cost
for such testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
.6
Use standard connection types where possible.
.7
Provide stiffeners in beam webs at all locations of beam continuity. Unless noted
otherwise web stiffeners shall be [1/2”] [12 mm] minimum.
.8
All bolted connections may be snug tight except connections for:
.1
.2
.3
Bracing, trusses and drag struts.
Elements resisting crane loads.
Supports for running machines or loads that produce impact or cyclic load.
These shall be designed as slip connections and pretensioned.
3.6
3.7
.9
Connections for seismic lateral load resisting elements, bolts in tension and
elements connected with oversize or slotted holes unless designed to accommodate
movement may be bearing connections but shall be pretensioned.
.10
Truss diagonal members shall be connected to truss chord for the loads indicated or
50% of the diagonal member axial capacity (TENSION), whichever is greater.
SEPARATORS AND MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS
.1
Provide separators for all double members in accordance with CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-S16.1.
.2
Provide plates and / or angles for support of masonry where required.
ERECTION
.1
Supervise the setting of bases, anchor bolts, and other steel to concrete connections.
Cutting of base plates to accommodate anchor bolts shall be cause for rejection of
base plates.
.2
Install all temporary bracing that is required to stabilize the work against wind,
earthquake, and construction loads. Keep structure true and plumb until completion
of the building.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
3.8
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 9
.3
As erection progresses, the work shall be securely bolted up to take care of all dead
loads, wind, and erection stresses. Any failure to make proper and adequate
provisions for stresses during erection shall be solely the responsibility of the
Contractor.
.4
The structural steel erector shall be responsible for the design of all hooks, erection
connections and handling gear.
.5
Whenever piles of materials, erection equipment, or other loads are carried during
erection, proper provision shall be made to take care of stresses resulting from it.
.6
All structural steel shall be assembled and erected in accordance with the approved
erection drawings and specified reference standards.
.7
Structural steel work shall be carefully located at the proper grade and rigidly
secured in place, using steel shims. All spaces under the steel shall then be filled
with non-shrink pre-mix grout.
.8
Plumb, level and align individual members of steel work as specified in the latest
CAN3-S16.1.
.9
Structural steel frames shall be accurately assembled to the lines and elevations
indicated within the specified tolerances.
.10
The various members forming parts of complete frame of structure after being
assembled shall be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened.
.11
Bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned
before the members are assembled.
.12
Temporary bolts, clips and angles etc. used to facilitate the erection shall be
removed unless noted otherwise on the drawing.
TEMPORARY FLOORING
.1
Provide all temporary flooring, planking and scaffolding necessary in connection
with erection of structural steel, or support of erection machinery in accordance with
governing regulations or by-laws.
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 10
3.9
3.10
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
COMPLETION
.1
The Registered Professional Engineer responsible for the shop drawings, or his
representative shall visit to review in place connections and components designed
by that Registered Professional Engineer as required to substantiate compliance with
his sealed shop drawings. He shall then submit a letter of compliance provide a seal
and signed letter to the Consultant and Engineer.
.2
On completion of the work of this section, all protection erected in conjunction with
the structural steel work shall be removed, all damage to this work and adjoining
work shall be made good and all surplus materials and debris and all tools and
equipment shall be removed from the site.
WELDING
.1
All welding shall be done by the shielded metal-arc method in accordance with the
requirements CSA W59. The welding operators shall have passed within the
preceding six (6) months, the qualifications test as set forth in CSA W47.1.
.2
Submit welding procedures prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer
registered in Ontario, and familiar with this discipline to the Consultant for his
examination and comments.
.3
Surface to be welded shall be free from loose scale, rust, paint, or other foreign
matter. Where weld material is deposited in two or more layers, each layer shall be
cleaned before the next layer is deposited. Care shall be taken to minimize stresses
due to heat expansion, contraction and distortion by using proper sequence in
welding and by approved methods.
.4
Welding consumables for all processes shall be fully approved by the Canadian
Welding Bureau and certified by the manufactures as complying with the
requirement of this specification. Such certificates shall be not more than two years
old.
.5
Electrode strengths to be equal to E480XX (E70xx) or better.
.6
Embedment anchors, shear stubs and deformed bar anchors shall be automatically
end welded with suitable stud welding in accordance to the manufacture’s
recommendations. Fillet welding of anchors will be rejected.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
3.11
Section 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page 11
.1
Structural steel work (material and workmanship) shall be subject to review and
tested by a testing agency retained by the Owner.
.2
Construction review by the testing agency or the Consultant does not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance
with the Drawings and Specifications.
END OF SECTION
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED
1.2
.1
Provide all labour, materials, closures, equipment and services necessary to
design, supply, fabricate, erect and install the steel deck and field welded shear
connectors to structural steel as indicated on the drawings and as hereinafter
specified. Provide gauge metal formwork at all deck edges for composite deck or
concrete filled deck and reinforcement for deck openings as required herein.
.2
Coordinate with Section 05120 (Structural Steel) for the design, supply, and
installation of headed stud shear connections for composite beams and girders and
where required on other beams, girders, and drag struts.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.3
Section 05300
STRUCTURAL STEEL DECK
Page 1
Section 03100:Concrete Formwork
Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete
Section 05100: Structural Steel
Section 05400: Testing of Structural Steel and Steel Deck
REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
Structural Steel Deck shall conform to the requirements of the following standards
unless otherwise required by the specification:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
CAN/CSA W47.1 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
Structures.
CAN/CSA W59-M Welded Steel Construction (Metal-Arc Welding).
CAN/CSA S136-M Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
ASTM A446-76 Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip
Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.
CSSBI 101M Zinc Coated Structural Quality Steel Sheet for Roof and
Floor Deck.
Where the standard is referred to in this specification it shall mean the documents
specified in this clause and their referenced documents.
Section 05300
Page 2
1.4
1.5
1.6
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
All steel deck welders must possess current Canadian Welding Bureau
Certificates of Qualification for light gauge structural welding.
.2
The deck erectors must be certified under the requirements of CAN/CSA W47.1.
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine and verify all necessary measurements and dimensions of previously
executed work that may affect the work of this contract.
.2
Examine surfaces that the work is to be placed on or against to ensure that they
are square, true, level, plumb, of correct slope or shape, and of proper surface to
receive such work.
.3
Report any discrepancies to the Consultant and Engineer immediately so that
instructions may be given for the necessary remedial work.
.4
Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of all conditions and
surfaces.
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a Specialty Structural
Engineer. Drawings of components designed by the Contractor shall be sealed
and signed by this Specialty Structural Engineer.
.2
Shop drawings shall show the position, extent, type and arrangement of the units,
their relationship to other materials, depth, core thickness, coating thickness,
connections, openings, accessories, closures, light gauge formwork and
reinforcement for openings, and complete stud shear connector details for
composite beams.
.3
Calculations and/or test data may be requested with the shop drawings to justify
deck design and shear connector design.
.4
Show deck load capacities, including point load capacities, and for composite
deck confirm that these load capacities are compatible with the zinc coating.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
2.0
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
Products shall satisfy the requirements of the standard unless otherwise specified
herein or on the drawings.
MATERIALS
.1
2.3
Section 05300
Page 3
Steel deck units shall be formed of zinc-coated sheet steel minimum Grade A with
a base steel Nominal Thickness of 0.76 mm or greater. Unless noted otherwise,
zinc coatings shall be:
Interior Exposure
Floors - ZF075 - wipe coat.
Roofs - Z275.
Exterior Exposure
Z275.
.2
Cover plates, cell closures, etc. shall be of the same material as the deck with a
minimum nominal thickness of 0.76 mm.
.3
Deck shall conform to the depths shown on the drawings. Deck receiving
composite shear studs shall have an average bottom flute width equal to twice the
deck depth.
.4
Shear stud connectors shall be Nelson headed anchors or other pre-approved.
Studs to be automatically end welded with suitable stud welding equipment in the
field. Fillet welded studs will be rejected.
.5
Steel deck to receive concrete topping shall be composite deck unless noted
otherwise.
FABRICATION
.1
Composite steel deck shall be formed with integral locking lugs to provide
mechanical lock between concrete and steel.
.2
Steel deck shall span over three (3) or more supports unless prevented by the
structural steel layout. Deck wides are to be a minimum of 1 mm prior to side
lapping, or as required by the deck manufacturer.
.3
Steel deck shall have interlocking male and female side laps.
Section 05300
Page 4
2.4
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.4
Provide cell closures where required by the architectural drawings and
specifications at the open ends of all cell runs at columns, openings, walls, etc.,
and where cells change direction.
.5
For deck with concrete topping, provide necessary metal gauge formwork at the
deck edges for full deck and concrete depth to prevent leaking of concrete
topping. This includes, but is not limited to, edges formed by building edges,
openings framed by structural steel, elevator shafts, stairwells, and around webs
and flanges of columns.
DESIGN
.1
All steel deck shall be designed by the Contractor to the reference standards
unless otherwise noted.
.2
Deck thickness, spacing of puddle welds and type and extent of side connections
shall be proportioned to resist forces and loads shown on the drawings, or be as
designated on the drawings.
.3
Unless noted otherwise, the deflection under live load alone shall be limited to
span/360 for floors; for roof deck the deflection shall be limited to span/240.
.4
Decking to be used as formwork shall conform to formwork requirements of all
applicable governing safety standards.
.5
Shear stud connectors shall be designed for the forces indicated on the drawings.
If the capacities of the individual studs are reduced because of the geometry of the
particular deck profile used, provide additional studs so that the total shear
transfer capacity provided is at east that indicated on the drawings.
3.0
EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
.1
The erection of the steel deck shall be carried out by personnel experienced in the
installation of steel deck.
.2
Steel deck shall be placed on the supporting steel framework and adjusted to final
position before being permanently fastened. Each section shall be brought to
proper bearing. If the supporting framework is not in proper alignment or at the
proper level, the Contractor shall so advise the Consultant and Engineer of such
irregularities and shall not make final placement until corrections are made.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
3.2
Section 05300
Page 5
.3
For steel deck that will not receive a concrete topping, immediately after the steel
deck is welded in place, the steel deck surface shall be inspected, and all areas
where zinc coating has been burned by welding shall be covered by a suitable zinc
enriched paint, applied to the paint manufacturer's instructions.
.4
Cut all openings in metal decking at locations shown on the project drawings.
These openings shall be located and dimensioned in cooperation with the various
trades at the time of erecting the steel deck. Unless noted otherwise, openings up
to 150 mm (6") need not be reinforced. Openings between 150 mm (6") to
400 mm (16") in size shall be reinforced by this trade, using 75 mm x 75 mm x
5.0 mm x 1200 mm (48") steel angles welded to the flutes on either side of those
cut.
.5
The Contractor shall accommodate the erection and welding sequence of the
structural steel as required.
.6
Shear stud connectors shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and the standards. Procedural control to be in accordance with W59
as a minimum.
.7
Studs shall be placed in bottom flutes of steel deck on the side closest to the
nearest end of the beam.
.8
After welding studs, the ceramic ferrule shall be removed and the stud fillet
visually inspected by the operator. If the fillet is less than 360° around the base of
the stud, then the stud is to be hammer tested by the operator by bending the stud
15° from the vertical away from the side of no fillet. If the weld fails, the stud is
to be replaced. Bent studs may be left bent.
.9
If studs are welded to steel plates or members with temperature below 0°C, one
stud in each 100 is to be tested by the operator by bending 15° from the vertical.
.10
No stud welding is to be done when the base metal temperature is below - 15°C or
when the steel surface is wet.
COVER PLATES AND CLOSURES
.1
Furnish, install, and weld in position, sheet metal cover plates to close openings
between deck sections and columns and to cover gaps where deck sections abut or
change direction.
Section 05300
Page 6
3.3
3.4
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.2
For deck with concrete topping, install all light gauge metal closures and edge
strips necessary as formwork for the concrete.
.3
Install all closures as required by the architectural drawings and specifications.
CLEAN UP
.1
All steel deck cuttings, strappings, packaging material, and other debris pertaining
to steel deck units shall be cleaned up.
.2
Remove all debris and excess material at completion of erection of steel deck and
leave work ready for other trades.
.3
Repair any defects. Leave steel deck free of all oil, grease, paint, and dirt.
TESTING
.1
The Owner will appoint and pay for a Testing Agency who will inspect and test
steel deck, steel deck welding and stud welding in accordance with the standards
and as noted below.
.2
Two percent of randomly selected studs will be tested to destruction by bending.
.3
Failure of the weld of any stud will be cause for rejection of the stud welding and
cause for further testing at the Contractor's expense.
.4
A ten percent or greater failure rate at the welds of the tested studs will be cause
for rejection of all the studs.
.5
All studs tested to destruction shall be replaced by the Contractor.
.6
Replacement of failed or rejected studs shall be at the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
.2
1.2
Section 05100: Structural Steel
Section 05300: Structural Steel Deck
REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
1.3
Section 05400
TESTING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
AND STEEL DECK
Page 1
CAN/CSA-S16.1-M: Limits States Design of Steel Structures.
CAN/CSA-S136-M: Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
CAN/CSA W47.1: Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
Structures.
CAN/CSA W59-M: Welded Steel Construction (Metal-Arc Welding).
CSA W178.1: Certification of Welding Inspection Organization.
CAN/CSA G40.20-M: General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural
Quality Steel.
CAN/CSA G40.21-M: Structural Quality Steel.
ASTM A446-76: Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process,
Structural (Physical) Quality.
CSSBI 101M: Zinc-Coated Structural Quality Steel Sheet for Roof and Floor
Deck.
Where the standard is referred to in this specification it shall mean the documents
specified in this clause, and their referenced standards.
APPOINTMENT OF TESTING AGENCY
.1
The Owner will appoint a Testing Agency approved under W178.1 (Building
Category).
.2
Testing paid for by the Owner.
.1
.3
Testing as outlined in Section 3.0.
Testing paid for by the Contractor.
.1
Testing of pre-approved connections not on the structural drawings and
required by the contractor for ease of fabrication, transportation or
erection.
Section 05400
AND STEEL DECK
Page 2
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
.2
Costs for retesting or additional testing due to work having failed to meet
the specified requirements.
.3
For the purpose of bidding, assume all welds will be examined by a nondestructive testing method. Non-destructive testing will be performed on
samples of the work at the discretion of the Engineer as well as outlined in
this specification. Any repair and retesting costs shall be bourne by the
contractor.
2.0
DUTIES
2.1
RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR
2.2
.1
The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Testing Agency. Allow free access
to all parts of the work for the purpose of testing and review at all times.
.2
Notify the Testing Agency and Engineer when work is ready for review.
.3
Prior to commencement of work, provide a schedule of shop fabrication and
erection to the Testing Agency and Engineer.
.4
Provide mill certificates in accordance with the standard properly correlated to the
elements being fabricated.
.5
It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide a finished product that meets the
specifications. If initial tests indicate that the work failed to meet specification,
the Engineer shall decide if any additional testing is necessary. This testing shall
be done by a CSA-approved Testing Agency, but need not be the Owner's agency.
The proposed additional testing shall have prior approval of the Engineer.
RESPONSIBILITY AND DUTIES OF THE TESTING AGENCY
.1
The Testing Agency is responsible to the Owner and has the authority to, and is
expected to; reject any work not meeting the specifications.
.2
Provide testing as per the standards and as per this specification.
.3
Provide timely test reports to the Engineer, Consultant, and Contractor.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Section 05400
AND STEEL DECK
Page 3
3.0
TESTING – STRUCTURAL STEEL AND DECK
3.1
GENERAL
3.2
.1
The Engineer may reject at any time during the progress of the work a piece of
material or any member which the Engineer may find defective or not in
accordance with the detailed drawings.
This material may be rejected
notwithstanding any previous acceptance and components so rejected shall be
replaced at no expense to the Owner. In case of dispute, the decision of the
Engineer shall be final.
.2
Testing in general shall conform to CSA S16.1 and W59. Acceptance criteria for
welding to be for statically loaded structures as per W59.
.3
Confirm that the fabricator and erector are certified to CSA-W47.1 and that all
welders are properly qualified.
.4
Review welding procedures.
.5
Confirm welding consumables are properly stored in shop and field.
.6
Non-destructive testing operators to have Level II qualifications as a minimum.
.1
Randomly check and record structural steel member sizes - 100% of columns and
100% total of beams and trimmers.
.2
Check grade markings on structural steel in fabricator's plant-prior to fabrication
where possible. Collect mill certificates and forward to Structural Engineer.
.3
Provide a visual review of 50% of all welds and 50% of workmanship.
.4
Randomly select shop welds for magnetic particle inspection - 10 % of
connections.
.5
Randomly select field welds for magnetic particle inspection - 10 % of
connections.
.6
Review all snug tight bolted connections to determine that plates are in contact.
Check 10% of bolts for snugness, including anchor bolts.
Section 05400
AND STEEL DECK
Page 4
.7
For pre-tensioned bolted connections check 10% of bolts, minimum two (2) per
connection. Pre-tensioned connections are:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.8
Seismic brace connections.
Seismic drag strut connections.
Wind bracing.
All bolted connection on main truss/frames.
For the following critical welds observe 20% being welded and provide suitable
non-destructive testing to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.3
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
Tension chord splices in trusses - 100%.
Moment frame beam - column welds - 100%.
Base welds at mainframe columns - 100%.
Truss to columns connections (including stiffness in the main frame
columns – 100%).
Main truss gusset plates – 100% visual – mag. particle on 20%.
TESTING OF HEADED STUDS AND
(In Welded Plates To Be Cast Into Concrete)
DEFORMED
BAR
ANCHORS
.1
Reinforcing bars butt-welded to plates shall be tested as per this section, and shall
be weldable grade (W) reinforcing.
.2
5% of randomly selected studs will be tested to destruction by bending. Minimum
of four (4) plates of each type to be tested.
.3
Failure of the weld of any studs will be cause for rejection of the stud welding and
cause for further testing at the Engineers discretion and at the Contractor's
expense.
.4
A 10% or greater failure rate at the welds of the tested studs will be cause for
rejection of all studs.
.5
All studs tested to destruction shall be replaced by the Contractor.
.6
Replacement of failed or rejected studs shall be at the Contractor's expense.
.7
Shop welded studs may be fillet welded if welding is done to the stud
manufacturers specifications. Field applied studs shall be applied using the
manufactures stud gun and procedures or shall be rejected.
RJC # TOR013592.0007
July, 2011
3.4
Section 05400
AND STEEL DECK
Page 5
TESTING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL DECK
.1
Visual review of 100% of deck welds and button punching.
.2
Verify galvanizing as per specification.
.3
Visual inspection of 100% of deck to confirm deck type and profile.
.4
Random inspection of 25% of deck for required thickness.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.1
DESCRIPTION
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Concrete:
Section 03300
.2
Structural steel:
Section 05120
.3
Steel Deck:
Section 05310
.4
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100
.5
Flashing and Sheet Metal
Section 07620
.6
Glazed Curtain Wall
Section 08900
.7
Painting:
Section 09900
.8
Louvre and Vents:
Section 10200
1.3
WORK SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED
.1
Supply following items for installation under other Sections of work: anchor bolts, bearing plates,
sleeves and other inserts to be built into concrete and masonry elements and required for anchorage
and support of metal fabrications.
.2
Supply other Sections with instructions, and if required, templates, necessary for accurate setting of
inserts and components.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Quality of work: the work of this Section includes the following categories:
.1
Architectural metal work: includes all metal work which is exposed to view. It requires
fabrication to the highest quality standards, producing finest appearance, meeting the
following requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Miscellaneous metals: includes all concealed metal components, formed and welded to
meet structural requirements.
.2
Qualifications of Welders: welding shall be performed by fabricator certified under CIA W47.1-03.
.3
Comply with applicable requirements of CAN/CSA-S16.-01.
22/09/2011
KMAI/PATKAU
Fastenings/anchorages: concealed.
Flatness tolerance: free of perceptible waves, bows, dimples, oil-canning and other
visual defects.
Joints: straight tightfitting, hairline.
Welded connections: continuously welded, ground to consistent fillet or flush as
indicated and polished smooth to same texture as adjacent surfaces.
05500-1
1.5
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Section 01330: Submissions required.
.2
Submit detailed shop drawings of all metal fabrications required, showing profiles, members,
fastenings, thicknesses, finishes and other pertinent data.
.3
Shop drawings for stairs, landings, balustrades and mechanical enclosures, shall bear stamp and
signature of a professional engineer registered in Ontario.
1.6
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Deliver, handle and store fabricated components to prevent permanent distortion, corrosion and
damage.
.3
Protect installed components from damage during the course of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Steel sections and plate:
.1
Concealed locations: CAN/CSA-G40.21-04 300W Grade.
.2
Exposed locations: cold rolled steel to ASTM A506.
.2
Square steel tube: CAN/CSA-G40.21-04, Grade 350W.
.3
Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade A.
.4
Sheet steel: hot dip galvanized, cold rolled, with stretcher level degree of flatness to ASTM A653; zinc
coating designation Z275.
.5
Stainless steel:
.1
Tubes, pipes: ASTM A269 Interior applications Type 304 commercial grade, Exterior
applications Type 312 commercial grade.
.2
Plate, sheet: ASTM A167, Interior applications Type 304 commercial grade, Exterior
applications Type 312 commercial grade.
2.2
.6
Welding materials: CSA W59-03.
.7
Shop primer: CAN/CGSB-1.40-97.
.8
Zinc rich paint:
.1
Shop primer for exterior components to be painted: reinforced inorganic zinc rich paint: Catha
Coat 302 by Devoe.
.2
Touch-up: CAN/CGSB-1.181-99.
.9
Bituminous enamel: alkali resistant asphaltic coating.
.10
Non-shrink grout: Por-Rok by Hallemite Products Ltd., or SET 15 Minute Anchoring Cement by SET
Products Ltd.
FASTENERS
22/09/2011
KMAI/PATKAU
05500-2
.1
Unless other-wise stated, all fasteners to match the material they are employed in.
.2
Fasteners in aluminium, galvanized metal, or copper to be Type 304 stainless steel for interior
applications and Type 316 for exterior
.3
Exposed fasteners in accessible public areas to be tamper proof.
2.2
FABRICATION - GENERAL
.1
Fabricate components in the shop in largest size practicable to minimize field jointing.
.2
Fabricate components square, straight, true, free from warpage and other defects. Accurately cut,
machine file and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres.
.3
Reinforce fabricated components to safely withstand expected loads.
.4
Make joints in built-up sections with hairline joints in least conspicuous locations and manner.
.5
Make allowance for thermal expansion and contraction when fabricating exterior work.
.6
Joints shall be welded unless otherwise indicated and unless details of construction do not permit
welding. Exposed welds shall be continuous and shall be ground smooth. Welding filler rods to match
materials being welded.
.7
Close exposed open ends of tubular members with welded on steel plugs.
.8
Where work of other Sections is to be attached to work of this Section, prepare work by drilling and
tapping holes, as required to facilitate installation of such other work.
.9
Work of this Section, supplied for installation under other Sections, shall be prepared as required
ready for installation by: drilling, countersinking and tapping holes, forming shapes and cutting to
required sizes.
.10
Grind off mill stampings and fill recessed markings on steel components left exposed to view.
.11
Follow recommendations of AISI Committee of Stainless steel Producers when fabricating, joining,
welding and finishing stainless steel components. Remove heat discolourations with mechanical,
chemical or electro-chemical means. Provide temporary strippable protective coverings for stainless
steel components. Brush finished items to have welds ground and field brush finished made invisible
with the adjacent finish both in surface continuity and appearance.
.12
Fabrications over roofing and other potential early maintenance building components, must be
installed allowing for non-destructive removal and reinstallation.
2.3
METAL STAIRS
.1
Build stairs to details shown. Sizes of stringers and other structural members shown are minimum
sizes.
.2
Construct stairs to safely support minimum load of 6 kN/m² evenly distributed over treads and
landings.
.3
Cope and crank stringers as necessary to line with floor steel members at framed openings for stairs.
Apply continuous welds to cranked stringer joints.
.4
Fabricate tread plates and supporting plates for steel stair from minimum 10 mm sheet steel and bolt
fix to support members.
.5
Steel tread plates to be bolted or welded to stringers.
.6
Grind exposed welds smooth.
22/09/2011
KMAI/PATKAU
05500-3
2.4
METAL BALUSTRADE
.1
Fabricate balustrades/guards to conform to applicable OBC requirements.
.2
Construct balustrades to resist within acceptable deflection limits a horizontal thrust of 150 kg/m
applied at the top of the railing.
.3
Construction: unless otherwise indicated:
2.6
.1
Support railings at each end and at maximum 1 m o.c. between.
.2
At corners, angles and intersections cope or mitre and weld and grind smooth.
.3
Pickets shall be solid bars.
.4
All welds to be smooth ground to even radius fillet with texture to match adjacent surfaces.
FREE STANDING MECHANICAL SCREEN
.1
Construct enclosure at roof level as detailed. Exterior Vicwest CL 6025SR Aluminium cladding. Grind
exposed welds flush and even to adjacent surfaces and blended in with brush finishes.
.2
Co-ordinate with Div. 15 for all access panels, outlets and piping.
2.7
GRATINGS
.1
Provide metal gratings complete with perimeter frame and concrete anchors. Provide intermediate
support framing as required.
.2
Design gratings accessible to pedestrian traffic only to support minimum live load of 9.6 kN/m2, with
maximum deflection of L/180, unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Unless otherwise shown weld gratings to support framing. Where shown provide removable or
operable (hinged) grating sections. Provide hold-down clips at removable/operable sections.
2.8
FINISHES
.1
Thoroughly clean steel of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt and other foreign matter. Suitably prepare steel
surfaces by power tool cleaning to receive specified finishes.
.2
Grind smooth sharp projections.
.3
Remove oil and grease by solvent cleaning.
.4
Apply coatings in the shop and before assembly. Where size permits, galvanize components after
assembly.
.5
Interior components: shop apply coat of primer to interior components after fabrication except where
stainless steel, galvanized or zinc rich paint finish is required.
.6
Exterior components to be painted, except where other finish is indicated: Blast clean metal to "Near
White Grade" (SSPC-SP-10) and spray apply a coat of zinc rich paint, maximum 3 mils thick.
.7
Hot dip galvanize exterior components not scheduled to be painted, components located within
exterior building elements, and where so indicated, interior components after fabrication in accord with
2
requirements of CAN/CSA-G164-M92, minimum coating weight 380 g/m .
.8
Apply coat of bituminous enamel to contact surfaces of metal components in contact with cementitious
materials and dissimilar metals.
22/09/2011
KMAI/PATKAU
05500-4
.9
Stainless steel: No. 5 brushed, field repairable, unless otherwise shown.
.10
Weathering steel components: All components after assembly and prior to installation to be fine grit
sand blasted to remove all scale, flux and weld discolouration. All components then to be washed with
a water and salt solution and left in open storage and exposure for a minimum of 4 weeks before
delivery to site. The intent of this process is to allow weathering steel to build an even start layer of
protective corrosion. Once established, protect this layer from damage during installation
.11
Colour 1 to prefinished steel = Metallic series 2624 ‘Bright Silver’
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install components plumb, square, straight and true to line. Drill, cut and fit as necessary to attach this
work to adjoining work.
.2
Provide temporary supports and bracing required to position components until they are permanently
anchored in place.
.3
Securely anchor components in place; unless otherwise indicated, anchor components as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
To concrete and solid masonry with expansion type anchor bolts.
To hollow construction with toggle bolts.
To thin metal with screws or bolts.
To thick metal with bolts or by welding.
To wood with bolts or lag screws.
Fill space between railing members and sleeves with non-shrink grout.
.4
Provide all components required for anchoring. Make anchoring in concealed manner wherever
possible. Make exposed fastenings, where approved by Consultant, neatly and of same material,
colour, texture and finish as base metal on which they occur. Keep exposed fastenings evenly spaced.
.5
Dissimilar metals and metals in contact with cementitious elements shall have contact surfaces coated
with bituminous paint or be isolated by other means as approved by Consultant.
.6
After installation, clean and refinish injured finishes, welds, bolt heads and nuts. Refinish with zinc rich
paint or primer to match original finish.
.7
Remove protective coverings from stainless steel components prior to Substantial Performance or
when directed by Consultant.
3.2
SCHEDULE
.1
Provide all metal fabrications required whether listed hereunder and/or shown on drawings, unless
clearly covered by another Section.
.2
Unless otherwise shown provide:
.1
Interior components: prime coated steel
.2
Exterior components: Weathering steel.
.3
List of components:
.1
Steel stairs
.2
Balustrudes/ guards.
.3
Washroom support members.
.4
Roof screen support members.
.5
Loose lintels, plates, angles and other framing members required but not shown on structural
drawings.
.6
Gratings at areaways
.7
Other metal fabrications required.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI/PATKAU
05500-5
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Selective Demolition:
Section 02200
.2
Cabinet Work
Section 06300
.3
Architectural Woodwork Restoration
Section 06400
.4
Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing
Section 07550
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
CAN/CSA-G164-M92
.1
CAN/CSA-O80 Series-M89 - Wood Preservation
1.3
- Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Article
CSA O121-M78
- Douglas Fir Plywood
NLGA
- National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading
Rules for Canadian Lumber, 1987
ULC
- Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Lumber shall bear the grading stamp of an agency certified by The Canadian Lumber Standards
Administration Board.
.2
All lumber shall be sound, straight, dressed all sides and kiln dried, and moisture content at any time
during shipment and storage shall not exceed 19%.
1.4
.1
Supply to other Sections anchors, bolts, rough hardware and other items required to be built into work
of other Sections to receive, accommodate, secure work of this Section.
.2
Provide other Sections with instructions to ensure accurate setting of built-in items.
1.5
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Store materials on site to prevent deterioration, loss or impairment of their structural and other
essential properties. Prevent excessive moisture gain of materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Lumber:
.1
Meet requirements of CAN/CSA-086-01 Strength Group D (spruce-pine-fir) and CAN/CSA0141-05 and National Lumber Grading Authority (NLGA) Standard Grading Rules.
22/09/2011
KMAI
06100-1
.2
.3
2.2
.2
Blocking, Copings, Nailers, Curbs: NLGA 122c "Standard".
.3
Rip sections to match existing rough stock depth to maintain surface alignment..
Plywood:
.1
All locations except backboards: Canadian Softwood Plywood to CSA 0151-04 Unsanded
Sheathing Grade.
.2
Backboards: Canadian Softwood Plywood to CSA 0151-04, Sanded grade, solid two sides,
fire retardant pressure treated.
Fasteners and Connecting Hardware:
.1
Nails: to CSA B111-1974, hot dip galvanized steel for exterior work including components
located in exterior walls and roofs; bright finish steel in all other locations. Unless otherwise
indicated use common spiral flathead nails.
.2
Bolts, nuts, washers: ASTM A307, hot dip galvanized steel.
.3
Connectors, anchors, brackets, spikes: hot dip galvanized structural quality steel.
.4
Screws: zinc, cadmium or chrome plated.
.5
Fasteners in contact with preservative pressure treated wood shall be stainless steel.
WOOD TREATMENT
.1
Preservative pressure treated components: to CSA-080 Series-97 using copper and azole; arsenic
free.
.2
Fire retardant pressure treated components: to CSA-080 Series-97 for maximum flame spread of 25
and labelled by ULC.
.3
Surface cut, bore and trim components to sizes required as much as possible prior to pressure
treatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Erect work plumb, level, square and to required lines. Ensure that materials are rigidly and securely
attached to each other and to adjacent building elements and will not be loosened by work of other
Sections.
.2
Where other materials and components are to be applied directly over wood members recess heads of
fastening devices below wood surfaces.
.3
Where work remains exposed to view, fasteners shall be uniformly and evenly spaced and neatly
installed.
3.2
NAILERS, BLOCKING, COPINGS, GROUNDS, CURBS
.1
Provide wood nailers, blocking, copings, strapping, bucks, grounds and other rough carpentry
components to sizes and in locations required for satisfactory support of fabricated items and other
work.
.2
Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum 38 mm thick materials. Grounds may be 21 mm thick
material unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Provide built-up wood curbs for rooftop mounted equipment. Unless otherwise detailed, provide 90 mm
thick curbs extending minimum 300 mm from top of roof membrane to top of curb.
22/09/2011
KMAI
06100-2
3.3
ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
.1
Provide rough hardware including nails, screws, bolts, washers, brackets, hangers, and fastening
devices of all types.
.2
Unless otherwise indicated, attach wood members at maximum 600 mm o.c. as follows:
.3
3.4
.1
To concrete and solid masonry with expansion or friction type anchor bolts.
.2
To hollow masonry with toggle bolts.
.3
To heavy gauge metal with bolts.
.4
To light gauge metal with screws or bolts.
.5
To wood with nails, screws or bolts as required to ensure stability.
Fasten wood copings to supporting masonry elements with 13 mm galvanized steel bolts minimum
300 mm long spaced maximum 600 mm o.c. Where width of coping plate exceeds 100 mm, stagger
bolts off centre.
BACKBOARDS
.1
Where required by Division 16 and by telephone system supplier, provide minimum 19 mm thick fire
retardant treated plywood backboards mounted on strapping if required.
.2
Size backboards to adequately accommodate equipment to be mounted. Secure boards with
countersunk fasteners to supporting walls in manner which will carry equipment load without damaging
wall.
3.5
PRESSURE TREATED COMPONENTS
.1
Use preservative pressure treated lumber and plywood within exterior wall and roof systems and at
other locations indicated.
.2
Where it is necessary to cut, bore or otherwise alter pressure treated components in the field, treat cut
surfaces with heavy coat of wood preservative.
.3
Use fire retardant pressure treated plywood where plywood is installed on steel stud framed walls,
behind gypsum board and as required for non-combustible construction.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
06100-3
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Rough carpentry:
Section 06100
.2
Cabinetwork:
Section 06300
.3
Architectural Woodwork Restoration
Section 06400
.4
Wood doors:
Section 08210
.5
Wood Window Restoration
Section 08590
.6
Door Hardware
Section 08700
.7
Wood Floor Restoration
Section 09690
.8
Painting:
Section 09900
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Conform to the requirements of the following:
.1
The Code
.2
CAN 3-086, Engineering Design In Wood (Working Stress Design).
.3
The National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules.
.4
Quality Standards For Architectural Woodwork,
Manufacturers of Canada (AWMAC);
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Reference Standards: unless otherwise specified, carry out finish carpentry work in accordance with
requirements of " Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards " (latest issue) of Architectural Woodwork
Manufacturer's Association of Canada (AWMAC).
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Submit two samples of each type of solid wood and plywood used in exposed work scheduled to
receive transparent finish.
1.5
PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE
.1
.2
Protect against damage, including damage by excessive changes in moisture content, during delivery
and storage. Maintain minimum storage temperature of 16°C, and relative humidity 25% to 55%.
.3
Do not deliver finish carpentry components to site before all wet trades are completed, the building is
22/09/2011
KMAI
by the Architectural Woodwork
06200-1
closed in and humidity conditions on site are acceptable. Do not deliver during rain or damp weather.
.4
1.6
Store materials on site in such a way as to prevent deterioration or loss or impairment of essential properties. Prevent moisture gain of kiln dried materials.
PROTECTION
.1
Provide coverings as necessary to protect finish carpentry components from damage of any kind
during storage and after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
.2
.3
.4
Solid Wood:
.1
Unless otherwise indicated, provide AWMAC Custom Grade.
.2
All wood materials shall be new, straight and clean, free of sap, knots, pitch, and other
defects, except as permitted by applicable grading rules.
.3
All wood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 12% for exterior work and 6%
to 8% for interior work.
.4
Hardwood: Species as indicated; White Oak for stair treads and trim as shown. Where no
species is indicated, provide White Birch.
.5
Softwood:
.1
Concealed locations: CAN/CSA-0141-05
.2
Exposed locations: Western Red Cedar, clear heart.
Panel Materials:
.1
Hardwood plywood: to CSA 0115-M1982, Type II; face veneer: AWMAC Architectural Grade
White Birch. Provide Sound Grade where paint finish is required.
.2
Softwood plywood: to CSA 0151-04 Sanded Grade, Solid Two Sides. Use in concealed
locations only.
.3
Particleboard: to ANSI A208.1 density 700 kg/m .
.4
Medium density fibreboard (MDF): to ANSI A208.2, density 769 kg/m3
3
Plastic Laminated Components:
.1
Plastic laminate facing sheet: ANSI/NEMA LD3-2005, Grades HGS and VGS; up to 6
colours, gloss and texture selected by Consultant from full range of products by Formica,
Arborite, Wilsonart, Pionite, Nevamar.
.2
Backing sheet: BKL Grade by manufacturer of facing sheet.
.3
Laminating adhesive: CSA-0112 Series - M1977.
.4
Core sealer: clear, water resistant synthetic resin type.
Fasteners and Adhesives:
.1
Nails and staples: CSA B111-1974, galvanized.
.2
Screws: zinc, cadmium or chrome plated steel.
.3
Adhesive: waterproof type as approved by Consultant.
22/09/2011
KMAI
06200-2
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
General Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.2
.3
.4
Exposed joints and edges:
.1
Uniformly space exposed joints unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Edge grain shall not be visible; mitre external corners, house internal corners.
Secure corners with corrugated metal fasteners. Glue mitred corners.
.3
All exposed edges of plywood and particle board shall have solid wood edging,
pressure glued.
Mechanical fasteners:
.1
Inconspicuously locate mechanical fasteners. Wherever possible conceal
fastenings.
.2
Countersink nail heads.
.3
Unless otherwise indicated, countersink screw and bolt heads and fill holes with
matching wood plugs.
Cutting and fitting: make cutouts in work of this Section as required to accommodate work of
other Sections.
Plastic Laminate Components:
.1
Unless otherwise specified meet requirements of AWMAC “Quality Standards”.
.2
Plastic laminate components shall be of balanced construction with plastic laminate bonded
to both sides of core.
.3
Core shall be minimum 19 mm thick particleboard. Exposed edges shall be covered with 1.5
mm thick plastic laminate unless otherwise shown. Plastic laminate corners shall be
chamfered 20°, not mitred.
.4
At intermediate joints accurately fit adjacent components to produce tight and flush joint;
provide concealed draw bolts and blind splines as required.
.5
Seal core edges not covered with plastic laminate.
Standing & Running Trim:
.1
Fabricate trim and base of softwood where paint finish is designated and of hardwood where
transparent finish is required.
.2
Length: standing trim shall be in one piece. Running trim shall be in longest practicable
lengths.
.3
Thickness: unless otherwise indicated, minimum 13 mm.
Rails, Slats, Caps, Base:
.1
Fabricate components to profiles shown and in longest practicable lengths.
.2
Slightly round exposed edges, sand smooth all surfaces.
.3
Unless otherwise indicated fabricate members of hardwood. Use the same species of wood
throughout, except where specifically indicated otherwise.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
22/09/2011
KMAI
06200-3
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install finish carpentry components plumb, true and level and securely fasten in place. Accurately
scribe and closely fit components to irregularities of adjacent surfaces.
.2
Accurately fit joints in true plane, locate joints over bearing or supporting surfaces.
.3
Provide mechanical fastening devices such as nails, screws and bolts required for fastening wood
components. Unless permitted provide concealed fastening of components.
.4
Where permitted, nail with small headed finishing nails. Countersink nail heads with nail setter.
.5
Where components are fastened with screws or bolts, countersink screw and bolt heads and provide
wood plugs matching surrounding wood.
.6
Install caps, rails, base, casings and trim in longest practicable lengths; accumulation of short pieces
not permitted. No edge grain shall be visible; mitre corners. Slope cut intermediate joints.
.7
Provide interior wood trim where indicated and where required to complete work.
.8
Select components within any area to produce well blended, uniform appearance. Avoid use of
components with starkly contrasting colours. Replace components which in Consultant's opinion are
not of satisfactory appearance.
3.2
FINISHING
.1
3.3
Sand finished wood surfaces thoroughly as required to produce uniformly smooth surface, always
sanding in direction of grain run. Coarse grained sandpaper marks, hammer marks, or other similar
imperfections in finished work are not acceptable.
SCHEDULE
.1
Unless otherwise shown provide finish carpentry component of hardwood, to be finished by Section
09900 with stain and varnish finish.
.2
List of components:
.1
Bench and shelf slats: Maple
.2
Wall Panels and wainscotting
.3
Other finish carpentry components shown.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
06200-4
SECTION 06300 - CABINETWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.2
Rough carpentry:
Section 06100
.3
Finish carpentry:
Section 06200
.4
Wood doors, except as specified herein:
Section 08210
.5
Sinks, faucets:
1.3
DEFINITION
.1
1.4
"Exposed" when referred to in this Section shall mean all parts that can be viewed and shall include
interiors of cupboards, cabinets and counters, backs of doors, shelving, gables, drawers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.5
Reference Standards: unless otherwise specified, carry out finish carpentry work in accordance with
requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" (latest issue) of Architectural Woodwork
Manufacturers' Association of Canada (AWMAC), Custom Grade.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Section 01330: Submission procedures
.2
Submit detailed shop drawings for cabinetwork showing proposed assembly, connections, anchorage,
materials, dimensions, thickness and finishes.
.3
Shop drawings shall be originated and produced by fabricator and may not be copied or reproduced
from Consultant's drawings. Each item shall be shown in plan, section and elevation, detailed in
appropriate scale, clearly displaying all required information. Single line diagrams are not acceptable.
.4
Submit duplicate samples of each type of solid wood and plywood used in exposed work prior to
fabrication of cabinetwork.
.5
Submit samples of each cabinet hardware item required.
1.6
PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
.1
.2
Protect cabinetwork against damage, including damage by excessive changes in moisture content.
o
Maintain minimum storage temperature of 16 C, and relative humidity 25% to 55%.
.3
Cover plastic laminate faces at shop with heavy kraft paper.
.4
Do not deliver finish carpentry components to site before all wet trades are completed, the building is
closed in and humidity conditions on site are acceptable. Do not deliver during rain or damp weather.
.5
From time of fabrication until installation, store handle and transport materials so as to prevent
deterioration or loss or impairment of essential properties. Prevent moisture gain of kiln dried
materials.
1.7
PROTECTION
.1
Provide coverings as necessary to protect finish carpentry components from damage of any kind
22/09/2011
KMAI
Division 15
06300-1
1.8
WARRANTY
.1
1.9
At no cost to Owner remedy any defects in work of this Section due to defects in materials and
workmanship, including but not necessarily limited to delamination, warping, and other defects
detrimental to appearance and/or performance for a period of 2 years from date of Substantial
Performance.
COORDINATION
.1
Coordinate the work of this section with Owner’s equipment, furniture, power, data communications
and security requirements and installation schedules.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
.2
.3
.4
Solid Wood:
.1
.2
.3
All wood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 6% to 8%.
.4
Hardwood: Birch, unless otherwise shown.
.5
Softwood: to CSA 0141-05, dressed all sides used in concealed locations only except where
shown otherwise. Concealed framing: No. 1 Grade White Pine.
Panel Materials:
.1
Hardwood plywood: to CSA 0115-1982, Type II; face veneer: AWMAC Sequence Matched,
Select White Birch.
.2
Softwood plywood: to CSA 0151-04 Sanded Grade, solid two sides; use in concealed
locations only.
.3
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, minimum 700 kg/m³ density.
Plastic Laminated Components:
.1
Plastic laminate facing sheet: ANSI/NEMA LD3-2005, Grades HGS, VGS, and HGP; colours,
gloss and texture will be selected by Consultant from full range of products by Formica,
Arborite, Nevamar, Pionite.
.2
Backing sheet: BKL Grade by manufacturer of facing sheet.
.3
Core: ANSI A208.1, minimum density 700 kg/m .
.4
Laminating adhesive: CSA-0112 Series M1977.
.5
Core sealer: clear water resistant synthetic resin type.
.6
PVC edging: 3 mm thick T-profile solid PVC edging, solid colour and wood grain as required
to match face laminate: Woodtape.
3
Fasteners and Adhesive:
22/09/2011
KMAI
06300-2
.1
.2
Screws: zinc, cadmium or chrome plated steel.
.3
Adhesive: CSA-0112 Series - M1977, waterproof type.
.5
Solid Core Doors: Closet doors: to CSA 0132.2-M1977, flush doors, 35 mm thick, face
veneer/laminate and edge banding matching adjacent cabinetwork.
.6
Cabinet Hardware: Products listed below are a standard of acceptance. Products by other
manufacturers, of equal quality and similar appearance may also be provided subject to review and
approval by Consultant.
2.2
o
.1
Hinges for 19 mm door Blum 91-650, 170 with self-closing spring.
.2
Hinges for 35 mm doors: Hager 1279, 76 x 76.
.3
Door and drawer pull: GSH 302 x 100 mm, CTC 7.5 mm o.d. brushed stainless steel.
.4
Drawer slides: full extension for 45 kg load, by K & V or Accuride.
.5
Drawer locks: Olympus 078 or National Cabinet Lock C8702 or Corbin CCL 02066, keyed as
.6
Cabinet locks: Olympus 078 or National Cabinet Lock C8702 or Corbin CCL 02067, keyed
as directed by Consultant.
.7
Automatic door bolt for double doors: Hafele 245.58.754.
.8
Door locks for 35 mm doors: supplied by Section 08710.
.9
Pilaster and clips: KV 255, 256.
.10
Coat hooks: GSH 307 x 115 mm brushed stainless steel.
.11
Coat rod: GSH 138-2, 32 mm x 2 mm wall thickness chrome plated.
.12
Hardware finish: Unless otherwise indicated chrome or nickel plated.
.13
Cable grommets: plastic countertop fitting for computer / telephone / power cables: 2-part
cable set with spring closure top, 60 mm diameter: by Hafele; colours selected by
Consultant.
.14
Keyboard slides: K & V 8100, length to suit.
FABRICATION
.1
.1
Exposed surfaces:
.1
Provide wood members free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots, shakes
and other defects, except as specifically permitted by grade rules.
.2
Select exposed surfaces in any one area for balanced overall appearance free of
stark contrasts.
.3
Sand smooth all exposed surfaces to provide even and uniform finish free of
defects detrimental to appearance.
22/09/2011
KMAI
06300-3
.2
.3
.4
.2
.3
.1
.2
No edge grain shall be visible; mitre external corners, house internal corners.
Secure corners with corrugated metal fasteners. Glue mitred corners.
.3
All exposed edges of plywood and particle board shall have solid wood edging,
pressure glued, unless required to be covered with plastic laminate, melamine or
PVC edge banding.
.1
fastenings.
.2
.3
Where exposed to view, countersink screw and bolt heads and fill holes with
matching plugs.
Cutting and fitting: make cutouts in work of this Section as required to accommodate work of
other Sections.
Standing and Running Trim:
.1
Fabricate trim of hardwood.
.2
lengths.
.3
Thickness: unless otherwise indicated, minimum 12 mm.
Plastic Laminate Components:
.1
Unless otherwise specified herein meet requirements of AWMAC “Quality Standards”.
.2
Assembly: bond plastic laminate to core with adhesive using pressure.
.3
Core: 19 mm thick veneer core plywood, or 25 mm thick particleboard. At counters with
sinks use veneer core plywood only.
.4
Balanced construction: plastic laminate covered components shall be of balanced
construction, with plastic laminate on both faces of core. Seal core edges not covered with
plastic laminate.
.5
Unless otherwise shown provide PVC edging at all exposed edges.
.6
Use largest practicable plastic laminate sheet size.
.7
Provide joints symmetrically; provide joints at corners and at changes in superficial areas;
provide concealed draw bolt anchors at joints. All butt joints shall have a blind spline.
.8
Construct countertops with preformed front edge and square corner splashback. Chamfer
o
edges uniformly at approximately 20 ; do not mitre.
.9
At L-shaped corners mitre plastic laminate to outside corner. Accurately fit members together
to provide tight and flush butt joint.
.10
Apply self-edged minimum 1.5 mm thick plastic laminate to exposed ends of countertops.
.11
Construct splashbacks minimum 100 mm high or higher where indicated. Return splashback
at ends except where indicated otherwise.
22/09/2011
KMAI
06300-4
.12
Openings and cutouts:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Cabinetwork:
.1
As far as practicable, assemble work in shop and deliver to site ready for installation. Leave
ample allowance for fitting and scribing in place.
.2
Except where otherwise detailed use "flush overlaid" construction. Where cabinet door
height exceeds 1200 mm use "exposed case" construction. Tenon, dado, dowel or rabbet
interior construction with all parts well glued along full length/height. Use glue blocks where
necessary. Shoulder mitre all exposed corners. Open ends or skeleton frames against walls
are not permitted.
.3
Construct cabinetwork, counters and cupboards from plastic laminate faced board, unless
otherwise shown.
.4
Design and fabricate work to accommodate expansion and contraction of components. All
connectors and fasteners shall be concealed unless permitted by Consultant to be exposed.
Fabricate work to produce tight joints. Locate prominent joints where directed. Prevent
opening up of joints and glue lines in finished work.
.5
Unless otherwise indicated provide the following thicknesses:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Doors: 19 mm
Drawer fronts: 19 mm
Gables: 19 mm
Cabinet backs (floor supported): 12 mm
Cabinet backs (wall hung): 19 mm
Shelves: 19 mm
Drawer bodies: 12 mm
Closets and storage cabinet doors: 35 mm
.6
Where shown provide solid core wood doors, 35 mm thick, with solid wood face frame, faced
to match adjacent surfaces.
.7
Rout gables for pilaster strips where adjustable shelving is required.
.8
Provide running members in maximum length obtainable. Provide thickness of members in
maximum dressed size of standard lumber. Where width or thickness indicated is not
available, use glue laminations to obtain sizes required.
.9
Install cabinet hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's directions. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide each drawer and door with pull, each drawer with extension
hardware and each door with minimum two hinges, (2 hinges for door height up to 1000
mm, 3 hinges for door height up to 1500 mm and 4 hinges for doors in excess of 1500 mm
height). Provide additional hinges where recommended by hinge manufacturer based on
door weight and size. Provide locks at all doors and drawers unless otherwise shown.
.10
Except where plastic laminate finish is required factory finish all cabinetwork, with a
polymerizing two component catalytic conversion varnish system; sheen to be selected by
Consultant. All surfaces shall be carefully prepared and sanded before and between coats to
provide final finish which shall be smooth, even and uniform free of machine marks, hammer
marks, depressions and imperfections.
.11
Apply moisture repellent sealer to concealed backs of cabinetwork.
22/09/2011
KMAI
Radius internal corners at least 3 mm and chamfer edges.
Where core edge is to remain exposed, cover with plastic laminate edging.
Where core edge is to be concealed, seal with sealer.
06300-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install cabinetwork components plumb, true and level and securely fasten in place. Accurately scribe
and closely fit components to irregularities of adjacent surfaces.
.2
.3
components. Unless permitted provide concealed fastening of components.
.4
.5
Install plastic laminate components using concealed fastening devices.
.6
.7
Where cabinetwork abuts other building elements provide wood trim matching cabinetwork except
where otherwise detailed.
.8
Prepare work of this Section to receive services, fittings and fixtures provided by Division 15 and 16.
.9
Provide grommets where shown and at all locations where power / data / telephone outlets are located
below counters / worktables.
.10
Where access is required to valves and other mechanical and electrical components, located behind
cabinetwork, provide removable plywood access panels of size required and secure with four brass
screws.
.11
Install display case liner in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Bond to substrates with
adhesive free of bubbles and tears, with joints neat and tight and with exposed surfaces free of
adhesive and stains.
.12
Check operation of all movable parts and, if necessary, adjust to ensure proper and smooth function.
.13
Upon completion of installation, inspect work of this Section and touch up, where required, minor or
damaged surface finish to restore it to original condition. Replace damaged components which, in the
opinion of the Consultant, cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
06300-6
SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Selected Demolition:
Section 02200
.2
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100
.3
Finished Carpentry
Section 06200
.4
Sealants
Section 07900
.5
Wood Doors
Section 08200
.6
Wood Window Restoration
Section 08590
.7
Painting:
Section 09900
.8
Cutting in Mechanical components in existing woodwork
Division 15
.9
Cutting in Electrical components in existing woodwork
Division 16
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
Work in this Section includes the restoration/ replacement of all interior wood work components as
described herein and in the drawings.
.2
Work in the Section includes the shoring, column repair, and capital replacement for the portico
capitals and pilasters listed as Separate Price 4.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Reference Standards: unless otherwise specified, carry out Architectural Woodwork Restoration work
in accordance with requirements of " Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards " (latest issue) of
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer's Association of Canada (AWMAC).
.2
Ensure that work is executed under the continuous supervision and direction of a competent
supervisor with minimum of 10 years experience in heritage woodwork restoration.
.3
Employ trades personnel with minimum 5 years experience in heritage woodwork restoration.
.4
Provide written credentials of trades and supervising personnel for Consultant review.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Submit two samples of each type of solid wood and plywood used in restoration work.
.3
Submit samples of architectural component replacement components as follows:
.1
Existing wall panelling and dado rails
.2
Bar in basement – sections as agreed with Consultant
.3
Handrails, pickets etc to existing stair – as agreed with Consultant
22/09/2011
KMAI
06400-1
.4
Submit samples of fasteners to be used.
.5
Submit spec and data sheets for strippers, sealers, wood consolidators and adhesives to be used.
.6
Submit shop drawing diagrams showing shoring strategy for supporting Portico during column
repair/capital replacement. Shall bear stamp and signature of a professional engineer registered in
Ontario complete with loading calculations.
1.6
MOCKUPS
.1
1.7
Provide for 10 in situ component repair mock-ups including but not limited to the following:
.1
Dado rail to walls – 2 locations
.2
Wall trim and Baseboard – 2 locations
.3
Wood panelling - 1 location
.4
Stair tread replacement sections – 1 location
.5
Stair picket replacement – 1 location
.6
Paint stripping and wood consolidation. – 3 locations
PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE
.1
.2
Protect against damage, including damage by excessive changes in moisture content, during delivery
and storage. Maintain minimum storage temperature of 16°C, and relative humidity 25% to 55%.
.3
Do not deliver finish woodwork components to site before all wet trades are completed.. Do not deliver
during rain or damp weather.
.4
Store materials on site in such a way as to prevent deterioration or loss or impairment of essential properties. Prevent moisture gain of kiln dried materials.
1.8
PROTECTION
.1
Provide coverings as necessary to protect finish woodwork components from damage of any kind
.2
Provide protection to contain paint debris during removals
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Solid Wood:
.1
.2
.3
All wood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 12% for exterior work and 6%
to 8% for interior work.
.4
Hardwood: Species to match existing assumed to be white Oak and Maple.
.5
Softwood: Species to match existing assumed to be white and red pine, and Douglas Fir.
22/09/2011
KMAI
06400-2
.2
.3
.4
Fasteners and Adhesives:
.1
.2
Screws: stainless steel.
.3
Adhesive: waterproof type urethane or resorcinol type as approved by Consultant.
Strippers, Consolidants and Sealers and Preservative
.1
Paint stripping agent: Peel Away 1 with proprietary paper backing and Peel Away ‘Smart
Strip’. Stripping can also be performed with heat gun and scapers.
.2
Wood Consoildation Agent: Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100 by ConServ Epoxy LLC
.3
Sealers: Penetrating Sealer by Sansin
.4
Preservatives: Sansin Boracol
Composite Architectural Decorative Components
.1
.2
2.2
Cast glass reinforced polymer resin for exterior components such as column capitals
Cast glass reinforced gypsum plaster for interior components such as replacement crown
moulding, bracketing or frieze band dentals.
FABRICATION
.1
.1
.2
.3
.2
.3
.1
.2
Edge grain shall not be visible; mitre external corners, house internal corners.
Secure corners with metal fasteners. Glue mitred corners.
.1
fastenings.
.2
.3
Unless otherwise indicated, countersink screw and bolt heads and fill holes with
matching wood plugs.
Cutting and fitting: make cut-outs in work of this Section as required to accommodate work of
other Sections.
Standing & Running Trim:
.1
Fabricate all trim in wood species and grain direction to match existing.
.2
lengths.
.3
Dimensions and Profiles: match existing
Carved decorative wood components:
.1
Where possible make latex moulded copies of matching sculpted components for casting
and use casting as model for reproducing sculpted wood replacement components.
.2
For repairing sculpted wood components, maintain as much of the original component as
22/09/2011
KMAI
06400-3
possible. Cut away damaged material and install oversized duchman blank. Carve Insitu to
match up to original form.
.4
Cast replacement of composite components.
.1
Where possible make latex moulded copies of matching sculpted components for casting
and use casting as model for reproducing cast replacement components.
.2
For full replacement of components ie: column capitals and pier capitals, stock composite
components may be used provided they closely replicate the originals and are the same
overall size. Proposed stock components to be approved by consultant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
Review required paint stripping with Consultant. After stripping and sanding prep complete review with
Consultant extent of repairs and replacement .
PAINT STRIPPING AND REMOVALS
.1
Assume all clear finished woodwork to be stripped and refinished.
.2
Assume 50% of painted wood work trim will require stripping down to bare wood or sound primer layer
before repainting. All painted woodwork to be sanded prepared to receive new paint
.2
Cut back and remove all rotted, deteriorated or damaged wood components. Refasten sound wood
components. Reset existing nails and fasteners below wood surface. Sand existing surfaces smooth.
.3
Apply sealer as directed by Consultant.
.4
Apply consolidant to components determined to be salvageable.
.5
Conform to Section 01350 Special Project Requirements item 6 Designated Substances in regards to
the safe removal, collection and disposal of lead based existing paint.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS
.1
Assume 25% possible replacement of all wood trim components throughout the project after stripping.
.2
Install finish carpentry components plumb, true and level and securely fasten in place. Accurately
scribe and closely fit components to irregularities of adjacent surfaces.
.3
.4
components. Provide concealed fastening of components.
.5
.6
.7
Install caps, rails, base, casings and trim in longest practicable lengths; accumulation of short pieces
not permitted. No edge grain shall be visible; mitre corners. Slope cut intermediate joints.
.8
Install components within any area to produce well blended, uniform appearance. Where possible
replace component back to existing joint or mitre. Redo any repair components which in Consultant's
opinion are not of satisfactory appearance.
22/09/2011
KMAI
06400-4
.9
3.4
For column repair/capital replacement
FAIRING, SANDING AND FILLS
.1
Sand finished wood surfaces thoroughly as required to produce uniformly smooth surface, always
sanding in direction of grain run. Coarse grained sandpaper marks, hammer marks, or other similar
imperfections in finished work are not acceptable. Fair surfaces between existing and replacement
components to level.
.2
Fill small holes and depressions in surfaces with wood epoxy filler and sand smooth once cured. Fill
gaps in joints in existing and new trim components with flexible exterior grade latex sealant. Do not
smear sealant on face areas.
3.5
SEALING AND PAINTING
.1
Back seal all concealed surfaces. Prime and paint exposed surfaces as per Section 09900
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
06400-5
SECTION 07160 - CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Cast-in-place concrete:
Section 03300
.2
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100
.3
Thermal Insulation
Section 07200
.4
Gypsum Board
Scetion 09250
.5
Waterproof flooring:
Section 09675
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Installer's qualifications: licensed or approved by material manufacturer.
.2
Workmanship standard: execute work in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions.
1.4
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
.2
Deliver materials to site in original containers with seals and labels intact.
.3
Store material in dry place, protected from moisture.
1.5
WARRANTY
.1
At no cost to Owner, remedy any defects in work, including work of this and other Sections, due to
faults in materials or workmanship provided under this Section appearing within a period of 2 years
from date of Substantial Performance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Waterproofing system: One of the following:
.1
Capillary Concrete Waterproofing by Permaquick (Canada) Ltd., Super 200.
.2
Xypex Concrete Waterproofing by Xypex Chemicals (Canada) Ltd.
.2
Cem-Cote CW Plus by W.R. Meadows.
.3
Mortar cove and plug: One of the following:
.4
.1
Permaquick Mortar 300.
.2
Xypex Drypack.
.3
Meadow-Crete OV by W.R. Meadows.
Water: CAN/CSA-A23.1-04 clean, mineral free, potable
22/09/2011
WESPEC/JG
07160-1
SECTION 07160 - CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING
2.2
.1
MIXING
Use separate containers for measuring quantities of waterproofing materials and water.
.2
Water temperature shall be minimum 15ºC.
.3
Mix only enough material that can be applied before mixture starts to thicken, stir frequently but do not
add more water to restore workability.
.4
Mix materials to proportions recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS
.1
Surfaces shall be clean and free of oil, grease, paint, loose dust and laitance.
.2
Surfaces and ambient temperature shall be minimum 5 C for a period of 24 hours before the
ation, during and after the installation.
3.2
o
install-
PREPARATION
.1
Slabs: except where waterproofing is applied dry and floated into concrete, to produce acceptable
substrate, sandblast surfaces or etch with muriatic acid; fill cracks and defective areas with mortar.
.2
Smooth surfaces: roughen by sandblasting or other approved method.
.3
Existing concrete foundations: sand or shot blast surfaces completely removing all substances which
could inhibit proper bonding of waterproofing.
.4
Defective surfaces: remove defective concrete to a depth where sound concrete is found; fill tie holes,
reglets, honeycombed areas and routed out cracks with mortar.
.5
All surfaces: wash thoroughly with water and let dry to a damp condition.
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Provide cementitious waterproofing at inside of existing foundations walls, areaways, at elevator pit,
sump pits and other locations shown.
.2
Install mortar cove at junction of walls to slabs.
.3
At slabs and toppings broadcast waterproofing material dry at time of initial set of concrete and float
thoroughly into concrete or apply by slurry coat method.
.4
Apply waterproofing material to walls with brush, broom or suitable spray equipment. Where two coat
application is required, apply second coat while first coat is still green.
.5
Fill reglets at construction joints, and other locations shown on Drawings, with mortar.
.6
Give surfaces a smooth, dense and uniform finish.
3.4
CURING
.1
Moist cure waterproofed surfaces for at least two days. Do not cover for at least 15 days after
application of waterproofing.
.2
Allow for air circulation in enclosed areas.
END
22/09/2011
WESPEC/JG
07160-2
SECTION 07200 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
New Masonry
Section 04060
.2
Thermal insulation:
Section 07200
.3
Air Vapour Barriers:
Section 07270
.4
Membrane Roofing:
Section 07500
.5
Flashing and Sheet Metal:
Section 07620
.6
Sealants:
Section 07920
.7
Section 08110
.8
Miscellaneous Glazing:
Section 08810
.9
Glazed Curtain Wall:
Section 08900
.10
Louvers and Vents;
Section 10200
.11
Duct and pipe insulation:
1.3
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
.2
Deliver insulation to site in sealed wrappings bearing manufacturer's name, product name and RSI or
KSI value.
.3
Store materials in a dry area protected from the elements.
1.4
PROTECTION
.1
Temporarily protect installed insulation from damage and action of the elements until it is permanently
concealed or protected.
.2
Protect polystyrene insulation from sunlight.
1.5
MOCK-UP
.1
Provide mock-up of air barrier materials under the provisions of Section 01450
.2
Construct typical exterior wall panel, as indicated on the drawings incorporating curtain wall, frames
and sills, mechanical sleeves, insulation, at building corner condition and junction with foundation
waterproofing; illustrating insulation interface with other components.
.3
Mock-up may remain as of the Work.
22/09/2011
KMAI
Division 15
07200-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION
.1
Type 1: extruded, expanded polystyrene with shiplapped edges: CAN/ULC-S701-05: Styrofoam SM
by Dow, or Celfort 200 by Owens Corning
.2
Type 2: extruded polystyrene: CAN/ULC-S701-05: Cavity mate by Dow or Celfort 200 by Owens
Corning; 75 mm thick, unless otherwise shown.
.3
Type 3: foamed in place urethane: two-component polyurethane to CAN/ULC-S711.1-05; froth/spray
kit, ULC Class 1 (flame spread 25 or less): Froth-Pak by Insta-Foam Products, Inc., Enerfoam by
Abisko, or Zerodraft Air Barrier Sealant by Building Resource Inc.
.4
Type 4: rigid fibrous insulation, glass fibre or mineral wool board: CAN/ULC-S702-97; density of 48
kg/m³; minimum RSI of 0.73 per 25 mm thickness: Type 703 by Owens Corning or OFI 48 by Ottawa
Fibre Inc. or RXL 40 by Roxul Inc.
.5
Type 5: mineral fibre, batt or roll type: CAN/ULC-S702-97.
.6
Type 6: polyurethane spray foam insulation, 2 lb closed cell, medium density foam. Walltite Eco
CCMC - 13408-L - Insulation / air barrier material CCMC - 13467-R - Air barrier system. 38mm
thickness.
2.2
FASTENERS, ADHESIVES
.1
Adhesive for polystyrene insulation: Bakor 230-21 to CGSB 71-GP-24M; adhesive for securement of
insulation to waterproofing / dampproofing membrane shall be compatible with such membranes.
.2
Impaling clips: zinc coated Stic-Klip with perforated base and cadmium plated speed washer by Eckel
Industries of Canada Ltd., or Insul-Anchors "Spindle" by Continental Studwelding Ltd.; adhesive and
mechanical fasteners as recommended by clip manufacturer.
.3
Z Bars for board insulation to receive finish surface: Depth to suit insulation, Z275 Galvanized.
.4
Cavity insulation securement: supplied by Section 04200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances.
.2
Clean substrates as required. Remove surface ridges at concrete walls and mortar protrusions at
masonry walls.
3.2
INSTALLATION GENERAL
.1
Provide under this Section all thermal insulation required except where it is specified to be part of
another Section.
.2
Provide continuous uniform thermal insulation over insulated areas. Use largest practicable insulation
board size, to minimize number of joints. Maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements
and spaces.
.3
Use only insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges.
.4
Where insulation is interrupted by construction elements, neatly fit insulation around such elements
and pack spaces around elements with same insulation. Fit insulation tight around electrical boxes,
plumbing and heating pipes and ducts, around exterior doors and windows and other protrusions
22/09/2011
KMAI
07200-2
.5
Moderately butt insulation boards against each other so that there are no gaps.
.6
Stagger joints at multiple layer installations.
.7
Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by Consultant.
.8
Keep insulation minimum 75mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, and
minimum 50mm from sidewalls of CAN4-S604 type A chimneys and CAN1-B149.1 and CAN1-B149.2
type B and L vents.
3.3
TYPE 1 INSULATION
.1
Provide perimeter insulation at inside, outside or within foundation walls, as indicated, to minimum
600 mm below finished grade or lower where shown. Unless otherwise indicated provide 75 mm thick
insulation bonded to substrate with spot adhesive application.
.2
Provide rigid board insulation below slabs on grade where indicated. Place insulation board on
prepared, level subgrade, with joints tightly butted. Unless noted, use 100 mm thick insulation.
.3
Provide rigid board insulation at exterior wall parapets (min. 75mm thick) and where shown. Secure
insulation with impale clips or other method acceptable to Consultant.
3.4
TYPE 2 INSULATION
.1
Place insulation (min. 75mm unless shown otherwise) against air barrier, tightly fitted at joints, at
perimeter of insulated areas, around furring and at other penetrations; leave no gaps or voids.
.2
Place cavity wall insulation over air seal membrane on concrete block, plywood or gypsum board:
embedded in Bakor 230-21 adhesive and impaled on insulation clips bedded in adhesive to structural
substrate or attached with insulation wedges and adhesive at horizontal block reinforcing.
.2
Butter all edges of insulation board with adhesive.
.4
Insulation shall fit tightly between and around wall ties. All butt joints shall be brought into tight contact
to ensure a monolithic thermal barrier. Any cutting or fabricating shall be made of the largest module
possible of insulation, to reduce the number of joints.
.
3.5
TYPE 3 INSULATION
.1
Apply insulation with suitable equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
.2
Fill designated spaces completely, leaving no voids or gaps; trim excess material.
3.6
TYPE 4 INSULATION
.1
3.7
Secure insulation board to supporting work with adhesive bonded and mechanically fastened impale
clips spaced at maximum 500 mm in each direction, unless otherwise indicated.
TYPE 5 INSULATION
.1
3.8
Completely fill spaces with insulation, leaving no gaps or voids. Do not pack insulation tighter than
manufactured density of materials.
TYPE 6 INSULATION
.1
Regular grade system must be applied between +5ºC to +40ºC (41ºF to 104ºF). Cold temperature
grade system must be applied between -10ºC to +5ºC (14ºF to 41ºF). Spraying at lower temperatures
may result in poor adhesion between the foam and the substrate. (PC012)
.2
Resin and catalyst must be stored on pallets in a dry location, away from sunlight and
other sources of direct heat.
22/09/2011
KMAI
07200-3
3.9
SCHEDULE
.1
Unless otherwise indicated provide the following:
.1
Type 1 insulation: building foundations, in contact with soil (perimeter insulation); below
slabs on grade where shown (exterior foundation walls and underslab).
.2
Type 2 insulation: furred and cavity walls.
.3
Type 3 insulation: perimeter of exterior window and door frames.
.4
Type 4 insulation: expansion joint spaces where shown.
.5
Type 5 insulation: ceiling spaces below mechanical rooms where shown.
.6
Type 6 insulation: furred out walls on interior and where shown.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
07200-4
SECTION 07270 - AIR VAPOUR BARRIER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
New Masonry:
Section 04200
.2
Cementitious Waterproofing
Section 07110
.3
Thermal insulation:
Section 07200
.4
Modified bitumen membrane roofing:
Section 07550
.5
Flashing and Sheet Metal
Section 07620
.6
Sealants
Section 07920
.7
Section 08110
.8
Miscellaneous Glazing
Section 08810
.9
Glazed Curtain Wall
Section 08910
.10
Gypsum sheathing:
Section 09250
.11
Painting
Section 09900
.12
Metal Louvers
Section 10200
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
ANSI A58.1 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
.2
ASTM A123 – Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
.3
ASTM C920 – Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
.4
ASTM E283 – Test Metho0d for Rate Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors.
.5
ASTM E330 – Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors
by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
.6
SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) – Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
1.4
DEFINITION
.1
1.5
Air Barrier: A continuous network of materials and joints providing air tightness, with adequate strength
and stiffness to not defect excessively under air pressure differences, to which it will be subjected in
service. It can be comprised of a single material or a combination of materials to achieve the
performance requirements.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Perform design work in accordance with ANSI A58 1..
PROJECT NO. 09-100 –Phase 2
22/09/2011
WESPEC
07270-1
1.6
QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Owner may appoint and pay for inspection and testing of work provided under this Section, by
independent inspection agency, as directed by Consultant. Comply with requirements of Section
01450.
.2
Provide continuity of air seal materials and assemblies in conjunction with materials described in
Sections above (refer to 1.2).
.3
Coordinate the work of this section with all sections referencing this section (refer 01310).
1.7
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Submit prior to ordering materials proposal in writing, indicating which membrane system is to be
used. Include manufacturer's documentation verifying suitability of application for expected application
conditions.
.3
Shop drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions.
.4
Product data: Provide data on material characteristics, performance criteria and limitations.
.5
Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation, installation requirements and techniques,
product storage and handling criteria.
1.8
MOCK-UP
.1
Provide mock-up of air barrier system, which is comprised of a variety of materials.
.2
Construct typical new exterior wall section, 600mm long by 600mm wide, incorporating curtain wall
frame, insulation, building corner condition and junction with roof membrane air seal illustrating
materials interface and seals.
.3
Refer to Section 01450 for testing and verification requirements.
.4
Mock-up of air barrier may not remain as part of work.
1.9
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Handle and store membrane materials to prevent tearing, puncturing and other damage.
.3
Store roll goods in upright position and protected from the weather.
1.10
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
1.11
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section (with minimum five years
experience) to be approved by materials’ manufacturer.
JOB CONDITIONS
.1
Apply membrane during dry weather and to dry substrates only. Maintain temperature and humidity
recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation.
.2
Apply materials only within acceptable application temperature range determined by manufacturer.
Select a membrane system which is best suited for the expected application conditions. Use the same
22/09/2011
WESPEC
07270-2
system throughout entire project.
1.12
WARRANTY
.1
Section 01770: Provide two year warranty.
.2
Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealant and sheet materials which fail to achieve air tight seal,
exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sheet membrane: modified bitumen membrane, 450 mm wide, self-adhesive type; one of the
following products:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
Blueskin SA by Bakor.
Perm-A-Barrier by W.R.Grace.
Sopraseal Stick 1100 by Soprema.
PQ 7190 A/VR by Permaquick.
Sealtight Airshield by W.R. Meadows
Exo Air 110 by Tremco
Fluid applied membrane:
.1
Membrane: water based, cold applied, elastomeric membrane: ExoAir 120 by Tremco or
AirShield LM by W.R. Meadows.
.2
Transition membrane: ExoAir by Tremco, or AirShield by W.R. Meadows.
.3
Roof transition membrane: modified bitumen membrane, 2 mm thick, to CGSB 37-GP-56M Type 2
Class C Grade 1, self adhesive lower surface, sanded upper surface G100 Tack Sheet by Bakor or
equivalent product by other manufacturers listed.
.4
Primer: as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
.5
6 mil Poly ethylene Vapour retarder with 3M sealing tape.
.6
Prefabricated 8 mil poly ethylene vapour barrier boots for electrical boxes and fixtures
.7
Spun woven poly propylene building wrap air/moisture barrier; Tyvek or equal.
.8
Adhesives, mastics, joint backing, tape sealer, accessories, attachments (galvanized steel bars and
anchors): as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
.9
Metal backing: cold rolled sheet steel, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A653, zinc coating designation
Z275; unless otherwise shown, 0.9 mm thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Section 01700: Examine substrates to ensure conditions are satisfactory to receive work of this
Section.
.2
Start of work shall imply acceptance of conditions and verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to
accept the Work of this section.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
07270-3
.3
3.2
Substrates shall be sound, reasonably smooth, dry, clean, free of frost, grease, oil and other
substances which would adversely affect membrane adhesion.
PREPARATION
.1
Clean substrates as required, remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of
materials.
.2
Remove sharp projections and repair defective areas in substrate.
.3
Prime substrates if recommended by membrane manufacturer.
.4
At open joints in substrate, exceeding 3 mm width, and at other locations shown, provide metal
backing for air barrier membrane, securely fastened each side of joint.
3.3
MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
.1
Install all membrane systems in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
.3
Completely cover substrates. Start at low point and proceed up the wall, overlapping subsequent
sheets minimum 50 mm in the direction of water flow. Lap end joints minimum 100 mm.
.4
At penetrations through sheet type membrane, accurately cut and fit membrane around penetrating
component.
.5
At wall openings return membrane into rough openings. Install membrane to ensure that corners of
openings are sealed.
3.4
SELF-ADHESIVE SHEET MEMBRANE
.1
Apply primer with roller, brush or spray equipment. Do not apply more primer than that which can be
covered, on the same working day, with air barrier membrane. Recoat primed areas which are not
covered with membrane the same day.
.2
Position membrane for alignment, with protective film in place. Roll membrane back, remove film and
press membrane in place.
.3
No fishmouths are acceptable. Cut and apply a patch extending 100 mm in all directions from the
edge of the deficiency. Apply sealant to the perimeter of the patch.
.4
Any top edges bucking water must have an additional 150 mm wide strip of membrane applied to seal
this edge.
.5
Apply sealant to the top edge of the membrane before leaving the site. No top edge is to be left
unsealed at the end of each day.
.6
Roll completed membrane, including seams, with suitable roller, to ensure full contact with substrate.
.7
Seal around masonry ties and other penetrations with adhesive/mastic. Apply sealant within
recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied
within these temperature ranges.
3.5
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE
.1
Fluid applied membrane may be used in lieu of self adhesive sheet membrane.
.2
Prepare substances and apply membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s current directions.
.3
Prior to application of membrane install transitional through-wall flashing membranes.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
07270-4
.4
Provide transition membrane at control joints, at all wall penetrations and openings, and at junctions
with other building elements and at open joints in substrate. Ensure that membrane is fully secured to
substrate. Do not allow applied membrane to deteriorate by leaving it exposed to weather.
.5
Spray apply membrane as a continuous coating of minimum 1.5 mm wet film thickness, using multiple
overlapping passes in a pattern ensuring even coverage.
.6
Seal around masonry ties and other penetrations and spray minimum 75 mm onto transition and
through-wall flashing membrane.
.7
Arrange for manufacturer’s inspection reports to certify that products have been correctly applied.
3.6
ROOF TRANSITION MEMBRANE
.1
At junction of exterior wall and roof install transition membrane to top and inside surfaces of parapet.
.2
Prime substrates as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
.3
Roll out transition membrane and allow to relax prior to application. Cut membrane to width and length
to fit application. Remove release paper in 2 stages and place membrane on prepared substrate.
Apply pressure to ensure proper contact. Provide 75 mm side laps and 150 mm end laps.
3.7
POLY VAPOUR BARRIER AND BUILDING WRAP
.1
Install in largest possible sheets minimizing joints. Staple anchor with galvanized or stainless steel
staples.
.2
Tape seal at all joints, fasteners and penetrations.
.2
Ship lap horizontal joints in building wrap, to shed water.
3.8
.1
Ensure continuity of all membranes.
.2
Arrange for review of all membranes by the Consultant prior to covering. Covered membranes that
have not been inspected will be uncovered for inspection then recovered at the Contractor’s expense.
.3
Prior to allowing membrane to be covered with other work, request Consultant's inspection and
acceptance.
3.9
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
.1
Section 01500: Protect finished Work.
.2
Do not permit adjacent work to damage work of this section.
END
22/09/2011
WESPEC
07270-5
SECTION 07550 - MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Selective Demolition:
Section 02200
.2
Rough carpentry:
Section 06100
.3
Metal flashings:
Section 07620
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
Roof System (from top to bottom):
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.4
2 ply modified bitumen membrane
Insulation overlay
Roof insulation (sloping insulation where shown)
Vapour retarder
Roof deck (Div. 6)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Applicators Qualifications: Member in good standing of the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association
(CRCA) or with minimum 10 years of experience and proven record of good quality work and/or
approved by the Consultant. Applicator must be approved by membrane manufacturer and must have
minimum 5 years experience in installation of modified bitumen membrane materials.
.2
Reference Standards: Where work required is not specified or shown in detail meet applicable
requirements of membrane manufacturer.
.3
Modified bitumen membrane: comply with requirements of CGSB 37-GP-56M.
.4
Installation: Comply with membrane manufacturer's current printed installation instructions.
.5
Obtain all materials from single manufacturer.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
.1
Submit in writing prior to ordering of materials detailed description of proposed roofing system,
including detailed and complete product data for each material required.
.2
System proposed must be based on products specified herein.
.3
Submit full range of roofing membrane top sheet granular finish for selection of colour.
.4
Submit samples of insulation fasteners.
.5
Submit shop drawings in accordance with G.C. 5 of General Conditions of Contract showing method of
installation and layout of each layer, fastening and flashings at edges, flashing of protrusions and
penetrations, connection to air barrier in wall, details of insulation, tapered insulation layouts and
vapour barrier and securement details of sheathing.
1.6
INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AND TESTING
.1
Comply with requirements of Section 01450.
22/09/2011
KMAI
07550-1
1.7
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Transport rolls of material vertically, tied in bundles to prevent edge deterioration.
.3
Deliver and store materials until incorporation into work in original wrappings, bearing manufacturers
and product names and relevant standards.
.4
Store materials on raised platforms in approved manner at site preceding application, and protect from
inclement weather at all times. Materials which have become wet shall not be used.
1.8
JOB CONDITIONS
.1
.2
Protection:
.1
Protect existing work and work of other Sections from damage. Cover vertical surfaces with
tarpaulins or other protective devices at hoisting locations. Make good any damage caused.
.2
Follow material manufacturer's recommendations when using propane torch. Maintain at all
times 20 lbs dry chemical fire extinguisher fully charged and in operable condition at location
where open flames are in use.
.3
Arrange for continuous fire watch, for at least 2 hours after each work period when propane
torch was used. Check installation for hot spots, particularly at flashings and penetrations.
.4
Prevent intrusion of moisture into roof system during installation.
.5
Protect completed portions of roofing from damage due to traffic and materials handling until
completion of work.
Environmental Conditions:
.1
Do not apply roofing materials during precipitation or over damp or otherwise unsuitable
surfaces.
.2
Apply materials only when air temperature is within limits specified by manufacturer.
.3
Cold weather work: If ambient temperature during installation of membranes is below 5 C,
comply with the following requirements:
0
.1
.2
.3
1.9
WARRANTY
.1
faults in materials or workmanship provided under this Section of Specifications appearing within a
period of 2 years from date of Substantial Performance. CRCA Standard Form of Guarantee is not
acceptable.
22/09/2011
KMAI
Store rolls in a warm and dry location until immediately prior to use.
Provide movable wind breaks or shelter as required to maintain acceptable working
temperature at roof level.
Follow membrane manufacturer's recommendations.
07550-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Standard of acceptance: products listed by Soprema shall serve to establish a standard of
acceptance. Equivalent products by Bakor, GAF, Johns-Manville, Siplast will also be acceptable. Use
materials from single manufacturer to extent available.
.2
Primer: as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
.3
Vapour retarder: Self adhering SBS modified bitumen sheet: SopravapR by Soprema.
.4
Insulation fasteners: Insulfixx by Fabco, Roofgrip by Buildex or equivalent product by other
manufacturer approved by Consultant. Length of fastener to ensure 1” penetration into wood deck
(not including sheathing).
.5
Insulation overlay: ¼” thick Sopraboard by Soprema.
.6
Sloping insulation: CSA A247-M1978, Type 1, tapered fibreboard, mineral fibreboard or fibreglass
insulation, by AccuPlane or Posislope or J-Tech or other fabricator acceptable to Consultant. Provide
slopes indicated on the drawings with a minimum of 2% slope, taper cut on computer controlled
machine and sequence packed with detailed installation instruction. Thickness shall not be less than
13 mm (1/2").
.7
Membrane base sheet: Sopralene Flam 180 by Soprema.
.8
Flashing base sheet: Sopraflash Flam Stick by Soprema.
.9
Flashing and Roof Membrane Cap Sheet; colour selected by Consultant; Sopralene Flam 250 Gr by
Soprema.
.10
Asphalt: CSA A123.4-04 type 3.
.11
Fastening bars: cold rolled galvanized sheet steel, 2 mm thick ASTM A653 coating designation Z275
commercial, with slotted holes at 1” o.c.
.12
Concrete Pavers: 600 mm x 600 mm x 50 mm reinforced paver complete with poly propylene leveling
pads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Examine materials over which work of this Section is applied and ensure that substrates are free of
snow, ice, loose or adhering materials which would impair this work.
.2
Substrate shall be clean, dry and suitable for roofing application.
.3
Start work of this Section shall indicate acceptance of substrate conditions.
.4
Prime substrates in contact with roofing membrane and membrane flashings. Allow primer to dry
before applying covering work. Tape joints in wood decking prior to application of primer.
VAPOUR RETARDER
22/09/2011
KMAI
07550-3
.1
Over roof deck apply vapour retarder in accordance with manufacturer’ directions.
.2
At penetrations and terminations extend vapour retarder up and connect to wall air barrier; coordinate
with Section 07270.
3.3
INSULATION
.1
Provide sloped insulation as per drawings . Lap insulation layers with no gaps. Over insulation place
overlay with minimum 5 fasteners per 4’ x 5’ board and minimum 8 fasteners per 4’ x 8’ board, 50%
more fasteners along roof perimeter and 70% more fasteners at roof corners.
.2
Fasten overlay and insulation to roof deck.
3.4
ROOF MEMBRANE AND FLASHINGS
.1
Apply base sheet to insulation with torch starting at bottom of slope, with half a sheet width. Run sheet
perpendicularly to roof slope. Install base sheet in accordance with membrane manufacturer's
directions.
.2
Provide side laps minimum 3” and end laps minimum 6” wide.
.3
Take precautions to prevent undulations and fishmouths.
.4
At sloping roofs and vertical surfaces backnail roof membrane as recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
.5
Place cap sheet over base sheet and bond with torch. Stagger joints of top sheet from joints in base
sheet by at least 12”.
.6
Provide laps in top sheet similar to laps for base sheet. Laps shall be watertight, straight, flat and
neat, with good asphalt bleed-out, but avoid excessive seepage. Check lap integrity with pointed
trowel.
.7
Reinforce membrane at changes of direction as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
.8
At roof perimeter and penetrations provide 2 ply modified bitumen flashings installed in accordance
with system manufacturer's recommendations, to details shown.
.9
Use 3’4” wide sheets for base and cap sheet flashings. Apply self adhesive base sheet flashings as
recommended by system manufacturer. Extend base sheet minimum 4” onto flat roof membrane and
extend up and over curbs and parapets unless otherwise indicated. Mechanically secure top edge of
base sheet.
.10
Bond cap sheet to base sheet with torch proceeding from bottom up. Extend cap sheet minimum 12”
onto flat roof membrane and up and over parapets/curbs and down the outside face, unless otherwise
indicated.
.11
Upon completion of cap sheet installation, check all lap joints to ensure that they are positively sealed.
Repair laps where necessary and embed matching granules as described above for roof membrane.
.12
Provide concrete pavers complete with levelling pads for access around roof top units
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
07550-4
SECTION 07620 - METAL FLASHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Masonry Restoration:
Section 04900
.2
Rough Carpentry:
Section 06100
.3
Architectural Woodwork Restoration:
Section 06400
.4
Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing:
Section 07550
.5
Sealants
Section 07900
.6
Painting
Section 09900
.7
Roof Curbs for Mechanical Equipment
Division 15
.8
Flashing sleeves and collars for Mechanical Equipment
Division 15
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
AISI - (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Stainless Steel - Uses in Architecture.
.2
ASTM A653/A653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.3
ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
.4
ASTM B209/B209M - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
.5
ASTM B486 - Paste Solder.
.6
ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
.7
ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
.8
FS O-F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid.
.9
ORCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
.10
SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.4
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
.1
Work includes provision of the following:
.1
New prefinished metal flashings.
.2
New prefinished metal drip flashings
.3
New prefinished metal flashing to existing roof gutters
22/09/2011
KMAI
07620-1
1.5
DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Appearance: neatly and evenly lay out and install components. Exposed fastening devices not
permitted.
.2
Effects of wind: resist positive and negative wind pressures without causing detrimental effects.
.3
Water control: prevent passage of water.
.4
Thermal movement: accommodate expansion and contraction of component parts without causing
buckling, failure of joints, undue stress on fasteners and other detrimental effects.
.5
Compatibility: components shall be compatible with dissimilar metals and materials with which they are
in contact or fastened to so as to prevent corrosion, staining and other detrimental effects. If required,
treat or separate contact surfaces with inert and non-staining insulation material to achieve
compatibility.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
.3
Submit [two] minimum 300 mm long samples of typical flashings showing profile, method of locking,
soldering, anchoring and corner condition, fabricated from materials specified.
.4
Submit mock-ups of profiled material ie: typical standing seam, seams, external corner, internal
corner, junction to vertical dissimilar surface.
1.7
JOB CONDITIONS
.1
Schedule and co-ordinate installation of metal flashing components with work of other Sections where
it is integral or contiguous therewith.
.2
Install metal counter and cap flashings immediately after installation and inspection of roofing
membrane base flashings.
1.8
WARRANTY
.1
1.9
faults in materials and/or workmanship provided under this Section of Specifications appearing within
a period of 2 years from date of Substantial Performance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.10
Qualifications of Subcontractor: Have five years previous experience in sheet metal flashing and
trim work.
.1
.2
Handle sheet metal to avoid oil-canning and damage to finish.
.3
Keep underlayment dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
22/09/2011
KMAI
07620-2
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209/B209M, 0.61mm thick; clear anodized finish.
.2
Solder: to ASTM B32, lead free.
.3
Flux: Commercial preparation suitable for materials to be soldered.
.4
Prefinished galvanized sheet steel 0.71 mm, (24 ga) core minimum thickness, pretreated, primed and
finish coated with nominal coating thickness of 0.025 mm: CSSBI 8000 series, 2 colours to be
selected by consultant,
.5
Galvanized sheet steel: ASTM A653, zinc coating designation Z275. Minimum 0.71 mm, (24 ga).
.6
Starter Strips: Fabricated from prefinished Steel, 1.25 mm core thickness, Z275 zinc coating to ASTM
A525M. Starter strips to be continuous.
.7
Securement bar: 3 mm x 25 mm Aluminium Bar.
.8
Mechanical sheet metal fastening devices: non-corrosive metal compatible with sheet metal.
.9
Fasteners for masonry and concrete substrate: Tapcon fasteners with corrosion resistant coating
minimum 38 mm penetration into substrate.
.10
Sealant: One part polysulphide to ASTM C920, one part low modulus silicone to ASTM C920 or
Dymeric by Tremco. Consultant will select colour of sealant exposed in finished work.
.11
Asphaltic paint: Alkali resistant asphalt based enamel.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1
Underlay for metal flashings: No. 15 perforated asphalt felt to CSA A123.3
.2
Sealants: in accordance with Section 07900 –Sealants.
.3
Cleats: of same material and temper as sheet metal, minimum 2 inches wide. Thickness same as
sheet metal being secured.
.4
Fasteners: hex head cap screws of length and thickness suitable for metal flashing application. Finish
same as sheet metal, with dished steel/neoprene washers. Complete with expanding inserts for
installation into concrete.
.5
Touch-up Paint: as recommended by prefinished metal manufacturer.
.6
Reglet bars: surface mounted extruded aluminium, mill finish. For surface attachment to concrete
surfaces, with gasket and predrilled anchor holes.
2.3
.1
Shop fabricate metal flashing components to profiles indicated. Where flashings are required but not
detailed follow applicable requirements of SMACNA Architectural Manual. Provide the following
minimum thicknesses unless otherwise indicated:
.1
.2
.2
Flashings: 0.6 mm (24 ga)
Cleats, lockstrips: 0.9 mm (20 ga)
Provide components free from distortion, waves, twists, buckles and other defects detrimental to
performance and appearance. Form sections square, true and accurate to size.
22/09/2011
KMAI
07620-3
.3
Double back exposed edges at least 12 mm.
.4
Seams: space seams uniformly at maximum 2.5 m o.c. Unless otherwise indicated, use flat locked
seams, lapped 25 mm. Make horizontal seams in directions of water flow. Mitre and seal corners.
.5
Unless otherwise indicated, counter flashings shall completely cover base flashings.
.6
Furnish everything necessary for complete metal flashing installation, including clips and fastening
devices.
.7
Back paint metal flashings with asphaltic paint.
2.4
FABRICATION - SLEEVE FLASHING SYSTEMS
.1
Aluminum 1.5 mm thick 3-part flashing system: by Thaler Roofing Specialties Products.
.2
Fabricate sleeve flashings square or circular and of size to suit component being flashed. Unless
otherwise indicated fabricate sleeves 400 mm high.
.3
System shall consist of sleeve with flange and rain collar, and where applicable, bitumen protection
cup.
.4
Inside of jacket base flange and all sides of protection cup shall be coated with bituminous paint.
.5
Size sleeves to allow minimum 25 mm thick insulation between component and sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Provide metal flashings at roof curbs, copings, penetrations, at junctions of roof to walls, at expansion
joints and where shown. Provide all wall cap flashings except those at metal wall cladding systems.
.2
Protect all membrane flashings with metal counter flashings.
.3
Clean surfaces to be covered with metal flashings of dirt and other foreign matter. Drive projecting
nails flush with substrate. Do not apply metal flashings over substrates likely to cause rupture.
.4
Provide underlay of resin sized paper under metal flashings installed over masonry, concrete or wood.
Lay underlay dry as sheet metal work is installed. Secure in place and lap joints 100 mm.
.5
Secure flashings to supporting building elements with concealed continuous cleats and locking strips;
avoid exposed surface fasteners.
.6
Provide standing seam corners at coping flashings.
.7
Where flashing is punctured by bolts, provide sheet lead or neoprene washers, 6 mm larger than bolt
hole.
.8
At reglets in masonry walls, secure metal flashings to reglet with mechanical fasteners at maximum
610 mm o.c.
.9
Where vertical portion of metal flashing exceeds 300 mm provide vertical standing seams at 600
mm o.c.
.10
Install sleeve flashing systems at penetrations through roof membrane. Install systems in accordance
with manufacturer's directions and as follows:
.1
Prior to installation of roofing membrane place bead of sealant around pipes and other components penetrating roof. Place bitumen protection cups over pipes into sealant.
22/09/2011
KMAI
07620-4
.11
3.2
.2
Insulate between penetrating elements and sleeve with 25 mm thick fibrous insulation.
.3
Prime contact surfaces with mastic cement; place flashing jackets onto roof membrane so
that base flange is in contact with mastic cement placed on membrane.
.4
Sweat solder or weld on rain collar.
Imperfections in metal flashing work such as holes, dents, creases, or oil-canning will not be accepted.
REGLETS
.1
Install surface mounted reglets to all terminations at vertical surfaces. Mitre exterior corners.
Caulk top edge and exterior corners with sealants as specified in Section 07900 – Sealants.
.2
Fasten reglet bars with prefinished cap screws. Maximum spacing 36 inches oc.
.3
Insert metal flashing under reglets to form weathertight junction.
.4
Caulk all surface joints in flashings with sealant as specified in Section 07900 – Sealants.
3.3
.1
Section 01400: Field inspection.
.2
Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with
specified requirements.
3.4
CLEAN-UP
.1
Remove blemishes and clean this work upon completion
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
07620-5
SECTION 07810 - SPRAYED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Structural steel:
Section 05120
.2
Firestopping and smoke seals:
Section 07270
.3
Painting:
Section 09900
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Applicator shall be certified or licensed by manufacturer of fire resistant materials.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Installed sprayed fireproofing system shall meet required fire ratings as verified by reference to fire
resistive designs listed in UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” or in the comparable publication of another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for sprayed fire resistive
material serving as direct applied protection, tested per ASTM E119.
.2
Fireproofing system shall meet the following:
.1
Coating shall not crack or delaminate under deflection when tested in accordance with ASTM
E-759.
.2
Coating shall not crack or delaminate under impact when tested in accordance with ASTM
E-760.
.3
Coating shall have a minimum bond strength of 7.2 kPa when tested in accordance with
ASTM E-736.
.4
Coating shall not be subject to loss by sifting, flaking or dusting in excess of 0.27 g/m² when
tested in accordance with ASTM E-859.
.5
Coating shall have minimum 35 kPa compressive strength as per ASTM E761.
.6
Coating shall not attack or corrode steel components, as per ASTM E937.
.7
Coating shall not contain detectable asbestos as determined according to the method
specified in 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, “Polarized Light
Microscopy”.
.8
Coating shall meet the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
.1
Flame spread: 10 or less.
.2
Smoke developed: 0
.9
Fungal resistance of coating: no observed growth on specimens per ASTM G21.
.10
Provide fire protection as required to unexposed steel structures that are part of a fire
separation or are supporting a fire rated assembly.
22/09/2011
KMAI
07810-1
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
1.6
Prior to start of work submit following documentation:
.1
Name, address and qualifications of applicators.
.2
Product test reports issued by qualified recognized testing agency, verifying that products to
be used meet specified requirements.
.3
Fire resistive design assembly by UL or other testing agency acceptable to jurisdictional
authority, verifying type and thickness of coating is required in each location.
Certificate: Upon completion of sprayed fireproofing application, submit a certificate in triplicate made
out to the Owner and stating that the system as installed on this project, complies with the fire
protection requirements as specified herein. Certificate shall bear seal and signature of a professional
engineer licensed to practice in location of Project.
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
1.7
Deliver and store materials in dry, protected are, off ground, in original, undamaged, sealed containers
with manufacturer’s labels and application instructions intact.
JOB CONDITIONS
o
.1
Maintain ambient and substrate temperature at minimum 5 C during and for at least 24 hours after
application.
.2
Provide required ventilation to ensure proper drying and curing of coating.
.3
Protect sprayed applied materials from weather until fully cured.
.4
Prevent overspray; where adjacent floors, walls and similar surfaces are scheduled to be exposed,
provide and maintain masking enclosures, drop cloths or polyethylene coverings for such surfaces
during spraying operations.
.5
Provide complete enclosures and human protective devices when spraying hazardous materials.
.6
Hangers, inserts, clips, and similar items required for anchorage and support of other building
components must be in place before sprayed materials are applied; apply coating before ducts, pipes,
conduit ceiling suspension systems and similar items are installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Coating: cementitious sprayed fire resistive material consisting of factory mixed, dry formulation of or
Portland cement binders and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at project
site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. Subject to compliance with specified
requirements, provide one of the following products:
1.
AD Type 5 by A/D Fire Protection Systems.
2.
Monokote Type MK6 Cemetitious Fireproofing by W.R. Grace.
.2
Water: clean, potable and free of any substances which may be harmful to coating.
.3
Bonding adhesive and sealer: water emulsion as recommended by coating manufacturer; sealer shall
be tinted.
22/09/2011
KMAI
07810-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDITION OF SUBSTRATES
.1
Substrate scheduled to receive spray-applied materials shall be free of dust, dirt, grease, oil and other
materials or substances which would impair bond.
.2
Examine substrates and report any conditions which may have a detrimental effect on this work.
.3
If surfaces of structural steel receiving sprayed fire resistive material are primed or otherwise painted,
perform series of bond tests specified in UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” for coating materials.
.4
Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of substrate.
3.2
APPLICATION
.1
Mix and apply materials in strict accordance with applicable fire protection design requirements and
manufacturer’s written directions.
.2
Pre-wet substrate with primary bonding adhesive where recommended by coating manufacturer.
.3
Spray apply fire-resistant materials with spray guns using contour spray method, to thickness and
density required to meet required fire resistant rating.
.4
Overcoat sprayed surfaces with sealer where indicated.
.5
Apply coating after floor slabs are complete.
3.3
3.4
PATCHING
.1
Upon completion of work cut, patch and repair defective and damaged areas of fire resistant materials.
.2
As application proceeds and upon completion of work, clean surrounding surfaces of accidental
overspray and droppings.
.1
The Owner may arrange and pay for inspection and testing by independent agency of work carried out
by this Section, as directed by Consultant.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
07810-3
SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Concrete walls, including mortaring in of fire dampers:
Section 03300
.2
Sealants other than specified herein:
Section 07900
.3
Fire stopping at rated assemblies
Section 09210
.4
Firestopping within penetrating mechanical assemblies, (e.g. duct, piping):
Division 15
.5
Firestopping within penetrating electrical assemblies, (e.g. bus duct, conduit):
Division 16
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
Include in work of this Section all firestopping required except for firestopping and smoke seals within
mechanical assemblies (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside bus ducts)
which shall be provided as part of work of Divisions 15 and 16 respectively. Firestopping and smoke
seals around outside of such mechanical and electrical assemblies, where they penetrate fire rated
separations, shall be part of work of this Section.
.2
Firestop and seal (draft-tight) gaps, control joints, expansion joints and penetrations in fire rated
assemblies, including assemblies with a zero rating, against passage of fire, smoke, gasses,
firefighter's hose stream and, where designated, passage of liquids. Smoke seal at angle support at
fire dampers.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Work of this Section shall be carried out by a firm specialized in the type of work specified herein. Use
competent installers, experienced, trained and approved by material or system manufacturer for
application of materials and systems being used. Installers shall have minimum 5 years experience in
installation of firestopping materials.
.2
Arrange for inspection from independent inspection and testing agency paid through Section 01210.
Inspection to be carried out prior to covering of penetrations.
.3
Arrange for Building Inspection from authorities prior to covering of penetrations.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed and labelled containers.
.2
Store materials in protected location prior to use, in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
.1
1.7
Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity and substrate moisture
content for storage, mixing, application and curing of firestopping materials.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Prior to start of work submit list of proposed firestopping and smoke seal materials together with
suitable documentation to verify that specified requirements will be met. Provide the following
information as applicable to this Project:
.1
ULC assembly number certification
22/09/2011
KMAI
07840-1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
required temperature rise and flame rating
hose stream rating (where applicable)
thickness
proposed installation methods
material of firestopping and smoke seals, primers, reinforcements, damming materials,
reinforcements and anchorages/fastenings
size of opening
adjacent materials
.2
Upon Consultant's request submit samples of materials.
.3
Upon completion of work submit written certification that work of this Section has been carried out in
accordance with specified requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEMS
.1
Firestopping and smoke seal systems shall be:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
2.2
tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115-05.
listed by ULC or other fire testing agency approved by jurisdictional authorities.
capable of providing fire resistance rating not less than that required by surrounding
assembly.
comply with F, T and H rating required.
Firestopping and smoke seals for vertical fire separations shall meet ULC Designation PJ, JF and HW
as required for respective location.
MATERIALS
.1
Firestopping and smoke seal materials:
.1
Provide materials which are:
.1
.2
.3
.4
PCB and asbestos-free
of easily identifiable colour, except where used in exposed location
suitable for intended application
compatible with adjacent materials.
.2
Provide elastomeric type materials at locations requiring future re-entry (such as cable) and
at penetrations for ducts and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control.
.3
Sealant type materials shall be non-sagging for vertical surfaces and self-levelling for level
floors.
.2
Primer: as recommended by firestopping material manufacturer for specific substrate and use.
.3
Damming and back-up materials, support and anchoring devices: non-combustible, in accordance
with tested assembly and as recommended by manufacturer.
2.3
MIXING
.1
Mix materials at correct temperature and in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
22/09/2011
KMAI
07840-2
.2
Remove combustible material and loose material detrimental to bond from edges of penetration.
Clean, prime or otherwise prepare substrate material to manufacturer's recommendation.
.3
Do not apply firestop material to surfaces previously painted or treated with sealer, curing compound,
water repellent to other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of
materials. Remove coatings as required.
.4
Verify openings, dimensions and surfaces conform to fire and smoke seal assembly.
.5
Protect adjacent surfaces from marring or damage.
.6
Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
.7
Remove insulation from area of insulated pipe and duct where such pipes or ducts penetrate fire
separation unless ULC certified assembly permits such insulation to remain within assembly.
.8
Provide temporary damming, forming, packing and bracing materials necessary to contain
firestopping. Upon completion, remove forming and damming materials not required to remain as part
of system.
.9
Examine sizes, anticipated movement and conditions of opening and penetration to establish correct
system and depth of backup materials and of firestopping material required.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Seal penetrations through and gaps in fire rated separations in accordance with ULC listing for tested
system selected.
.2
Apply firestopping materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and tested designs. Apply
with sufficient pressure to properly fill and seal openings to ensure continuity and integrity of fire
separation. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces as required.
.3
Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
.4
Unless otherwise indicated or permitted by Consultant recess firestopping and smoke seals in
exposed locations to permit installation of decorative sealant by Section 07920.
.5
Do not cover materials until full cure has taken place.
.6
Provide firestopping and smoke seal systems at following locations, without being limited to:
.7
.1
At all openings, voids and penetrations through all floor slabs except openings within shafts
constructed with a fire resistance rating.
.2
At all openings, voids, control joints and penetrations through fire rated masonry, concrete
and gypsum board walls, partitions and shaft walls.
.3
At all openings, voids and penetrations installed for future use through fire rated masonry,
concrete and gypsum board walls, partitions and shaft walls.
.4
Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire rated assemblies.
.5
Between perimeter of all floor and roof construction and exterior wall construction.
.6
Between tops of all fire rated walls and partitions and underside of floor or construction.
.7
At building expansion joints.
Curing: cure materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
22/09/2011
KMAI
07840-3
3.3
.1
Upon Consultant's request, manufacturer's representative shall inspect work of this Section and
confirm in writing that it complies with specified requirements.
.2
Request Consultant's review of installed systems before they are covered by other work.
.3
Owner may arrange and pay out of cash allowance included in Section 01210 for inspection and
testing of work of this Section by independent agency as directed by Consultant.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
07840-4
SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Caulking related to Masonry Restoration:
Section 04900
.2
Caulking related to Architectural Woodwork Restoration:
Section 06400
.3
Caulking related to metal flashings:
Section 07620
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
CGSB 19-GP-5M-76
Curing
-
Sealing Compound, One-Component, Acrylic Base Solvent
.2
CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87
Curing
-
Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical
.3
CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90
-
Sealing Compound, One-Component Acrylic Emulsion Base
.4
CAN/CGSB-19.22-M89
-
Mildew-Resistant Sealing Compound for Tubs and Tiles
.5
CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90
-
Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound
1.4
DEFINITION / DESCRIPTION
.1
1.5
Caulking = Sealant. Provide joint sealant work required to seal building tightly from exterior and
interior, to withstand action of elements and to complete building envelope, air and vapour barriers,
and all other joint sealant work, unless specified to be included under other Sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Work of this Section shall be performed by recognized and established sealant applicator, prequalified
and having a minimum 5 years experience in heritage work, using skilled mechanics trained in use of
sealing equipment and specified materials. Submit documentation showing subcontractor’s
qualifications for approval by the Owner’s Designee, prior to commencement of the Work.
.2
Prior to start of work, arrange for Project Site meeting of all parties associated with work of this
Section. Presided by Owner’s Designee, include Contractor, Sub-Contractor, and manufacturer’s
representative discuss procedures to be adopted, to analyse site conditions and inspect surfaces and
joints to be sealed, in order that recommendations may be made and recorded.
.3
Review Specification for work included under this Section and determine complete understanding of
requirements and responsibilities relative to work included, storage and handling of materials,
materials to be used, installation of materials, sequence and quality control, Project staffing,
restrictions on areas of work and other matters affecting construction, to permit compliance with intent
of this Section. Discuss also following items:
- Suitability of products proposed and compatibility with materials to be contacted;
- Weather conditions under which work will be done;
- Anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement;
- Joint design;
- Suitability of durometer hardness and other properties of material to be used;
22/09/2011
KMAI
07920-1
- Recommendations of manufacturer for mixing of multi-component sealants;
- Number of beads to be used in sealing operation and priming operation if required.
1.6
MOCK-UP
.1
1.7
At Site, in areas designated by Owner’s Designee, provide samples of each type of sealant application
minimum 36" long each, showing location, size, shape and depth of joint complete with backup
materials, primer, caulking and sealant, bond, colour and quality of installation work. Construct
additional samples if required to obtain approval. Do no sealing work until samples have been
approved. Approved samples shall become standard of comparison for sealing and caulking work on
Site and shall become part of Work.
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Deliver sealants to site in sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand name of sealant,
grade and type, application directions and shelf life or expiry date of product.
.3
Store materials in a dry area having an ambient temperature within limitations recommended by
material manufacturer. Store flammable materials and safe, approved containers to eliminate fire
hazards.
.4
Do not use caulking and sealing materials that has been stored for period of time exceeding maximum
recommended shelf life of materials.
1.8
JOB CONDITIONS
.1
1.9
o
WARRANTY
.1
1.10
Warrant work of this Section against defects and deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions
of the Contract. Promptly correct to satisfaction of Owner’s Designee and at no expense to Owner, any
defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period. Defects include, but are not
limited to cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinkage, sag, failure in adhesion, cohesion or reversion, air
and moisture leakage, marbling or streaking due to improper mixing, discolouration due to dirt pick-up
during curing and staining of adjacent materials.
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Samples: Provide cured, colour samples of manufacturer's standard range of colours in each type of
sealing and caulking compound for colour selection by Owner’s Designee. Submit samples of primer,
bond breaker tape and joint backing material, if requested.
.3
Submittals: Submit product information from sealant manufacturers prior to commencement of work
of this Section verifying:
.4
Selected sealant materials are from those specified;
.5
Composition and physical characteristics;
.6
Surface preparation requirements;
22/09/2011
KMAI
o
Unless otherwise specified, apply sealants when air temperature is between 10 C and 25 C. When air
o
o
temperature is above 25 C or below 10 C follow sealant manufacturer's recommendations regarding
application and obtain Owner’s Designee’s approval. Maintain minimum temperature of application
during application and for 8 hours after application.
07920-2
.7
Priming and application procedures;
.7
Suitability of sealants for purposes intended and joint design;
.8
Test report on adhesion, compatibility and staining effect on samples of materials used on Project;
.9
Sealants compatibility with other materials and products with which they come in contact including but
not limited to sealants provided under other Sections, insulation adhesives, bitumens, brick, stone,
concrete, masonry, metals and metal finishes, ceramic tile, plastic laminates, paints;
.10
Suitability of sealants for temperature and humidity conditions at time of application.
.11
Sealant Installation Contractor CCDC 11A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sealants:
.1
Exterior sealant for vertical joints: two-part medium modulus silicone sealant with joint
movement capability of ±50%; custom colour selected by Consultant: ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, uses NT, G, A, O; standard of acceptance: Dow Corning 790 Silicone
Building Sealant.
.2
Interior sealant for vertical joints: one part acrylic latex wsith joint movement capability of ±7
½%, paintable: ASTM C834 Type OP, Grade - 18°C standard of acceptance: Tremflex 834.
.3
Interior sealant for horizontal joints: multi-component, self-levelling, chemically curing
polyurethane: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25; standard of acceptance Tremco
THC-900.
.4
Interior sealant for wet locations: mildew-resistant silicone formulated with fungicide: ASTM
C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, uses NT, G, A: standard of acceptance: Dow Corning
786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant.
.5
Colours: selected by Consultant, not necessarily from manufacturer’s standard colours.
.2
Primers, thinners, cleaners: suitable for substrate surfaces, compatible with joint forming materialsand
as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
.3
Premoulded backup for sealant: non-gassing closed cell foam rope, compressed 25% when in joint:
Sof-Rod by Tremco.
.4
Bond breaker: closed cell polyethylene or vinyl foam tape, self-adhering one side.
.5
Cleaning material: non-corrosive, non-staining, solvent type, xylol, methyl-ethyl-ketone (MEK), toluol,
isopropyl alcohol (IPA) or as recommended by sealant manufacturer and acceptable to material or
finish manufacturers for surfaces adjacent to sealed areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine joints to be caulked and report in writing to the Consultant any defects in work of other
Sections which would impair installation, performance and warranty of sealants.
.2
Do not commence installation of sealants until conditions are acceptable.
22/09/2011
KMAI
07920-3
.3
3.2
Start of work implies acceptance of conditions.
PREPARATION
.1
Clean and prepare joints to be caulked to produce clean sound surfaces for sealant adhesion.
.2
Remove dust, oil, grease, water, frost, loose mortar and other foreign matter. Remove loose particles
by blowing joint out with compressed air.
.3
Chemically clean non-porous surfaces such as metal and glass, taking care to wipe solvents dry with a
clean cloth. Use solvents recommended by sealant manufacturer.
.4
Clean porous surfaces such as masonry, concrete and stone by mechanical abrading.
.5
Surfaces adjacent to joints to be primed and which may be stained by primer shall be masked with
tape before primer is applied.
.6
Prime joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primer before
installing premoulded backup.
.7
Install premoulded backup in joints 6 mm and more in width. Roll rope type backup into joint, do not
stretch or braid. Install bond breaker in joints less than 6 mm in width.
.8
Protect adjacent surfaces from stains and contamination. Make good any damage caused.
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Apply sealants under pressure using suitable equipment. Gun nozzle shall be of proper size to fit, and
seal joint.
.2
Force sealant into joints in full bead, making certain that void free contact is made with sides of joint.
Tool joints to produce a slightly concave surface.
.3
Caulking must appear as a concave recessed joint, free of ridges, wrinkles and embedded foreign
matter. Caulking shall not spread or bulge beyond surfaces on each joint.
.4
Apply sealants in accordance with following table:
Joint Width
5 mm
10 mm
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
.5
3.4
Vent exterior joints as directed by Consultant.
REPAIR
.1
3.5
3.6
Remove any compounds not complying with requirements specified herein. Exercise care in removal
operations not to mar or damage finishes adjacent to joints. Repeat preparation, priming and
installation of new material as specified to provide finished work complying with specified
requirements, and acceptable to Owner’s Designee. Do such repair work at no extra cost to Owner.
CLEANING
.1
As work progresses, remove sealant smears and stains from adjacent surfaces. Use cleaning method
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
.2
Leave adjacent surfaces in neat and clean condition.
SCHEDULE
22/09/2011
KMAI
Sealant Depth
5 mm
5 mm
7 mm
10 mm
12 mm
07920-4
.1
Apply sealant at the following exterior locations:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
Apply sealant at the following interior locations:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.3
Between dissimilar materials in exposed locations except where specifically indicated
otherwise.
Perimeter of exterior door, louvre and screen frames.
Between interior door frames and wall where gap exceeds 1.5 mm or where gap is irregular.
Control joints in masonry elements, and joints between bearing and non-bearing masonry
walls.
Building expansion joint, except where expansion joint covers are required.
At ceramic tile control joints.
Perimeter of firehose cabinets, access panels, and control panels.
Between vanities/countertops and wall.
Between interior door frame and flooring.
Where shown.
At interior locations use acrylic emulsion sealant except:
.1
.2
.3
3.7
Between dissimilar materials in exposed locations except where specifically indicated
otherwise.
Control joints in masonry elements.
Below door thresholds (double bead).
At perimeter of door, screen and louvre frames.
At penetrations through exterior building elements.
Where indicated.
At floor control joints use polyurethane for floors.
At vanities/countertops and at ceramic wall tile control joints use silicone sealant.
Where expected joint movement exceeds movement capability of acrylic emulsion sealant,
use sealant specified for exterior use, as directed by Consultant.
PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
.1
Provide approved, non-staining means of protection for completed joint sealant installations where
required to protect work from mechanical, thermal, chemical and other damage by construction
operations and traffic.
.2
Maintain protection securely in place until completion of Work. Remove protection when so directed by
Owner’s Designee.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
07920-5
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS, SCREENS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Mortar and Grout:
Section 04060
.2
Sealants:
Section 07900
.3
Steel Doors and Frames:
Section 08110
.4
Aluminium Doors and Frames:
Section 08120
.5
Door Hardware:
Section 08710
.6
Section 08810
.7
Glazed Curtain Wall
Section 08910
.8
Painting:
Section 09900
.9
Electrical
Division 16
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1
Artek
.2
Baron
.3
Daybar
.4
S.W. Fleming
.2
Reference standards: unless otherwise indicated, meet requirements of "Canadian Manufacturing
Specification for Steel Doors and Frames" and “Recommended Dimensional Standards for
Commercial Steel Doors and Frames” published by the Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers'
Association.
.3
Fire protection requirements: fire rated doors and frames shall bear ULC or WHI label for required
rating and shall be installed in accordance with NPPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows, current edition.
Provide temperature rise rated assemblies where required.
.4
Fire rated screens shall comply with requirements of OBC.
1.5
.1
Supply frames and anchors to other Sections where it is necessary to build frames into work of other
Sections.
.2
Supply instructions required for accurate positioning and proper installation of components supplied to
other Sections.
1.6
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Section 01330 – Submission requirements
22/09/2011
KMAI
08110-1
.2
1.7
Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings. Include door and frame schedules, materials and finishes,
hardware preparations and frame anchorage details.
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
Section 01600: Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
.2
Tag doors and frames at shop with identification marks indicating proper location for installation.
.3
Deliver, store and handle components so as to prevent damage, distortion and corrosion. Store
components in an enclosed dry and protected area. Stack doors and frames to prevent twisting. Do
not enclose components in plastic covers without venting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sheet Steel: hot dip galvanized (wipe coated) cold rolled steel with stretcher level degree of flatness,
meeting requirements of ASTM A924 and A653; minimum zinc coating designation ZF 120.
.2
Core Material:
.1
Fire rated doors: in accordance with fire test requirements.
.2
Exterior doors: rigid polyurethane or rigid mineral fibre.
.3
Interior doors, except fire rated doors: honeycomb core of rigid, pre-expanded resin
impregnated paper with maximum 25 mm hexagonal shaped cells.
.3
Reinforcing steel: CAN/CSA-G40.21-04 Grade 300W, hot dip galvanized to CAN/CSA-G164-M92.
.4
Finishing Materials:
2.2
.1
Touch up paint: zinc rich paint CAN/CGSB-1.181-99.
.2
Metal filler: two component epoxy type.
HARDWARE PREPARATION
.1
Prepare for mortised and cylindrical hardware in accordance with ANSI A115 Series standards, except
where specified otherwise. Provide mortise lock preparation to ANSI A115.1, including integral
reinforcement channel, mounting tabs, and lock support. Provide cylindrical lock preparation to ANSI
A115.2, including integral latch case support.
.2
Blank, reinforce, drill and tap doors and frames for concealed and mortised hardware. Reinforce doors
and frames for surface mounted hardware. Provide door closer reinforcement at all steel doors and
frames whether closer is required by hardware list or not. Provide exterior doors and frames to receive
alarm system contact switches.
2.3
DOORS
.1
Construct fire rated doors in accordance with fire test requirements. Double doors shall be labelled
without need for mullions, astragals or coordinating devices. Doors with transom panels shall be
labelled with rebated interlocking head condition. Doors located in firewalls shall be temperature rise
rated and labelled as required by regulatory requirements.
.2
Provide all doors of seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces.
.3
Exterior doors to be of hollow steel construction with all spaces filled with insulation; interior high traffic
doors shall be of honeycomb core construction. Skins shall be 1.5 mm thick. Join door faces at
vertical door edges by continuous weld, extending full height of door; grind, fill and dress smooth.
.4
Interior doors except high traffic doors, shall be of honeycomb core construction. Skins shall be
22/09/2011
KMAI
08110-2
minimum 1.2 mm thick. Join door faces at vertical door edges by tackwelding, filling, grinding and
dressing smooth.
.5
Interior high traffic doors shall be of insulated steel stiffened construction similar to exterior doors, with
1.5 mm thick door faces, joined at door edges with continuous weld, ground, filled and dressed
smooth. Provide high traffic doors at the following locations:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Vestibule doors
Stair doors
Cross corridor doors
Where shown
.6
Provide flush weathertight end closures made of steel at top edge of exterior doors and where required
for attachment of hardware and weatherstripping.
.7
Hardware reinforcements shall be minimum 3.4 mm thick exclusive of door skin thickness. Provide
reinforcement at all hardware fastening points.
.8
Surround openings in flush doors with minimum 1.2 mm thick steel edge channels, welded to both
face sheets.
.9
Provide removable glazing stops of zinc coated steel channels butted at corners, accurately fitted into
position and fastened with oval head screws.
.10
Glazing stops at exterior doors shall be located on the interior side.
.11
Construct oversized doors to sizes indicated; frame and reinforce doors as required to maintain shape.
2.4
FRAMES
.1
Provide welded frames of 1.5 mm thick sheet steel to profiles shown on Drawings, and as required to
suit wall conditions. Provide T-style centre mullions. Door stops shall be formed integrally with frame
and not added as a separate profile.
.2
Assemble components with accurately cut joints. Mitre outside corner joints of frames. Continuously
weld joints on inside of profile; grind exposed welds, flush and sand to smooth uniform surface.
Tabbed and spotwelded construction is not acceptable.
.3
Fit and assemble work in the shop wherever possible, eliminating field joints.
.4
Glazing stops shall be minimum 0.9 mm thick steel, mitred at corners, drilled and secured with
tamperproof screws.
.5
Side light and transom framing shall be of same thickness metal as adjacent door frame.
.6
Drill interior door frames for rubber bumpers. Drill strike jamb of each single door frame for 3 bumpers.
Drill head member of double door frames for 2 bumpers.
.7
Provide angle or channel door head reinforcement for doors wider than 915 mm.
.8
Tack weld two removable minimum 1.2 mm thick steel spreader channels to inside faces of door
frames at base.
.9
Provide adjustable base clips for anchorage to floor at bottom of each door jamb.
.10
Protect hardware reinforcements at frames located in masonry elements with 0.9 mm thick guard
boxes.
.11
Hardware reinforcements shall be minimum 3.4 mm thick exclusive of frame thickness. Provide
reinforcement at all hardware fastening points. Provide heavy duty reinforcing (angle type for hinges
at high traffic doors.
.12
Where indicated provide removable mullions.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08110-3
.13
Make provisions to accommodate door intrusion alarm equipment at exterior door locations.
Coordinate with alarm system supplier.
.14
Make provisions to accommodate automatic door openers where required. Coordinate with Division
16.
.15
Provide welded on metal drip at head of exterior doors.
2.5
SCREENS
.1
Provide welded screen of 1.5 mm thick sheet steel to profiles shown on Drawings, and as required to
suit wall conditions and to frame frosted firelite glass (45 min) (w222). Provide T-style centre mullions.
.2
Assemble components with accurately cut joints. Mitre outside corner joints of frames. Continuously
weld joints on inside of profile; grind exposed welds, flush and sand to smooth uniform surface.
Tabbed and spotwelded construction is not acceptable.
.3
Fit and assemble work in the shop wherever possible, eliminating field joints.
.4
Glazing stops shall be minimum 0.9 mm thick steel, mitred at corners, drilled and secured with
tamperproof screws.
.5
Side light and transom framing shall be of same thickness metal as adjacent window frame.
.6
Where indicated provide removable mullions.
2.6
FINISHES
.1
Fill seams, corner joints and other depressions with filler and sand smooth.
.2
Clean and remove all traces of oil, grease and other foreign substances to ensure proper bond of
touch up after fabrication.
.3
Touch up damaged zinc coating with zinc rich paint.
.4
Insulate, where necessary to prevent electrolysis, metal surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals or
cementitious materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FRAME & SCREEN INSTALLATION
.1
Allowable limit of distortion shall be 1.5 mm out of plumb at each jamb, measured on face of frame,
resulting in maximum twist of frame of 3 mm measured from upper corner to lower diagonal corner.
.2
Generally, anchorage of frames shall be by means of standard anchors. Where standard anchors
cannot be used, provide special anchors to ensure proper installation. Method of anchorage shall not
be visible when frames are installed.
.3
Provide minimum 3 anchors at each jamb. At frames exceeding 2150 mm in height provide one
additional anchor for each additional 610 mm, or part thereof.
.4
Anchor intermediate vertical frame members to structure above as required to ensure stability. Where
required, provide steel frame extensions. Provide flexible connection at structure to allow for
deflection.
.5
Remove steel shipping spreaders; install wood installation spreaders at sill and at third points of frame
rabbet height to maintain constant frame width. Remove wood spreaders only after frames are
securely anchored in place.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08110-4
3.2
DOORS
.1
Install steel doors and panels.
.2
Install hardware in accordance with hardware supplier's instructions.
.3
Adjust operable parts to ensure proper operation.
3.3
TOUCH-UP
.1
Patch damaged shop primer. Remove rust, sand damaged and abraded surfaces and touch-up with
zinc rich paint.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
08110-5
SECTION 08120 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Sealants, except as specified herein:
Section 07920
.2
Door Hardware:
Section 08710
.3
Miscellaneous glazing:
Section 08810
.4
Section 08910
.5
Electrical power for automatic door operators:
1.3
.1
Supply to other Sections anchors, inserts and items required to be built into work of other Sections.
.2
Ensure accurate setting of built-in items; where necessary provide templates, diagrams or other
suitable means of instruction.
1.4
.1
Design window, curtain wall and entrance systems to withstand, without any detrimental effects to
appearance and performance, wind loads and temperature range expected in geographical area of
this project (OBC climatic information 50 year probability), unless specified otherwise.
.2
Design systems to accommodate without detrimental effects on appearance and performance of
system.
.1
Positive and negative wind loads.
.2
Thermal expansion and contraction of systems components.
.3
Movement, deflection and creep of building structural frame.
.3
Limit deflection of component parts under maximum design load to 1/175 of span or less if required by
glass manufacturer.
.4
Exterior screens:
1.5
.1
Structural performance shall be based on CSA CAN3-S157 "Strength Design in Aluminum"
and a maximum deflection of 1/175 of the span.
.2
Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.0003 m³ / s-m² when tested in accordance with ASTM E283
at a pressure differential of 75 Pa.
.3
There shall be no water infiltration when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 with a
pressure differential of 300 Pa.
.4
Thermally, the grid members shall have a condensation resistance equal to, or better than,
the area along the bottom of a 25 mm thick sealed glass unit with standard metal spacer
edge construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Installer qualifications: forces approved by manufacturer.
22/09/2011
KMAI
Division 16
08120-1
.2
Fabrication tolerances: overall height, width and diagonal dimensions of frames shall be within the
following tolerances:
Dimension of 1.8 m and less: +/- 1.5 mm
Dimension more than 1.8 m: +/- 3 mm
.3
Caulking: comply with requirements of Section 07920 except where specifically stated otherwise
herein.
.4
Glazing: comply with requirements of Section 08810 except where specifically stated otherwise
herein.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Submit detailed shop drawings showing fabrication, assembly and installation requirements.
.3
Upon Consultant's request, submit sample section and assemble corner of each framing system used.
.4
Submit 2 sets of samples minimum 50 x 100 mm of each type of metal finish specified.
1.7
WARRANTY
.1
.2
1.8
At no cost to Owner remedy any defects in work of this Section, due to faulty materials or
workmanship, for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Performance. Warranty shall be
provided by systems manufacturer / installer. For the purposes of this paragraph, defects shall include
but not necessarily be limited to:
.1
Water infiltration in excess of requirements specified.
.2
Air infiltration / exfiltration in excess of requirements specified.
.3
Deflection of system components in excess of requirements specified.
.4
Failure of joint seal.
.5
Cracked glass (except where caused by vandalism).
.6
Delamination, cracking, blistering, excessive fading of metal finishes.
At no cost to Owner, replace factory sealed insulating window units should cracking of glass or any
other breakdown or failure of glass units occur or should obstruction of vision develop due to dust or
film forming on inner glass surfaces within a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Peformance.
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Tag doors and frames at shop with identification marks indicating proper location for installation.
.3
Deliver, store and handle components so as to prevent damage, distortion and corrosion. Store doors
in an enclosed dry and protected area. Stack curtain wall components to prevent twisting. Do not
enclose components in plastic covers without venting.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08120-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEMS
.1
2.2
Exterior doors: 360 Insulclad Door by Kawneer or Series 400 Insuldoor by Alumicor.
MATERIALS
.1
.2
.3
Framing Components:
.1
Aluminum extrusions: AA 6063-T54 alloy.
.2
Aluminum plate and sheet: AA 1100 alloy.
.3
Steel sections and plate: CAN/CSA-G40.21-04, Grade 300W.
.4
Steel tubes: CAN/CSA-G40.21-04, Grade 350W, Class H.
.5
Screws, bolts, nuts, washers, rivets and other fasteners incorporated into aluminum sections:
aluminum or ANSI Series 300 stainless steel, or hot dip galvanized steel.
.6
Anchoring devices: aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel.
Glass and Glazing Materials:
.1
Setting blocks: Neoprene, Shore "A" Durometer hardness of 70 to 90 points; spacer shims,
40 to 50 points, as recommended by glass manufacturers.
.2
Glazing sealant: one part polysulphide meeting requirements of CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87 or as
recommended by window and glass manufacturer.
.3
Glazing tape: preshimmed polyisobutylene: Polyshim Tape by Tremco.
.4
Glazing wedges and splines: solid extruded neoprene or EPDM having Shore "A" Durometer
hardness of 50 to 70 points as recommended by window manufacturer.
.5
Float glass: CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, clear, Glazing Quality.
.6
Tempered glass: CAN/CGSB-12.1-M91, clear.
.7
Low emissivity glass (Low-E): Solarban 60, clear by PPG.
.8
Insulating glass: factory sealed double glazed, to CAN/CGSB-12.8-97:
.1
Nominal thickness: 25 mm
.2
Glass: minimum 6 mm thick; clear float inboard lite, tempered outboard lite;
low emissivity coating on No. 3 surface.
.3
Space between glass filled with Argon gas.
.4
Use warm edge spacer.
Caulking Materials:
22/09/2011
KMAI
08120-3
.4
2.3
.1
Sealant: one part low modulus silicone: Dow Corning 790; colours selected by Consultant.
.2
Primer: as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
.3
Joint backing: non-gassing foam rope, compressed minimum 25% when installed: Sof-Rod
by Tremco.
Miscellaneous Materials:
.1
Bituminous paint: alkali resistant asphaltic enamel.
.2
Bedding compound: non-hardening and non-skinning.
FRAMING
.1
Aluminium components shall be extruded sections and shapes unless otherwise specified.
.2
Exterior screen framing shall consist of thermally broken sections.
.3
Size units to allow for structural deflection of surrounding construction.
.4
Design work so that it will not be distorted, nor fasteners overstressed, from expansion and contraction
of metal.
.5
Reinforce members as required to withstand loads and to maintain deflection within allowable limited.
.6
Internally reinforce framing members where work of other Sections is to be fastened thereto.
.7
Fastenings shall be concealed.
.8
Mechanically joined sections shall have hairline joints.
.9
Closures, covers and trim shall be extruded or formed to profiles shown and unless otherwise shown,
minimum 3 mm thick.
2.4
DOORS
.1
Doors:
.1
Construct doors of minimum 4.8 mm thick porthole extrusions, with all fastenings and
connections concealed.
.2
Vertical edge profile: bevelled or rounded.
.3
Glazing stops shall be snap-on-type, without exposed fasteners.
.4
Weatherstripping: provide manufacturer's standard weatherstripping at jambs, head and
bottom of exterior doors. Weather stripping shall be removable for replacement.
.2
Where doors are incorporated into window wall provide suitable subframes.
.3
Provide cutouts, recesses, mortising required for finish and operating hardware.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08120-4
.4
Provide heavy duty reinforcing at all door and frame hardware fastening points.
.5
Internally reinforce framing members where work of other Sections is to be fastened thereto.
.6
Provide rails and transoms to sizes and profiles shown.
.7
Prepare doors / frames for automatic door operator; provide head member of sufficient size to
accommodate operator.
.8
Prepare doors and frames to receive finish hardware supplied only by Section 08710. Prepare each
door / frame for hinges, exit device, overhead closer, overhead stop, pull, threshold.
2.5
METAL FINISHES
.1
All exposed surfaces: clear anodized AA M12 C22 A31.
.2
Contact surfaces of aluminum components with dissimilar building components shall be coated with
bituminous paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FRAMING
.1
Erect and secure framing plumb, square and level, free from warp, twist and superimposed loads.
.2
Anchor framing to supporting building elements; provide brackets, anchors and clips as required. All
devises for anchoring shall have sufficient adjustment to permit correct and accurate alignment. After
alignment rivet, weld or otherwise positively lock anchoring devices to prevent movement other than
that required to accommodate expansion, contraction and deflection.
.3
Anchor intermediate vertical frame members to structure above as required. Where support for intermediate vertical frame members is not available directly above head, provide frame extensions to
structure above. Provide flexible connection at structure to allow for movement.
.4
Provide necessary inserts to be built into work of other Sections as required for anchorage of framing.
.5
Set frame members in bedding compound to ensure watertight assembly.
.6
Metal to metal joints between abutting components shall be sealed weathertight.
.7
Use concealed fastenings and anchorages in all locations. Exposed fastenings, where unavoidable,
must be clearly identified on shop drawings, and require Consultant's approval prior to fabrication of
work.
3.2
GLAZING
.1
Glaze openings in accordance with window and glass manufacturer's recommendation, using dry-dry
glazing method and so as to achieve weathertight installation.
.2
Provide the following:
.1
Exterior doors and screens: insulating glass; tempered inside and outside.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08120-5
3.3
SEALANTS
.1
Seal joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Prime contact surfaces prior to
installation of sealant.
.2
Provide caulking between framing members and adjoining work and where required to render work of
this Section weathertight.
3.4
COVERS, CLOSURES AND TRIM
.1
Provide covers, closures and trim as indicated and as required to provide complete and finished
installation.
.2
Wherever possible, provide concealed fastenings unless approved otherwise by Consultant.
3.5
DOORS AND HARDWARE
.1
Install doors including those located in curtain wall.
.2
Install finish and operating hardware and weatherstripping required, in accordance with hardware
manufacturer's directions. Check test operation of all operable parts and, if necessary, adjust to
ensure correct and smooth function.
.3
Coordinate with Division 16 for required power connection and wiring to automatic door operator and
controls.
3.7
CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT
.1
Remove protective elements and thoroughly clean aluminum and glass surfaces with solution of mild
domestic detergent in warm water. Exercise care in removing dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces dry
using soft cloths.
.2
Just prior to takeover of building by Owner, check test door hardware and weatherstripping and, if
necessary adjust or replace components to ensure proper and smooth operation, and weathertight
closure.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
08120-6
SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Cabinet Work:
Section 06300
.2
Section 08110
.3
Section 08590
.4
Section 08810
.5
Painting:
Section 09900
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Meet requirements of CAN/CSA-0132.2 Series-90 except where specified otherwise.
.2
Fire rated doors shall bear ULC label.
.3
AWMAC (Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada) - Quality Standards.
.4
HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Provide wood moulding profiles for custom doors.
1.5
.1
.2
Protect doors from dampness. Arrange for delivery after work causing high humidity has been
completed.
.3
Protect doors from scratches, handling marks and other damage. Individually package doors in scuff
and waterresistant wrappings.
.4
Label each door with manufacturer's name, product identification, door size and type.
1.6
WARRANTY
.1
defects in doors provided under this Section appearing within a period of 3 years from the date of Total
Performance.
.2
Defects covered under warranty shall include warp exceeding 6 mm.
.3
Warranty shall cover all costs for replacement of defective doors including hanging, fitting and
finishing.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08210-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID CORE FLUSH DOORS
.1
Flush doors, 45 mm thick, meeting requirements specified herein, by one of the following:
.1
Cambridge Forest Products
.2
Dormond Industries
.3
Lambton Doors
.4
Weyerhauser Canada Ltd.
.2
Construct fire rated doors in accordance with fire test requirements.
.3
Core: solid particleboard, to ANSI A208.1, Type II Grade E. For fire rated doors, provide core in
accordance with fire test requirements.
.4
Crossbanding: approximately 1.5 mm thick hardwood veneer laminated to each face of core at doors
requiring plastic laminate facing.
.5
Door facing: AWMAC Architectural Grade, flat cut Maple, minimum 0.7 thick, factory finished with
clear satin catalyzed lacquer, meeting AWI Quality Standard Section 1500, System #3, stain colour
and sheen selected by Consultant.
.6
Seal top and bottom edges with two coats of urethane sealer, in plant, prior to shipping.
.7
Mineral core fire doors shall have pilot holes of 3.2 mm diameter for installation of hinges and screws
shall be turned into pilot holes by use of manual or "Yankee" screwdriver.
.8
Provide transom panels matching doors above which they are located. Provide rabetted joints where
doors meet panels.
.9
Factory prepare doors for hinges, locks and other hardware.
.10
Prepare for glazed openings to sizes indicated. Mitre glass stops at corners.
2.3
CUSTOM WOOD STILE AND RAIL DOORS
.1
Doors to be manufactured in accordance to AWMAC Quality Standard, ‘Premium’
.2
Doors: 44 mm thick; solid lumber construction; mortised and tenoned joints waterproof adhesive.
.1
.2
MATERIALS
.1
Wood:
.2
Moulding and framing: Wood to match door species and grade, mitre joints,
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate doors in accordance with AWMAC Quality Standards requirements
.2
Astragals for Double Doors: Wood to match door, shaped, overlapping and recessed at
face edges.
.3
Provide aluminum flashing at the top and bottom rail for full thickness and width of door.
22/09/2011
KMAI
Exterior Doors: White Oak, clear Select Grade
Interior Doors: Maple, clear select grade
08210-2
.3
.4
Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and
dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware.
.5
Cut and configure exterior door edge to receive recessed weather stripping devices.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWMAC.
FINISH
.1
Factory finish doors in accordance with Section 09900.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Prepare doors in accordance with templates supplied by Section 08710.
.2
Accurately fit doors into frames to ensure smooth operation without binding. Doors shall have 1.5 mm
clearance at head and jambs and 6 mm over finished floor surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Undercut doors where shown and as required to accommodate floor finish thickness.
.4
Install hardware in accordance with hardware supplier's instructions.
.5
Adjust operable parts to ensure proper door operation.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
08210-3
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM INTERIOR STORM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Sealants, except as specified herein:
Section 07920
.2
Wood Window and Door Restoration:
Section 08590
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
Sections includes: provision of custom fabricated interior single glazed storm units for existing wood
window openings.
.2
Units to be double hung vertical opening to allow access and operation of both top and bottom existing
wood sash. Interior storm panels to include integral operating insect screen panel. All storm panels to
be fully removable for cleaning and maintenance.
1.4
.1
Design systems to withstand, without any detrimental effects to appearance and performance, wind
loads and temperature range expected in geographical area of this project (OBC climatic information
50 year probability), unless specified otherwise.
.2
Design storm window system to be pressure equalized and drained to the exterior.
.3
system.
.1
Wind loads, positive and negative.
.2
.3
Movement, deflection and creep of building structural frame.
.4
glass manufacturer.
.5
Windows and vents shall meet or exceed the following minimum performance criteria, contained in
CAN/CSA-A440-00:
.6
1.5
.1
Air tightness: A3
.2
Water tightness: B7
.3
Wind load resistance: C5
.4
Condensation resistance: I50+
Finishes: - shall meet or exceed AAMA 2603 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 1998.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Work of this Section shall be executed by fabricator and installer approved by system manufacturer
and with a minimum of five years experience in the type of work specified herein, having adequate
equipment and skill to expediently complete the work in an efficient manner. Only products from
manufacturers listed will be accepted unless written approval is used by the Consultant.
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08520-1
.2
Fabrication tolerances: based on site measurements of existing openings, overall height, width and
diagonal dimensions of frames shall be within the following tolerances:
Dimension of 2 m and less: ±2 mm
Dimension more than 2 m: ±3.5 mm.
.3
Caulking: comply with requirements of Section 07920 except where specified otherwise herein.
.4
Glazing: comply with IGMAC recommendations and with requirements of Section 08800 except where
specified otherwise herein.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit detailed shop drawings showing fabrication, assembly and installation requirements. Show
dimensions, profiles and materials, joint locations and sizes; connections; expansion allowances,
reinforcing; drainage paths, air and vapour barrier continuity; anchorage systems. Show details full
size. Shop drawings shall bear review stamp of system manufacturer.
.2
Upon Consultant's request, submit sample section and assemble corner of each framing system used.
.3
Submit duplicate sets of samples minimum 100 x 100 mm of each type of metal finish specified.
.4
Upon Consultant's request submit test report from recognized testing agency verifying that systems
provided will meet design and performance requirements.
1.7
WARRANTY
.1
At no cost to Owner remedy any defects in work of this Section for a period of 5 years from date of
Substantial Performance. For the purposes of this paragraph, defects shall include but not necessarily
be limited to:
.1
.2
Air infiltration/exfiltration in excess of requirements specified.
.3
.4
.5
.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEMS
.1
Storm Windows: one of the following systems:
.1
Series 500 by Mon-Ray Custom Storm Windows 1-800-544-3646
.2
Series HOL by Allied Custom Storm Windows 1-800-445-5411.
.3
Acceptable alternative as approved by the Consultant.
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08520-2
2.2
COMPONENTS
.1
Master Frame and Panel and Sash Frame Members: Extruded aluminum AA 6063-T5 and 6063T6 alloy with wall thickness not less than 0.062 inches (1.6 mm); miter corners and join with corner
keys.
.2
Corner Keys: Extruded aluminum.
.3
Sill Expander: Where necessary to fit existing sloping sill, provide H-shaped extruded aluminum
member below master frame with weep holes.
.4
Finish: Baked acrylic enamel, complying with AAMA 2603, electrostatically applied; 15 year
warranty. : Color: Colonial White.
.5
Screens: Extruded aluminum frame of same type of construction and finish as panel frames;
screen cloth held in place with vinyl splines.
.1
Frame Dimensions: 9.5 mm thick by 27 mm wide.
.2
Screen Cloth: Aluminum wire, 18 by 16 mesh; charcoal color.
.6
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, nuts, washers and other fasteners incorporated into aluminum sections:
ANSI Series 304 stainless steel..
.7
Hardware: Stainless Steel ANSI Series 304
.8
Fasteners:
.9
Glass Type: 6 mm Tempered float glass CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, clear.
.10
Low-E coating: PPG Solarban 60 or alternate approved by Consultant.
.11
Glazing Gaskets: Removable and reusable virgin vinyl glazing splines with neatly mitered corners.
.12
Weatherstripping: Pile type for operating units.
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Provide units that fit existing windows without gaps of more than 2 mm) in each unit.
.2
Verify actual measurements of openings by field measurement before fabrication; show recorded
measurements on shop drawings.
.3
Allow for out-of-square and irregular conditions.
.4
Verify frame and sill conditions of each opening before fabrication; provide appropriate fabrication
details to suit existing conditions.
.5
Vertically Sliding Storm Windows: Interior mounted, aluminum framed vertically sliding sash with dual
track aluminum head and jamb frame and removable PVC dual track; lift-out sash, and lift out sliding
insect screen.
.1
Sash Frame Sightline: 25 mm.
.2
Sash Frame Depth: 9.5 mm.
.3
Frame Head and Jambs: 19 mm wide sightline, 30 mm deep.
.4
Locks: Provide swivel lock on all units.
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08520-3
.5
Weatherstripping: Pile weatherstripping in each frame channel and on meeting stiles of
sash, secured to prevent movement, shrinkage, and loss; foam weatherstripping between
back of frame and sill and existing construction.
.6
Provide half sliding self-storing screen for each active sash opening.
.7
Removable Panels: Easily removable, held in place with cam-action clips providing positive
seal between master frame and panel frame; with full width bottom rail lift handle.
.8
Mounting: Interior.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Erect and secure framing plumb, square and level, free from warp, twist and superimposed loads.
.2
Anchor intermediate vertical frame members to structure above as required. Where support for intermediate vertical frame members is not available directly above head, provide frame extensions to
.3
.4
.5
.6
Use concealed fastenings and anchorages in all locations. Exposed fastenings, where unavoidable,
must be clearly identified on shop drawings, and require Consultant's approval prior to fabrication of
work.
3.2
GLAZING
.1
Glaze openings in accordance with window and glass manufacturer's recommendation so as to
achieve weathertight installation.
.2
Unless otherwise indicated provide insulating glass at all exterior locations.
.3
Provide a dry / dry glazing system using glazing gaskets under constant compression.
.4
Provide continuous glazing sealant heel bead; do not cover or fill vent holes.
3.4
SEALANTS
.1
Seal joints in accordance with system and sealant manufacturers' recommendations. Prime contact
surfaces prior to installation of sealant.
.2
3.7
.1
using soft cloths.
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08520-4
.2
Just prior to takeover of building by Owner, check opening/closing and weatherstripping and, if
necessary adjust or replace components to ensure proper and smooth operation, and weathertight
closure.
END
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08520-5
SECTION 08590 - WOOD WINDOW AND DOOR RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Section 06400
.2
Aluminium Interior Storm Windows:
Section 08520
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
Work of this Section is the comprehensive refurbishing or recreation of existing heritage exterior wood
windows and wood doors including the provision of replacement wood windows, wood doors and
frames to match existing as shown on Drawings and Window Schedule.
.2
The preparation for installation of new interior aluminium storm sash at all existing windows.
.3
Work shall include preparation, disassembly, removal of all paint including lead based paint,
reconstruction of sash, repairs to frames, operable sash, sills and trim, reinstallation of components
and hardware, glazing reinstallation or replacement and repair/reinstallation or replacement of bronze
weatherstripping. Drawings and Schedule indicates scope of work per window and door, and this
Specification describes in detail, each operation.
.4
Re-assessment of the scope of work will be performed after paint removal is complete, modifying the
schedules and contract based on submitted unit prices.
.5
The scope of work will include the following:
1.4
.1
Removal of all existing doors leafs and sash both fixed and operative.
.2
Strip paint of all wood surfaces on door leafs, sash, frames interior and exterior trim. Note
that portions of the exterior trim has been stripped and primed by others.
.3
Remove all broken glazing.
.4
Remove and conserve all original hardware.
.5
Repair/replace all doors, sash, frames, trim and hardware as defined in the schedules.
.6
Reglaze broken glass in all doors and sash.
.7
Repaint all doors, sash, frames and trim.
.8
Reinstall all doors and sash in fully operating condition.
.9
Co-ordinate with fabrication and installation of interior storms.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Work of this Section shall be executed by recognized subtrade with a minimum of 10 years experience
in Heritage wood window and door restorations
.2
Provide written credentials for Subtrade listed to perform the Work in this Section to Consultant for
review.
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08590-1
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
Shop Drawings:
.1
Provide shop drawings showing field measured dimensions of replacement windows,
complete with full scale profiles.
.2
Samples:
.1
Submit samples including unpainted samples of rebuilt window, showing jointing profiles and
sample glazing installed. Profiles to match existing sash and frame profiles.
.3
Method Statement:
.1
Provide written method statement listing out all procedures for window restoration and
replacement, including all proposed materials, products and tools.
.4
Mockups
.1
Provide mock-up of stripping, repair and refinishing of 1 full window including frame, sash
and exterior and interior trim. Test window to be selected by Consultant.
1.6
WARRANTY
.1
Warrant work of this Section against defects and deficiencies for period of 2 years in accordance with
General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become
apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
.2
Wood for Replacement Assemblies, Replacement Members and Dutchman Repairs
.1
Softwood: Select grade, quarter-sawn White or Red Pine, Material shall be suitable to
receive stain and varnish and of uniform colour, grain, figure, and character, and free of
mineral streaks, grain ruptures, knots or loose textures. Match grain to adjacent work.
.2
Hardwood: Select grade, quarter-sawn White Oak Material shall be suitable to receive stain
and varnish and of uniform colour, grain, figure, and character, and free of mineral streaks,
grain ruptures, knots or loose textures. Match grain orientation to adjacent work.
.3
Where possible, use recycled first growth wood to match species, grain and age of existing
adjacent material. Match species of existing adjacent wood. Inform Consultant if existing
wood is different from specified replacement species.
Wood accessories and repair products
.1
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, nuts, washers and other to be ANSI Series 300 stainless steel
.2
Adhesive: Structural Epoxy Adhesive 552 by ConServ Epoxy LLC.
.3
Consolidant: Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100 by ConServ Epoxy LLC
.4
Filler: Flexible Epoxy Patch 200 by ConServ Epoxy LLC
.5
Sealers: Penetrating Sealer by Sansin
.6
Preservatives: Sansin Boracol
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08590-2
.3
.4
.5
Glazing and Glass:
.1
Exterior Single Glass: 5 mm thick float glass conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, matching
existing. Glazing Quality.
.2
Interior Bevelled Single Glass: Bevelled and polished 6 mm thick polished sheet glass with
25 mm bevel widths matched to existing conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Glazing
Quality
Glazing Accessory Materials:
.1
Setting Blocks: 6mm x 100mm soft lead or extruded 80-90 Durometer..
.2
Glazing Putty: "E-Z-Glaze" by Lastic Products Limited, Mississauga, ON.
.3
Lateral Shims: Neoprene, silicone or EPDM, 40 - 60 Durometer, 4" long or as required.
.4
Glazier's Points: Triangular solid zinc.
Caulking Materials:
.1
Sealant: multi-part chemical curing type to CAN/CGSB-19.24. M90; acceptable product:
Tremco Dymeric or one part low modulus silicone: Dow Corning 790 or type recommended
by system manufacturer; custom colours selected by Consultant.
.2
.3
Joint backing: non-gassing foam rope, compressed minimum 25% when installed: Sof-Rod
by Tremco.
.6
Paint Remover: "Peel Away #7" by Dumond Chemicals Inc., "Back-To-Nature" `2' by Dynacraft
.7
Putty Softener: "Putty Softener" by Sommer and Maca Ltd., and distributed by Joseph Taylor,
Woodbridge. (905) 798-4918.
.8
Acceptable Stripping and Putty Removal Tools
.1
Paint Removal: Heat gun with edging shield
.2
Putty Removal:
.9
Weather Stripping: #2B (bronze) by Unique Sash Balance Company Limited., 8301 rue Marconi, Ville
d'Anjou, P.Q. H1J 2W4. (Tel (514) 493-1353). Match existing formed profiles. Fasteners: No. 4
bronze screws.
.10
Window Hardware: Existing hardware to be reused wherever possible. Provide for replacement of all
sash latches with solid bronze camming type latches, and provide 2 100mm bronze “D” pulls per sash.
.11
Window Door Hardware: Existing hardware to be reused wherever possible. Provide for removal,
cleaning and reinstallation of all mortise blocks, door knobs and levers, surface mount pin latches,
dogging latches, door stops etc. Provide matching replacement hardware where missing or damaged
beyond repair.
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
Rotary Putty Chaser – Prazi Model No. PR9000
Fein Oscillating tool with grout saw attachment.
08590-3
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
2.4
Replacement Sash and Doors
.1
Mill wood component sections and shapes as per profiles shown in drawings to match muntin
frame profiles and jointing of the existing windows and doors.
.2
Window and Door components to be assembled with traditional wood wedge, pin and dowel
method of fixing joints, allowing for full disassembly and reassembly.
.3
Prime and first coat paint components prior to glazing.
.3
Factory install glazing as per 3.5.
FINISHES
.1
Exposed wood surfaces: sealed, primed and painted as per Section 09900
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.3
.1
Become thoroughly familiar with and comply with guidelines for workers' protection,
procedures and waste handling as required for Lead Paint Removal.
.2
Remove glazed doors for restoration. Number and tag each door and each frame in
accordance with Drawing layout and Schedules. Emboss stamp on head side of door rail.
.3
Carefully remove aluminium frames sash and storms being replaced with restoration wood
windows and sash.
.4
Carefully break paint seals by slitting seals with knife. Where necessary, dissolve paint bond
with paint remover.
.2
Number and tag each sash (upper and lower) and each frame in accordance with Drawing
layout and Schedules. Emboss stamp on jamb side of sash stile.
.5
Carefully and gently remove stop and parting bead on one side, tag and relocate for shop
repair or storage.
.6
Carefully remove complete upper and lower sash units of windows, and relocate for shop
repair or storage. Immediately install temporary shield to prevent penetration of weather,
insects and animals.
.7
Protect sash on each side with cardboard while handled and stored.
.8
Remove all hardware, including pulley boxes, code with window number and store for
restoration and reinstallation.
.10
Install weathertight plywood hoarding in window and door openings during time that doors
and sash are being restoreded or replaced.
PUTTY, GLASS AND PAINT REMOVAL
.1
Putty Removal
.1
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
Only broken glass units or glass units with deteriorated putty to be removed. Assume 25% of
putty joint will require replacement.
08590-4
.2
.3
.4
3.4
.2
To remove deteriorated putty and conserve existing pane, extreme care must be exercised.
Soften putty using specified putty softener and/or heat gun with shielding to protect glass.
Employ rotary putty chaser tool or oscillating grout tool to remove main bulk of putty. Pry and
scrape residual putty away without levering against glass. Remove all glaziers points prior
to lifting glass out of opening. Loosen perimeter of glass from bedding putty with thin putty
knife. Without forcing the pane, carefully push glazing out of opening. Clean residual paint
and putty from glass, tag the pane and its location in the sash and store.
.2
For broken edges of glazing, carefully remove putty using putty softener before using hand
tools to ensure sash is not gouged.
.3
Clean rebates and beads of all residual putty.
Paint Removal
.1
All paint to removed from frames inside and out, adjacent trim, doors sash and hardware.
.2
Removal methods by heat and scraping, chemical agent with poultice and scraping or
combination.
.3
Remove paint down to bare wood or to original primer and top wood surface.
.4
Lightly sand surfaces smooth after paint removal.
Dutchman Repairs
.1
Provide Dutchman repairs on stile, rail, frames or sills where component has general
structural integrity and dutchman repair would be more economical or practical than full
replacement. Review locations with consultant.
.2
Precisely cut out damaged or compromised material back to sound wood. Tightly fit
dutchman to have full contact with all rebate surfaces and exterior surfaces are flush or
slightly proud of adjacent existing surfaces.
.3
Full coat contact surfaces with adhesive, clamp and brad-pin (recess heads) in place. After
full curing remove all excess surface adhesive, sand and fair to adjacent surfaces. Fill
fastener holes.
Epoxy Consolidation and Fills
.1
Employ epoxy consolident and fills only when replacement or dutchman repair are not
practical or economical. Review locations with Consultant.
.2
Apply consolident and filler as per manufacturer’s instructions with close attention to required
temperature, humidity and surface preparation.
.3
Allow for full cure time as per manufacturer’s instructions.
.4
Sand smooth removing all excess residual epoxy material.
WINDOW AND DOOR RESTORATION
.1
Window Sash
.1
After paint and putty stripping, replace damaged, worm eaten, rotted or missing sash
components. Do not consolidate components unless directed by Consultant. Replacement
components to be fixed in manner matching original assembly. Replacement sash to be
assembled in the same manner as the originals.
.2
Tighten or replace draw pins and wedges as required to tighten sash framing. Do not glue or
use consolidants or wood swelling agents. Intent is to maintain ability to dismantle windows
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08590-5
at future date for repair.
.2
.3
.3
Fill dents, scratches and gouges to fair surfaces to even plane. Sand smooth after filler has
cured.
.4
Prime all surfaces. Apply base finishing paint coat.
.5
Reglaze using new bevel glazing or new float glazing. Refer to glazing schedule specified
herein. Bed glazing in full putty bed, minimum 2 mm depth. Set glazing points minimum 6
per pane. Apply finishing putty stop, bevel tooled to match rebate edges of the muntins,
stiles and rails. Ensure bevel face is flat, even and smooth. Mitre tool at 90° junctions.
Allow putty to cure to firm, paintable consistency.
.6
Mask glazing and apply final paint coats over lapping putty onto glazing by 1.5 mm. Remove
masking immediately after paint has reached initial tack. If beyond that state, razor score
paint at masking before removal to prevent skinning.
Door Leafs
.1
After paint and putty stripping, replace damaged, worm eaten, rotted or missing door
components. Do not consolidate components unless directed by Consultant. Provide
Dutchman repairs where applicable. Replacement components to be fixed in manner
matching original assembly. Replacement doors to be assembled in the same manner as
the originals.
.2
Tighten or replace draw pins and wedges as required to tighten door framing. Do not glue or
use consolidants or wood swelling agents. Intent is to maintain ability to dismantle windows
at future date for repair.
.3
Fill dents, scratches and gouges to fair surfaces to even plane. Sand smooth after filler has
cured.
.3
Prime all surfaces. Apply base finishing paint coat.
.4
Reglaze using, new bevel glazing or new float glazing. Refer to glazing schedule specified
herein. Bed glazing in full putty bed, minimum 2 mm depth. Set glazing points minimum 6
per pane. Apply finishing putty stop, bevel tooled to match rebate edges of the stiles and
rails. Ensure bevel face is flat, even and smooth. Mitre tool at 90° junctions. Allow putty to
cure to firm, paintable consistency.
.5
Mask glazing and apply final paint coats over lapping putty onto glazing by 1.5 mm. Remove
masking immediately after paint has reached initial tack. If beyond that state, razor score
paint at masking before removal to prevent skinning.
Window and Door Frames and Trim
.1
.2
.3
Fill dents, fastener holes, scratches and gouges to fair surfaces to even plane. Sand smooth
after filler has cured.
.3
Prime all surfaces. Apply base and finishing paint coats.
.4
Install all refurbished or replacement hardware, in conjunction with reinstallation of doors and
sash.
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
After paint stripping, replace damaged, worm eaten, rotted or missing components. Do not
consolidate components unless directed by Consultant. Provide Dutchman repairs where
applicable. Replacement components to be fixed in manner matching exiting method.
Tighten or replace draw pins and wedges as required to tighten framing. Do not glue or use
consolidants or wood swelling agents. Intent is to maintain ability to dismantle components
at future date for maintenance, cleaning or repair.
08590-6
.4
Hardware Refurbishment
.1
Clean all hardware removing all paint and corrosion. Replace missing or damaged
components with matching. Source or fabricate replacement parts casting replicas from
existing parts.
.2
Replace all steel and slot head screws with bronze Robertson headed screws of matching
size and head shape. Replace exposed flat headed ctsk screws with oval head ctsk heads.
.3
Predrill all screw holes
.3
Provide bronze screw and escutcheon fasteners for all removal components i.e. parting
strips, weight access panel, stops and sash blocks.
.4
Replace seized or non-operative counterweight pulleys.
.5
Replace all frayed or painted counterweight cords.
.6
Remove, strip and clean, reinstall or replace bronze weather stripping beads. Lubricate with
paraffin paste wax.
-
3.9
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
.1
Test operate all doors and sash ensuring smooth, unforced operation of all components. Ensure full
contact with sealing surfaces. Ensure that there is no paint adherence between any operable or
removable components.
.2
Thoroughly clean all glazing, sash, door and frame components, prior to installation of storm windows.
END
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
08590-7
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Hardware for cabinetwork:
Section 06300
.2
Installation of steel door hardware:
Section 08110
.3
Installation of aluminium door hardware:
Section 08120
.4
Installation of wood door hardware:
Section 08710
.5
Wood Window and Door Restoration:
Section 08590
.6
Electric power for automatic door operators:
1.3
Division 16
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Meet requirements of Ontario Building Code and other applicable regulations.
.2
Use ULC or WHI listed and labelled hardware for doors located within fire rated assemblies.
.3
Upon completion of finish hardware installation, hardware supplier's qualified representative shall
inspect work and shall certify in writing that all items and their installation are in accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents and are functioning properly. This document shall be included in
maintenance manuals.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Upon Consultant's request submit samples of finish hardware.
.3
Check and verify hardware schedule prepared by door hardware consultant.
.4
Furnish other Sections with templates required for hardware preparation and installation. Issue
templates when requested so as not to cause any delays but not before hardware list has received
final review by Consultant.
.5
Prepare and submit keying schedule.
.6
Upon completion of installation submit 2 sets of special adjusting tools and wrenches, and three
copies of instruction sheets and maintenance manuals for locks, closers, and exit devices.
1.6
PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
.1
.2
Deliver each hardware item packaged separately in individual containers with necessary screws, keys,
instructions and installation templates.
.3
Mark each container with item number corresponding to number shown on hardware schedule with
respective door number.
.4
Store hardware in dry, lockable area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR HARDWARE
22/09/2011
KMAI
08710-1
.1
Supply only of door hardware is covered in cash allowance, included in Section 01210.
.2
Hardware shall comply with requirements of jurisdictional authorities.
.3
All door closers shall have back checking features and shall be of proper size to operate door
efficiently.
.4
Confirm all kick plate and threshold sizes before ordering them.
.5
Do not use wall stops on drywall.
.6
Exposed screws for installing hardware shall have Phillips or Robertson heads.
.7
Confirm degree of swing for door holders, closers.
.8
The following products may be used. Include for preparation of doors and frames accordingly.
2.2
.1
Butt hinges: full mortise type; 4 hinges per door.
.2
Locks and latch sets: mortise type with through-bolted trim.
.3
Exit devices: rim type, flat bar push and pad style; dead latch feature at exterior doors.
.4
Door closers: surface mounted.
.5
Overhead stop: where wall stops cannot be used, surface mounted except where door
closer necessitates concealed mounting.
KEYING
.1
Locks shall be masterkeyed to existing system as directed by Owner.
.2
Locks shall be keyed alike or different as directed by Owner.
.3
All master keys shall be stamped "Do Not Duplicate".
.4
Locks and cylinders shall be construction masterkeyed.
.5
Provide master keys, sub-master keys, group keys and individual keys as directed by the Owner.
.6
Keys shall be provided in individual envelopes, properly identified with door number, location and key
coding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Meet requirements of ANSI / DHI A115.1G-94, "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware".
.2
Confirm locations and mounting heights of finish hardware with Consultant.
.2
Install finish hardware in accordance with hardware suppliers directions. Ensure that hardware is
installed correctly. Issue instructions if required to Sections concerned.
.3
Unless otherwise directed by the Consultant, or unless otherwise dictated by glass height or rail
location, install finish hardware at the following heights above finish floor:
Locksets and Latchsets
Deadlocks
Exit Devices
Push Plates
22/09/2011
KMAI
1025 mm to centre of strike
1200 mm to centre of strike
900 mm to underside of push bar
1050 mm to centre of plate
08710-2
Guard Bars
Door Pulls
1070 mm to centre of bar
1050 mm to centre of pull
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
08710-3
SECTION 08810 - MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Section 08110
.2
Aluminium Doors and Frames:
Section 08120
.3
Section 08210
.4
Section 08590
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Follow recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing Association (USA) "Glazing Manual" latest
edition.
.2
Every pane of glass shall be factory labelled and label shall remain in place until final cleaning. Safety
glass shall have permanent identification.
1.4
WARRANTY
.1
At no cost to Owner, replace mirrors should defects in silvering occur within a period of five (5) years
from date of Substantial Completion.
.2
At no cost to Owner, replace factory sealed insulating window units should obstruction of vision
develop due to dust or film forming on inner glass surfaces within a period of ten (10) years from date
of Substantial Performance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Setting blocks: neoprene, Shore 'A' durometer hardness of 70 to 90 points; spacer shims, 40 to 50
points, as recommended by glass manufacturer.
.2
Glazing sealant: one part polysulphide to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87 or one part silicone to
CAN/CGSB-19.18-M87.
.3
Glazing tape: polyisobutylene tape; acceptable product: Tremco 440 tape.
.4
Glazing gasket: Tremco Vision Strip; colour selected by Consultant.
.5
Tempered glass: minimum 6 mm thick fully tempered float glass to CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90. Tempered
glass identification must be sandblasted into glass and shall be visible after installation.
.6
Firelite quartz: 5 mm thick polished, frosted glass to CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90v to screen W222. Wired
glass: 6 mm thick polished, clear glass with square mesh to CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90 to be used in all
other fire rated glazing applications.
.7
Float glass: clear float glass to CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Glazing Quality; 6 mm thick unless otherwise
shown.
.8
Insulating glass: as specified in Section 08910.
.9
Laminated Safety Glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1, laminate of 0.030 PVB layer, clear; 6mm thick
minimum; or thicker as recommended by engineer or manufacturer for larger glass areas.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08810-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GLASS INSTALLATION GENERAL
o
.1
Do not glaze when ambient or surface temperature is less than 5 C. Ensure that glazing rabbets, stops
and glass are dry, free of frost, grease, oil, dust, rust and other substances detrimental to adhesion of
compounds and sealants.
.2
Provide clearance at perimeter edge of glass on all four sides, minimum equal to glass thickness.
Accurately cut glass to fit openings, allowing for expansion in accordance with glass manufacturer's
recommendations.
.3
Provide sealer space between face of glass and glazing stops of minimum 3 mm.
.4
Clean sealing surfaces at perimeter of glass and sealing surfaces of rabbets and stop beads before
applying glazing tapes, gaskets and compounds. Use solvents and cleaning agents recommended by
manufacturer of sealing materials.
.5
Install glazing tapes uniformly with accurately formed corners and bevels. Ensure that proper contact
is made with glass and rabbet interfaces.
.6
Set glass on setting blocks, spaced as recommended by glass manufacturer. Provide at least one
setting block at quarter points from each corner.
.7
Centre glass in glazing rabbet to maintain specified clearances at perimeter on all four sides. Maintain
centred position of glass in rabbet and provide the required sealer thickness on both sides of glass.
.8
Use spacers and shims in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations.
.9
Carefully remove glazing stops and reinstall after glazing.
.10
Mark each pane of glass to indicate presence of glass.
3.2
INTERIOR GLAZING
.1
3.3
Unless otherwise indicated glaze interior openings using the following method:
.1
Apply glazing tape to permanent stop; centre glass in opening and set on setting blocks;
apply glass and press against tape.
.2
Apply glazing tape to removable stops and install stops. Trim tape for neat appearance.
EXTERIOR GLAZING (to doors, refer to 08910 for glazed curtain wall)
.1
Unless otherwise indicated glaze exterior openings as follows:
.1
Apply glazing tape to permanent stop; butt tape joints and weld together; do not overlap
joints; daub tape corners with sealant.
.2
Set glass on setting blocks, align edges and press home to ensure adhesion at all points.
.3
Apply heel bead of sealant around perimeter of glass, maintaining 5 mm bite to glass and
positive bond to frame. Completely seal void around glass edges. Sealant shall partially fill
channel between glass and removable stop.
.4
Install removable stops; insert spacer shims between glass and stops at approximately 610
mm o.c. not less than 6 mm below sight lines. Fill remaining void with glazing compound or
sealant to sight line and trim to clean line leaving no voids or depressions.
.5
Glazing gaskets may be installed in lieu of backfilling with sealant or glazing compound after
22/09/2011
KMAI
08810-2
setting removable stops.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Remove dirt, scum, plaster, paint spatter, and other harmful and deleterious matter from glass
promptly and completely, before they establish tight adhesion.
.2
Avoid using abrasives, steel wool, razor blades, solvents, alkaline or other harsh cleaning agents.
.3
Remove glazing compound droppings promptly from all surfaces as the work progresses.
.4
Replace scratched or otherwise damaged glass.
3.5
SCHEDULE
.1
.2
Provide glazing for the following elements and components:
.1
Steel doors and screens.
.2
Wood doors
.3
Other glazing required.
Provide the following glass:
.1
Wire glass: fire rated components.
.2
Insulating glass: where indicated.
.3
Float glass: where no particular type of glass is indicated.
.4
Provide glass thickness as indicated. Where no thickness is indicated, provide 6 mm thick
glass.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
08810-3
SECTION 08910 - ALUMINUM CURTAINWALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
New Masonry
Section 04200
.2
Sprayed urethane air barrier sealant at frame perimeters:
Section 07200
.3
Air Vapour Barriers
Section 07270
.4
Aluminum doors and frames:
Section 08120
.5
Supply of aluminum door hardware:
Section 08710
.6
Section 08810
.7
Electrical
1.3
.1
Supply to other Sections anchors, inserts and items required to be built into work of other Sections.
.2
Ensure accurate setting of built-in items; where necessary provide templates, diagrams or other
suitable means of instruction.
1.4
.1
Design systems to withstand, without any detrimental effects to appearance and performance, wind
loads and temperature range expected in geographical area of this project, (OBC climatic information,
50 year probability), unless specified otherwise.
.2
Design systems to perform as an effective air and vapour barrier.
.3
system.
.1
.2
Movement deflection and creep of building structural frame.
.4
glass manufacturer.
.5
Design system based on rain screen principles, having all cavities outboard of the air seal, pressure
equalized and drained to the exterior.
.6
Prevent water infiltration through curtainwall systems, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331,
with static pressure difference across system of 500 Pa.
.7
Limit air infiltration and exfiltration through curtainwall systems of maximum 0.0003 m³/s.m² under a
static pressure of 75 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
.8
Appearance:
.1
Fasteners and anchors: concealed.
.2
Joints between components: hairline, with adjacent surfaces accurately aligned.
.3
Glazing joints to be capless exposed structural silicon
22/09/2011
KMAI
Division 16
08910-1
.9
1.5
Vibration: sunscreen shall not vibrate or rattle.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Work of this Section shall be executed by fabricator and installer approved by manufacturer and with a
minimum of 10 years experience in the type of work specified herein, having adequate equipment and
skill to expediently complete the work in an efficient manner. Only products from manufacturers listed
(see 2.1) will be accepted unless written approval is issued by the Consultant.
.2
Fabrication Tolerances: overall height, width and diagonal dimensions of frames shall be within the
following tolerances:
Dimension of 2 m and less: +/- 2 mm
Dimension more than 2 m: +/- 3.5 mm
.3
Caulking: comply with requirements of Section 07920 except where specifically stated otherwise
herein.
.4
Glazing: Comply with requirements of Section 08810 except where specifically stated otherwise
herein.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Prior to preparing shop drawings submit a letter from the manufacturer certifying that the subcontractor
has issued a purchase order, letter of intent or otherwise entered into a contract with the manufacturer.
The letter shall be dated and include the:
.1
Name of the project.
.2
Name of the subcontractor.
.3
Complete list of products.
.4
Manufacturers contact with telephone and telefax numbers.
.3
Submit detailed shop drawings. Shop drawings shall bear manufacturer's review stamp. Shop
drawings shall bear seal and signature of professional engineer licensed to practice in Ontario.
.4
Upon Consultant's request submit test report from recognized testing agency verifying that systems
provided will meet design and performance requirements.
.5
Upon Consultant's request submit sample section and assembled corner of each window unit / curtain
wall used.
.6
Submit 2 sets of samples minimum 50 x 100 mm of each type of metal finish specified.
1.7
WARRANTY
.1
At no cost to Owner remedy any defects in work of this Section for a period of 5 years from date of
Total Performance. For the purposes of this paragraph, defects shall include but not necessarily be
limited to:
.1
.2
Air infiltration / exfiltration in excess of requirements specified.
.3
22/09/2011
KMAI
08910-2
.2
1.8
.4
.5
.6
Failure of insulating glass perimeter seal.
.7
At no cost to Owner, replace factory sealed window units should obstruction of vision develop due to
dust or film forming on inner glass surfaces within a period of 10 years from date of Total Performance.
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Tag curtain wall components at shop with identification marks indicating proper location for installation.
.3
Deliver, store and handle components so as to prevent damage, distortion and corrosion. Store
components in an enclosed dry and protected area. Stack curtain wall components to prevent twisting.
Do not enclose components in plastic covers without venting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS
.1
2.2
Curtain wall framing one of the following systems:
.1
Alumicor HS2700 (SSG) System
.2
ClearwallTM SSI (Screw Spline Interface) by Kawneer
MATERIALS
.1
.2
Framing Components:
.1
Aluminum extrusions: AA 6063-T5 alloy.
.2
Aluminum plate and sheet: AA 1100 alloy.
.3
Screws, bolts, nuts, washers, rivets and other fasteners, incorporated into aluminum
sections: aluminum or ANSI Series 300 stainless steel, or hot dip galvanized steel.
.4
Anchoring devices: aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel.
.5
Steel: CAN/CSA-G40.21-04 Grade 300W structural quality steel and Grade 350W, Class H
tubular members and ASTM A446 Grade A sheet steel.
Glass and Glazing Materials:
.1
Setting blocks: Neoprene, Shore "A" durometer hardness of 80 to 90 points; spacer shims,
60 to 70 points, as recommended by glass manufacturer.
.2
Thermal barrier between pressure plate and mullion extrusions: extruded hard PVC.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08910-3
.3
Glazing tape: preshimmed polyisobutylene: Polyshim II Tape by Tremco.
.4
Glazing wedges and splines: solid extruded neoprene or EPDM having Shore "A" Durometer
hardness of 60 to 70 points as recommended by window manufacturer.
.5
Low-E coated glass: PPG Solarban 60.
.6
Insulating glass: factory sealed double glazed, to CAN/CGSB-12.8-97:
.1
Nominal thickness: 25 mm.
.2
Glass:
.1
.3
.4
.3
Low emissivity coating (low-E) on No. 3 surface.
.4
Space between glass: argon filled.
.5
Warm edge spacer:
.7
Float glass: CAN/CGSB-12.3-91, Glazing Quality, clear.
.8
Tempered glass: CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, fully tempered clear and tinted, minimum 6 mm
thick.
.9
Spandrel glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.9-M91, heat strengthened clear float glass with ceramic
frit coating on No.3 surface: Duraspan by Guardian or equivalent product by other
manufacturer approved by consultant; up to 5 custom colours selected by Consultant.
.10
Coloured laminated glass: clear laminated float glass with coloured PVB interlayer: to
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90; interlayer: 0.76 mm thick PVB to ASTM C1172: Vanceva by Solutia
Inc. (1-877-674-1233, colours selected by Consultant).
.11
Glass thickness: unless otherwise shown: 6 mm inside and outside.
Spandrel Back-up Panels:
.1
Galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A526, zinc coating designation Z275 (ASTM A525).
.2
Aluminum sheet: AA110-H14 or AA3003 - H14 alloy, anodizing quality.
.3
Insulation: RXL 40 by Roxul Inc., minimum RSI 2.3.
.4
Insulation clips: gunwelded steel or aluminum pin and disc type.
.5
Adhesives: as recommended by manufacturer of material to be bonded.
Caulking Materials:
.1
Sealant: multi-part chemical curing type to CAN/CGSB 19.24-M90; acceptable product:
Tremco Dymeric; or one part silicone: Dow Corning 790; colour selected by Consultant.
22/09/2011
KMAI
All glazing: clear tempered glass outside and clear float glass
inside. Exterior lite to project by 25 mm at vertical edges to
accommodate capless installation.
08910-4
.5
2.3
.2
.3
Joint backing: foamed, closed cell polyethylene rope, minimum 12 mm wider than joint,
compressed when installed: “Sof-Rod” by Industrial Thermo Polymers.
Miscellaneous Materials:
.1
Bituminous paint: alkali resistant asphaltic enamel.
.2
Bedding compound: non-hardening and non-skinning.
FABRICATION
.1
Aluminum components shall be extruded sections and shapes, unless otherwise specified.
.2
Curtain wall framing shall consist of tubular inner aluminum section reinforced if necessary, thermal
break, pressure plate without any exterior cap achieving an all-glass monolithic aesthetic in a field
glazed; screw spline application (5/8” (15.9mm) exterior vertical and horizontal weatherseal sightline
and 2-1/2” (63.5mm) interior metal sightline). Use machine screws to fasten pressure plates; selfdrilling, self-tapping screws are not permitted.
.3
Size units to allow for structural deflection of surrounding construction.
.4
Design work so that it will not be distorted, nor fasteners overstressed, from expansion and contraction
of metal.
.5
Reinforce members as required to withstand loads and to maintain deflection within allowable limits.
.6
Internally reinforce framing members where work of other Sections is to be fastened thereto. Provide
heavy duty reinforcing at all door and frame hardware fastening points.
.7
Fastenings shall be concealed where possible. Where concealed fastenings cannot be used, use
countersunk flathead screws. Exposed fastenings shall match base metal on which they occur.
.8
Mechanically joined sections shall have hairline joints.
.9
Spandrel back-up panels: brake form insulation back-up panels from minimum 1 mm thick galvanized
sheet steel at concealed locations and of minimum 1 mm thick aluminum with finish matching adjacent
framing at exposed locations, designed to engage into framing in manner maintaining air and vapour
barrier in all locations. Install back-up panels into framing and provide air seal, at shop, not in the
field.
.10
Metal spandrel face panels: fabricate panels to profile indicated of minimum 3 mm thick aluminum
sheet. Exposed face of panel shall be flat, smooth, free of waves, buckles, dents and other defects,
meeting the following fabrication tolerances:
.1
Panel bow: 0.2% of panel dimension, up to maximum 5 mm.
.2
Width or length ± 1 mm up to 1.2 m, ± 2 mm from 1.2 m to 2.4 m.
.3
Squareness: maximum 5 mm difference between diagonal measurements.
.4
Camber: maximum 1 mm.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08910-5
.11
Fabricate extruded or formed aluminum sills profiles indicated to suit wall condition and minimum 3
mm thick. Provide drip deflectors at sill ends and at abutting vertical surfaces. Open ends of sills shall
be fitted with neatly applied closure plates. Anchors shall be designed not to work loose after
installation. Unless otherwise detailed provide flush slip joint at intermediate sill joints.
.12
Closures, covers, flashings and trim shall be extruded or formed to profiles shown and unless
otherwise shown, minimum 2 mm thick.
.13
Make provision to accommodate vertical expansion and contraction of curtain wall framing without
causing detrimental effects.
.14
Make provisions to drain to exterior any moisture entering or forming inside systems.
2.4
METAL FINISHES
.1
Exposed aluminum surfaces: clear anodized AA M12 C22 A31.
.2
Contact surfaces of steel and aluminum components with dissimilar building components shall be
coated with bituminous paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FRAMING
.1
Erect and secure framing plumb, square, and level, free from warp, twist and superimposed loads.
.2
Anchor systems to supporting building elements; provide brackets, anchors and clips as required. All
devices for anchorage shall have sufficient adjustment to permit correct and accurate alignment. After
alignment rivet, weld or otherwise positively lock anchoring devices to prevent movement other than
that required to accommodate expansion, contraction, creep and deflection.
.3
Anchor intermediate vertical frame members to structure above as required. Where support for
intermediate vertical frame members is not available directly above head, provide frame extensions to
.4
.5
.6
.7
Use concealed fastenings where possible; where not possible use flathead screws in countersunk
holes. Match exposed fastenings with base metal on which they occur.
.8
Where indicated provide membrane flashing located within or abutting window systems. Secure
membrane flashings to window frames and to adjacent work mechanically or with adhesive lap
membrane flashings at joints minimum 100 mm and seal.
3.2
SPANDREL PANELS
.1
Provide insulation clips at back-up panel at maximum 300 mm o.c. both ways; welded clips shall not
easily break off and weld burn-through shall not occur.
.2
Fit insulation boards tightly and accurately, leave no voids or gaps. Place retainer discs over pins.
22/09/2011
KMAI
08910-6
Unless noted otherwise provide 100 mm thick insulation.
.3
Provide spandrel glass face panels, except where metal face panels are required.
.4
Install metal face panels, similar to glass, with dry / dry glazing system.
3.4
GLAZING
.1
Provide insulating glass at all locations unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Provide tempered glass inside and outside at doors and screens.
.3
Glaze openings in accordance with window and glass manufacturer's recommendations so as to
achieve weathertight installation.
3.5
CAULKING
.1
Seal joints in accordance with window and sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Prime contact
surfaces prior to installation of sealant.
.2
.3
Provide for continuity of air/vapour barriers at window and screen perimeter.
3.6
SILLS
.1
Provide aluminum sills, complete with chairs, anchors, expansion plates and drip deflectors where
windows and curtain wall are located on top of masonry walls.
.2
Provide sills in longest practicable lengths. Provide flush slip joints at maximum 3 m o.c. Align slip
joints with mullions as directed by Consultant.
3.7
COVERS, CLOSURES AND TRIM
.1
Provide covers, closures and trim as indicated and as required to provide complete and finished
installation.
.2
Wherever possible provide concealed fastenings unless approved otherwise by Consultant.
.3
Locate intermediate joints as directed by Consultant.
3.8
.1
using soft cloths.
.2
Just prior to takeover of building by Owner, check test vent operation and, if necessary adjust or
replace hardware to ensure proper and smooth operation.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
08910-7
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
New Masonry:
Section 07200
.2
Rough Carpentry:
Section 07200
.3
Finish Carpentry:
Section 07200
.4
Cabinet Work:
Section 07200
.5
Section 07200
.6
Interior Damp-proofing:
Section 07200
.7
Air Vapour Barrier:
Section 07200
.8
Thermal insulation:
Section 07200
.9
Sealants:
Section 07200
.10
Steel Door Frames:
Section 08110
.11
Wood Door Frames
Section 08210
.12
Section 08910
.13
Plaster Restoration:
Section 09280
.14
Ceramic Tile:
Section 09280
.15
Tile Restoration:
Section 09280
.16
Resilient Flooring:
Section 09280
.19
Plaster Restoration:
Section 09280
.20
Painting:
Section 09900
.21
Supply of access doors:
Divisions 15 & 16
Firestopping and smoke seals:
1.3
DEFINITION
.1
1.4
Drywall = gypsum board.
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.5
Section 01330: Submissions required.
FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Provide fire rated gypsum board components and assemblies as indicated.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09250-1
.2
Where firehose cabinets, electrical panels or other fixtures or equipment are recessed into fire rated
gypsum board partitions, provide fire rated backing to maintain required fire rating.
.3
Protect recessed fixtures in fire rated gypsum board ceilings in accordance with fire rated assembly
design report and/or as indicated.
.4
Gypsum bulkheads/partitions in ceiling spaces above fire rated glazed screens, doors or other
elements shall have same fire rating as screens/doors over which they occur.
1.6
WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
.1
Interior timber framing and furring: comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C754 and ASTM
C840 unless otherwise shown.
.2
Gypsum board application and finishing: comply with requirements of ASTM C840, unless otherwise
shown.
.3
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section (with minimum five years
experience) to be approved by materials’ manufacturers.
1.7
.1
.2
Handle gypsum board panels to prevent damaged and broken edges.
.3
Store materials in dry place so as to preserve their quality and fitness for work.
1.8
JOB CONDITIONS
o
.1
Install and finish gypsum board when ambient temperature is between 14 and 22 C. Maintain this
temperature range in areas to receive gypsum board for 24 hours before and during application and
until joint cement and adhesives are fully cured.
.2
Apply gypsum board after building has been completely enclosed. Ensure that work to be concealed
by gypsum board has been installed, tested, inspected and approved before starting work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FRAMING, FURRING AND TRIM
.1
Unless otherwise specified, provide framing members as per section 06100 Rough Carpentry.
.2
Studs, interior locations: channel shaped screw-on type: depth as indicated; with knurled supporting
flanges at least 34 mm wide; with service pass-through holes at 610 mm o.c. in web. Provide
minimum 0.9 mm thick studs where cementitious board and abuse resistant gypsum board is required
and where stud depth exceeds 92 mm.
.3
Top and bottom runners: stud sections
.4
Rough framing members: refer to
.5
Furring and strapping members to receive gypsum board: 38 mm deep studs
.6
Corner beads: beaded angle with perforated flanges.
.7
Casing beads: channel shaped; beaded corners.
.8
Hangers: minimum 3 mm galvanized steel wire.
.9
Tie wire: minimum 1.5 mm soft annealed galvanized steel.
.10
Metal control joint section: bellows shaped section with perforated flanges.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09250-2
.11
2.2
Reveal mouldings: extruded aluminum, profiles as indicated, by Fry, Pittcon or Gordon.
GYPSUM BOARD
.1
Exposed gypsum board for interior use: tapered edge: ASTM C1396.
.2
Unexposed gypsum board for interior use: backing board: ASTM C1396.
.3
Fire rated gypsum board: Type 'X' board: ASTM C1396.
.4
Abuse resistant gypsum board: 12 mm thick, fire rated and non-fire rated: Tough Rock by Georgia
Pacific.
.5
Exterior sheathing: 12 mm thick Dens Glass Gold by Georgia Pacific.
2.3
CEMENTITIOUS BOARD
.1
.2
2.4
Board for paint finish:
.1
Board: Polymer modified, fibreglass mesh reinforced concrete board, 12 mm thick, tapered
edges: PermaBoard by Unifix.
.2
Joint tape: 75 mm wide alkali resistant fibreglass mesh tape: Unitape by Unifix.
.3
Joint compound: acrylic based: Acryjoint by Unifix.
.4
Skim coat: acrylic based: Acrybase by Unifix.
Board for textured finish: Durock by CGC 12 mm thick, or equivalent product by other manufacturer
FASTENING AND FINISHING MATERIALS
.1
Drywall screws: self-drilling, self-tapping, case hardened. Use zinc, nickel or cadmium plated screws
for fastening of cementitious board.
.2
Laminating adhesive: CGC Durabond 90 compound by Canadian Gypsum, or equivalent by Westroc.
.3
Joint tape: 50 mm perforated type.
.4
Joint filler and topping cement: casein, vinyl or latex base, slow setting.
2.5
THERMAL BREAK
.1
Adhesive face rubberized cork 3 mm thick or self adhesive closed cell neoprene sponge tape
"Permastik" 122X by Jacobs and Thompson Ltd., or foamed vinyl tape "Arnofoam" by Arno Adhesive
Tape Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TIMBER FRAMING (READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY)
.1
General:
.1
Framing and furring indicated is schematic and shall not be considered exact or complete.
Location and spacing of members, bracing, supports and securement shall be in accord with
referenced standards as required to provide complete and finished work.
.2
Make provision for supporting recessed and surface mounted fixtures and equipment.
Provide additional framing, supports and stiffeners as required.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09250-3
.2
.3
.4
.3
Neatly frame around recessed fixtures and openings.
.4
Examine mechanical and electrical drawings and coordinate with Divisions 15 and 16 to
determine openings required.
Partitions:
.1
Extend timber studs to underside of top plate which is fixed to the floor joists (unless
specified or shown otherwise) above.
.2
All timber studs shall be spaced at 400 mm maximum, except where indicated otherwise.
.3
Install top and bottom plates in partition and secure to supporting building elements at
maximum 610 mm o.c. Cut out base plates at doorways and screw fix base plate either side
of doorway while base plate is cut .
.4
Install timber studs vertically; fix studs to runner channels by crimping or screwing on both
sides of stud.
.5
Install additional studs/noggings/headers as detailed and required at partition intersections,
openings and terminations at dissimilar materials. Place studs not more than 50 mm from
abutting walls, openings and each side of corners.
.6
Stiffen partitions with noggings extending full length of partition as per best practice.
.7
Provide slip joint at top of partitions to accommodate deflection of structure without causing
damage to partition.
Ceilings:
.1
Erect suspension and furring system level with a maximum tolerance of +3 mm over a 3000
mm length.
.2
Suspension system shall support ceiling assemblies, with maximum deflection of L/360, L
being span between supports.
.3
Hangers for suspended ceilings shall support grillage independent of walls, columns, pipe
and ducts. Space hangers at maximum 1220 mm o.c. along rough furring members and not
more than 150 mm from ends. Do not place hangers in front of access panels.
.4
Space rough furring members at maximum 915 mm and not more than 150 mm from
perimeter walls.
.5
Space furring channels transverse to runner channels at maximum 610 mm o.c. except at
exterior soffits, and secure to each support with clip or saddle tie with 2 loops of tie wire.
Install furring channels so as not to contact perimeter walls.
.6
Where ductwork, piping and other elements within ceiling spaces interfere with direct
suspension of ceiling from structure, install additional framing securely fastened to main
structure to accommodate proper hanging of ceiling.
.7
At soffits exposed to wind loads suspend soffit framing with metal studs and brace system to
withstand positive and negative wind pressures without detrimental effects. Fasten furring
members to surrounding walls. Space primary furring channels at maximum 610 mm o.c.
Provide Z-shaped furring members at maximum 400 mm o.c. Framing and furring members
shall be minimum 0.9 mm thick.
Bulkheads, Coves, Furring:
.1
Frame to profiles shown, rigid, square, true to line and securely fastened to supporting
building elements.
.2
Space furring members to receive gypsum board at maximum 610 mm o.c.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09250-4
3.2
.3
Provide rough framing and bracing members as required to ensure stability and accuracy of
work.
.4
Where indicated, provide resilient furring channels, spaced at maximum 600 mm o.c.
GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
.1
Unless otherwise specified, erect gypsum board vertically or horizontally, whichever results in fewer
end joints.
.2
Locate board end joints over supporting members.
.3
Cut and fit gypsum board as required to accommodate other work.
.4
Unless otherwise shown or specified, extend gypsum board on both sides of partitions to underside of
structural deck above. Fasten gypsum board to studs, not to top channel. Allow for 13 mm deflection.
.5
Do not install gypsum board until wood blocking or other back-up components are installed. Remove
and reinstall gypsum board at no extra cost to Contract where this requirements is not complied with.
.6
Provide corner beads at external corners.
.7
Provide casing beads around openings and where gypsum board abuts dissimilar material and
construction.
.8
Fasten gypsum board to supports with screws spaced at maximum 305 mm o.c.
.9
Install gypsum sheathing horizontally at outside of exterior wall steel studs. Fasten each board at each
stud with minimum 3 screws.
.10
Adhesive bonded gypsum board; apply 13 x 13 mm ribbons of laminating adhesive to back side of
board, parallel to long dimension; space adhesive ribbons at max.150 mm o.c. temporarily brace
boards until complete adhesive bond develops.
.11
Where double layer is required screw fasten second layer through first into steel framing. Select
screws of suitable length to ensure positive fastening. Offset joints in second layer.
3.3
GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING
.1
Tape and fill exposed joints, fastener heads, edges, corners, to produce an acceptable surface ready
for decoration.
.2
Conceal exposed flanges of corner beads, casing beads and other trim sections with at least 3 coats
of cement, feathered out minimum 200 mm.
.3
Fill depressions at fastener head with cement, then apply 2 additional coats of cement to produce
smooth, level surface.
.4
Treat joints using 3 coat method as follows:
.1
Apply thin uniform layer of cement and embed joint tape.
.2
Immediately apply thin skim coat of cement over tape and allow to dry.
.3
Apply 2 additional coats of cement. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat.
.5
Sand each coat of topping cement with fine sandpaper as required to produce smooth surface. Do not
sand paper face of gypsum board.
.6
Finish concealed fastener heads at fire rated gypsum board elements in manner specified for exposed
work.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09250-5
.7
3.4
CEMENTITIOUS BOARD
.1
Screw fasten board to each supporting member at maximum 300 mm o.c.
.2
Finish cementitious board joints at locations scheduled to be painted with 3-step joint finishing system
as recommended by board manufacturer. Apply skim coat over entire board surface to achieve
smooth, uniform surface, ready for painting. Provide corner and casing beads similar to gypsum board
installation.
3.5
CONTROL AND RELIEF JOINTS
.1
.2
3.6
Control Joints:
.1
Provide control joints where shown and at maximum 10m o.c.
.2
Break continuity of gypsum board and framing system at control joints; install continuous
metal control joint section.
Relief Joints:
.1
Provide relief joints where shown and where gypsum board assemblies abut dissimilar
construction.
.2
Stop gypsum board 6 mm from abutting construction at dissimilar building elements, unless
otherwise indicated.
.3
Where gypsum board comes into contact with window frames or exterior door/screen frames
install thermal break. Adhere self-sticking tape to casing bead and compress during
installation of gypsum board.
.4
Where indicated, install reveal mouldings
SOUND CONTROL
.1
3.7
Finish concealed joints at fire rated and at acoustically insulated gypsum board elements in manner
specified for exposed work.
Partitions:
.1
Provide acoustical insulation in gypsum board partitions as indicated. Unless otherwise
noted provide 50 mm thick insulation. Extend acoustical insulation over full height of partition,
including portions located above ceiling.
.2
Provide acoustical caulking at all partitions scheduled to receive acoustical insulation as
follows:
.1
At perimeter of partitions.
.2
Around objects penetrating partition.
.3
Provide 2 bead caulking system around horizontal and vertical perimeters. Apply continuous
sealant beads at each side of horizontal runner tracks and vertical end studs, between
gypsum board and adjacent construction.
.4
Caulk around objects such as electrical outlets, light switches, electrical and mechanical
panels and boxes, grilles, and other objects penetrating. Caulk behind metal control joint
sections.
.5
Where acoustically insulated non-fire rated partitions meet steel deck running perpendicularly
to partition, provide steel deck closure.
DOOR FRAMES / ACCESS DOORS
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09250-6
.1
Install access doors supplied by Divisions 15 and 16. Build doors into gypsum board elements flush
and parallel to walls and securely fastened.
.2
Install steel and wood door frames occurring in gypsum board partitions. Follow installation
requirements specified in Section 08110 and 08210.
3.8
SCHEDULE
.1
Use Type 'X' gypsum board at fire rated elements.
.2
Use abuse resistant gypsum board where indicated.
.3
Use cementitious board where indicated.
.4
Unless otherwise shown, provide 16 mm thick standard gypsum board.
END
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09250-7
SECTION 09280 - PLASTER RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.2
Demolition
Section 02200
.2
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100
.3
Section 08210
.4
Gypsum Board
Section 09250
.5
Painting
Section 09900
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
.1
The work of this Section includes repairs to existing plaster, existing plaster ornamental mouldings, and
substrates in connection with repairs at the North, South and East entry vestifbules.
.1
The following plaster systems are required:
.1
Sand-lime plaster consisting of fibre reinforced sand-lime plaster base
coats and sand-lime-plaster of paris finish.
.2
Textured durable plaster consisting of sand-cement-lime plaster base
coats and Caen stone plaster finish coat.
.2
.3
1.4
Plaster is required for the following substrates:
.1
Expanded metal lath.
.2
Wood and steel framed grounds for plaster mouldings.
Work to include the removal of loose paint and all existing paper and fabric wall covering
material prior to assessing repair quantities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Work of this Section shall be performed by plaster subcontractors with a minimum of 10 years
experience in heritage work including 2 heritage buildings with ornamental plasterwork.
.2
Submit documentation showing subcontractors qualifications to the Owner's Designee for approval
prior to the commencement of this work.
1.5
REFERENCES
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
ASTM C207-91 (1992)
CAN/CSA-A5-M88
CSA A82.22-M77
CSA A82.30-M80
CSA A82.57-M77
22/09/2011
KMAI
-
Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry purposes
Portland Cement
Gypsum Plasters
Interior Furring, Lathing and Gypsum Plastering
Inorganic Aggregates for Use Interior Plaster
09280-1
1.6
MOCK-UPS
.1
Prior to start of work construct for Owner's Designee's review mock-up of each condition (type of
plaster and type of substrate) in size and at location directed by Owner's Designee.
.2
Prepare mock-ups of crack repair and junction of new with existing plaster using undercut edge
technique.
.3
Repeat procedure until mock-ups are accepted by Owner's Designee.
.4
Mock-ups approved by Owner's Designee may be incorporated into finished work.
1.7
.1
1.8
Mock-ups approved by Owner's Designee may be incorporated into finished work.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Should materials, systems and/or conditions be encountered that differ from those indicated,
immediately notify Owner's Designee and do not proceed without instructions.
.2
Ensure continuous temporary heat and ventilation is provided to maintain the required environmental
conditions.
.3
Maintain work areas within 12 C and 21 C. Maintain this temperature for a minimum of one week
prior to plastering and six weeks thereafter.
.4
Provide adequate ventilation to remove excess moisture.
.5
Protect adjacent work from staining, soaking and other damage.
.6
Products
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Steel Studs: Made from galvanized sheet steel, minimum 20 gsg, screwable with crimped web and
returned flange. Provide knockout openings in web at 6" o.c., to accommodate (if required) horizontal
mechanical and electrical service lines and bracing. Width as indicated on Drawings.
.2
Expanded Metal Lath: Made from copper alloy steel sheets, weighing 3.4 lb / sq.yd. galvanized.
.3
Self Furring Metal Lath: Made from galvanized steel sheet, weighing 3.4 lb / sq.yd. with evenly spaced
indentations.
.4
Fasteners for Metal Lath: Wafer head sheet metal screws with rust resistant coating.
.5
Corner Beads: Standard 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" commercial galvanized, perforated steel bead minimum
26 gsg.
.6
Casing Beads: Square edge and bull nosed beads minimum 24 gsg commercial galvanized steel with
galvanized mesh wings.
22/09/2011
KMAI
09280-2
2.2
.7
Plaster Stops: Galvanized steel, square end type of size to suit plaster thickness.
.8
Wood Grounds: Blocking for ornamental mouldings.
.9
Plaster of Paris: Domtar chemicals or approved equivalent.
.10
Textured Plaster Finish Coat: Caen Stone Plaster.
.11
Lime: Hydrated finish lime conforming to ASTM C207, Type N. Use of quick lime is not permitted.
.12
Lime: Slaked lime: Domtar chemicals or approved equivalent.
.13
Cement: CAN/CSA-A5-M, Portland, normal.
.14
Sand: CSA A82.57-M; white silica sand for finish coat.
.15
Water: Clean, potable and free of alkali and other impurities.
.16
Bonding Agent: PVA: "Thorobond" by Thoro Systems Ltd.
.17
Sand-lime Base Coat Reinforcing: Chopped, fibremesh.
MIXES
.1
Sand-lime Plaster
.1
Scratch and Base Coats: 1-1/2 parts sand to 1 part slaked lime, with 2 lb of chopped
fibremesh per cu.yd.
.2
Finish coat: 3 parts hydrated lime to 1 part Plaster of Paris, with 2 lb white silica sand per 12
quart pail of mix.
.2
Textured Durable Plaster
.1
Scratch and Base Coats: 3 parts sand to 1 part Portland cement and 1/10 part hydrated lime.
.2
Finish Coat: mix in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
.3
General Mixing Instructions
.1
Thoroughly mix to form a homogeneous mass using clean and proper receptacles and protect
from foreign matter during mixing.
.2
Do not mix on any floor surfaces of the building and, if mixing is done inside provide
waterproof protection under the mixing boxes and water containers.
.3
Thoroughly clean mixing boxes and tools after each batch.
.4
Do not use water from cleaning operation to mix plaster.
.5
Do not mix 1 batch of plaster with another plaster nor re-temper once initial set has begun.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURVEY
.1
Prior to construction of mock-ups, and after paint and wall covering removals, review extent and
strategy for plaster repair work of each type required with Consultant and agree on appropriate course
of action to be taken. Assume a minimum of 25% plaster replacement due to deterioration
.2
Plaster depth to match existing ranges between 5/8" - 1-1/4" in depth.
22/09/2011
KMAI
09280-3
3.2
3.3
PREPARATION
.1
General;
.1
Remove dust an loose particles from surfaces to be plastered.
.2
Brush, clean and wet down masonry surfaces prior to commencement of plastering.
.3
Fill out low spots and straighten uneven surfaces with the same type of plaster as the intended
scratch coat.
.2
Existing substrates;
.1
Remove damaged, deteriorated plaster from areas affected by Work of this Contract.
Remove plaster back to supporting lath, substrates.
.2
Patch, repair, extend existing substrates to match existing where damaged by work of this
Contract, so as to provide sound base for new plaster.
.3
Rake out masonry joints to a depth of 5/8".
.4
Undercut edges of existing plaster to form a key, using hand tools.
.5
Thoroughly brush down surfaces with stiff bristle or phosphor-bronze wire brushes and
remove all loose and friable materials.
INSTALLATION
.1
General;
.1
Conform to CSA A82.30-M and as specified herein.
.2
Framing and Furring:
.1
Erect grillage for plaster work, securely attached to building structure.
.3
Metal Lathing:
.1
Stretch sheets tight and secure to stud framing, or to edges of masonry. Where end joints
occur between supports, lace joints together or tie adequately with tie wire.
.2
Attach lath to supports maximum 6" o.c.
.3
Fasten lath to metal studs with tie wire and/or specified screws.
.4
Use self-furring lath for direct application of metal lath to surfaces other than furring.
.4
Accessories and Reinforcement:
.1
Extend metal plaster stops full width, length and height of locations where plaster would
otherwise come in direct contact with exposed masonry and metal work. Fix stops in position,
plumb or level at a minimum of 12" o.c. leaving a space of 1/4" between stop and adjoining
surface to be caulked under Section 07900, Sealants, unless otherwise detailed.
.2
Install metal corner beads at all exterior angles of plasterwork, securely fixed at 12" o.c.
minimum, and plumb or level.
.3
Accurately set corner beads to exterior angles of gypsum lath. Reinforce all interior corners
with metal lath not less than 6" wide, 3" on each surface.
.4
Corners of openings in gypsum lath, over 2 sq.ft. in area, shall have strips of metal lath 12"
wide and 24" long attached to gypsum lath at an angle of 45E.
.5
Plastering:
.1
General - -Where partitions extend to underside of structure above,
.1
finish coat may be omitted in areas above finished ceiling but provide scratch and
base coats.
.2
-Apply bonding agent to cut edges of existing plaster.
.3
-Use bonding agent or bonding plaster for applying plaster to concrete.
.2
Sand Lime Plaster: Perform work in accordance with CSA A82.30-M1980 and as follows:
22/09/2011
KMAI
09280-4
.1
-Use three coat system of thickness matching existing.
.2
.3
-Step key new layers of plaster with existing.
-Apply plaster by hand with sufficient material and pressure to form good key on
supporting work.
-Provide level surface of base coat approximately 3/8" below finish surface.
-Comb scratch/base coats to provide key for succeeding coats.
-Prevent plaster coats from drying out too rapidly by misting with water during curing
period.
-Allow scratch and brown coats to dry out thoroughly before applying finish coat.
-Apply finish coat approximately 3/8" thick. Scratch plaster in thoroughly and
immediately double back to fill out to a dense surface free of surface blemishes and
imperfections, matching existing surface texture.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.3
Cement Plaster:
.1
-Apply first coat and heavily cross scratch to completely embed and cover
reinforcement. Moist cure scratch coat for 2 days and allow to cure at least for a total
of 4 days before second coat is applied.
.2
-An hour before application of second coat, spray scratch coat with clean water.
Apply second coat and rod plaster to a true surface with rod and darby and clean out
angles. Roughen surface with small nails in wood float. Moist cure second coat for 2
days and allow to cure at least 5 more days before application of finish coat.
.3
-Apply finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's directions, to a dense uniformly
textured surface, free of surface blemishes and irregularities.
.4
-Damp cure with light fog spray. Avoid excessive wetting and protect from excessive
drying air.
.4
Decorative Mouldings:
.1
-Cut template of adjacent moulding profile, and/or make latex mould of existing
decorative module.
.2
-Build repair grounds to match existing.
.3
- For straight profiles-apply base coats to within 3/8" of final profile.
.4
-Make runner board from template and apply finish coat in one continuous run
feathering out on adjacent mouldings.
.5
For decorative modules, cast modules, and bed in wet plaster base holdi in place
with recessed Stainless Steel screws. Fill joints and screw holes with plaster.
.5
-Sand out imperfections in moulding patch.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
09280-5
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Finishing of concrete slabs:
Section 03302
.2
Sealants:
Section 07920
.3
Steel Door Frames:
Section 08110
.4
Wood Door Frames
Section 08210
.5
Tile Restoration:
Section 09280
.6
Painting:
Section 09900
.7
Washroom Accessories:
Section 10800
.8
Mechanical
Section 15
.9
Electrical
Section 16
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Installer Qualifications: Member of Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC) or
SUBMITTALS
.1
Section 01330: Submission requirements
.2
Of each type of tile required, submit sample consisting of minimum 4 tiles bonded to rigid board
back-up and joints filled with grout. Select tiles to show full range of tile to be used. Resubmit sample
if required until tile range and grout colour is approved by the Consultant. Sample should be kept on
site as base quality reference.
.3
Submit list of mortar mixes and grouts to be used. In each case products proposed must be suitable
for the purpose intended and they shall be capable to produce top quality work. Upon Consultant's
request submit evidence of material manufacturer’s endorsement of products proposed.
.4
Upon Consultant's request submit samples of bases, trim and fittings. Samples of quality level
accepted by Consultant should remain on site as a baseline reference for all such materials installed
on site.
.5
Submit manufacturer’s recommended maintenance procedures and materials for inclusion into
operation and maintenance manual.
1.5
1.6
JOB CONDITIONS
o
.1
Maintain minimum air temperature of 10 C during installation and curing period.
.2
Exclude construction traffic from areas to receive tile during installation and curing period.
.3
Protect tile flooring subjected to construction traffic with non-staining protective covers.
.1
22/09/2011
KMAI
09310-1
.2
Handle ceramic tiles with care to prevent damaged and broken edges.
.3
Store materials in dry place so as to preserve their quality and fitness for work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Products by Laticrete listed herein are specified to establish a standard of acceptance. Equivalent
products, subject to Consultant's review, by Mapei, H.B. Fuller and Flextile are also acceptable.
.2
Water: potable and non-staining.
.3
Portland cement: CAN/CSA-A5-03.
.4
Sand: CSA A82.56-M1976.
.5
Thin set mortar: latex-portland cement mix: Laticrete 211/4237.
.6
High strength mortar: 100% solids epoxy adhesive: Latapoxy 300.
.7
Organic adhesive: latex adhesive to ANSI A136.1: Laticrete 15 Multi-Mastic.
.8
Floor grout, stain resistant: epoxy grout: Latapoxy SP-100; colours selected by Consultant.
.9
Wall grout: unsanded dry set, coloured: Laticrete 600 Series/1776; colours selected by Consultant.
.10
Control joints: Schlüter DILEX-BWB, height to suit tile thickness, colour selected by Consultant.
.11
Edge trim: stainless steel angle profile: Schlüter Schiene-E, height to suit tile thickness or slab
depression.
.12
Tile:
.13
2.2
.1
CT1: 102 x 102 mm Wall Tile ‘Ontario Mosaics – Gloss, Snow White, Code #
OD.ON.SWT.0202.GL’ by Olympia
.2
CT2: 25 x 25 mm Floor Tile ‘Quebec Mosaics – Unglazed, Arctic White, Code #
OD.OC.ARW.0101.N’ by Olympia
and 25 x 25 mm Floor Tile
‘Quebec Mosaics – Unglazed, Black, Code #
OD.OC.BLK.0101.N’ by Olympia
Cleaning, sealing and top coating compounds: as recommended by TTMAC and acceptable to tile
manufacturer.
MIXES
.1
Mortar and grout: mix using suitable mechanical mixers in accordance with material manufacturer's
directions.
.2
Place liquid into mixer, start mixer and add dry material. Mix only long enough to wet out batch; do not
overmix. Dump mixed material from mixer promptly and clean out mixer with water after each batch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
o
.1
Substrates shall be structurally sound and clean and free of foreign matter and minimum 10 C. Fill
rough and uneven surfaces with patching mortar.
.2
Clean substrates as required to produce acceptable surface. Dampen and sweep dusty and dry
surfaces.
22/09/2011
KMAI
09310-2
.3
3.2
Where new flooring is installed over existing floors, prepare existing surfaces as required to ensure
satisfactory installation conditions. Remove existing flooring, strip, wash, etch, grind or otherwise treat
existing substrates as required to completely remove existing substances which would adversely affect
installation of new flooring.
TILE INSTALLATION GENERAL
.1
Unless otherwise specified, meet applicable requirements of TTMAC Tile Installation Manual 20062007.
.2
Bond porcelain base tile to all substrates with high strength mortar. Bond all other tiles to substrate in
accordance with mortar/adhesive manufacturer's directions and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
All locations except where indicated otherwise: thin set mortar.
Gypsum board substrate: organic adhesive.
Cement board substrate smooth: high strength mortar.
.3
Finished work shall be level, plumb, or sloped as shown, true, square and free of defective, chipped,
broken, discoloured or blemished tiles. Maximum allowable finished surface variation shall be 3 mm in
3 m when measured, in any direction, with a 3 m straightedge.
.4
Lay out tile patterns symmetrically within each area and to patterns shown. Unless otherwise
indicated or directed provide stacked pattern.
.5
Joints shall be parallel, uniform, neat, straight, square and completely filled. Provide joint width as
.6
Fit tile accurately against and around interruptions, penetrations and abutting dissimilar surfaces.
Wherever possible, drill holes for penetrating elements to ensure neat fitting.
.7
Provide accent patterns as shown, or if not shown, as directed by Consultant.
.8
Provide tile manufacturer's standard trim pieces at changes in direction and at terminations. Unless
otherwise indicated provide the following corner and edge conditions:
.1
.2
.3
Internal horizontal corners: coved.
External vertical and horizontal corners and edges: bullnose.
Internal vertical corners and unexposed edges: square butt joint.
.9
Provide metal edge trim at junction of floor tiles with other flooring materials.
.10
After setting, sound tiles and replace hollow backed tiles.
3.3
GROUTING
.1
Commence grouting not earlier than 24 hours after setting tiles unless otherwise directed by grout
manufacturer.
.2
Force grout into joint so as to fill them flush, leaving no voids.
.3
Promptly as work progresses remove excess grout from adjacent tile surfaces before grout establishes
tight permanent adhesion.
.4
Cure grout in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
.5
Provide stain resistant floor grout washrooms and at other locations where shown.
3.4
CONTROL JOINTS
.1
Provide control joints at substrate control joint locations where indicated and at maximum 6 m in tile
field.
22/09/2011
KMAI
09310-3
.2
3.5
Install control joints as recommended by material manufacturer. Set control joint slightly lower than
finish tile surface.
CLEANING
.1
Thoroughly clean tile surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Polish after cleaning with clean, dry cloths.
.3
Seal and top coat unglazed tiles in accordance with TTMAC recommendations, as directed by
Consultant, except where tile manufacturer recommends against it.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
09310-4
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING (VINYL FLOORING)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit manufacturer's full range of colour samples of each type of flooring and base material
specified.
.2
Submit maintenance instructions with recommended maintenance methods and procedures, for all
flooring materials, for inclusion into maintenance manual.
1.4
PRODUCT STORAGE
.1
1.5
Store flooring materials in areas of application for at least 48 hours prior to installation.
JOB CONDITIONS
o
.1
Maintain minimum 21 C air temperature at flooring installation area for 3 days prior to, during and for
24 hours after installation.
.2
Protect installed flooring against damage with heavy paper or plastic coverings. Do not place static
loads on newly installed flooring until minimum 10 days after installation.
.3
Maintain protective covering until inspections for Substantial Performance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Linoleum: 2.5 mm thick x 2 m wide: Marmoleum by Forbo or equivalent product, by Johnsonite; up to
2 colours selected by Consultant.
.2
Resilient base (R): 3 mm thick x 100 mm high by Johnsonite, coloured rubber base flat profile at
carpeted areas, coved at all other locations; colours selected by Consultant.
.3
Vinyl reducing strips tapered, to suit thickness of flooring, colours selected by Consultant: Johnsonite
RRS.
.4
Primers, fillers, adhesives: as recommended by flooring material manufacturer. For vinyl composite
tile use high strength clear setting adhesive: 31 Envirobond by Flextile.
.5
1/8” plywood underlayment
.6
Material colours and patterns: unless specific colour/pattern is indicated, Consultant will, for each
product listed, select from manufacturer's full standard range.
.7
Cleaning and finishing materials: As recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09650-1
3.1
CONDITION OF SUBSTRATES
.1
Surfaces to receive resilient flooring shall be dry, true, even and smooth, and free of paint, grease, oil
and residual fasteners. Surfaces to receive resilient base shall be even, smooth free of gaps, holes
and depressions.
.2
Ensure moisture content of substrate is 12% or less. Perform moisture tests on concrete substrates
o
where moisture content is uncertain. Perform tests in minimum ambient temperature of 18 C. Do not
install materials until test results are satisfactory.
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Level depressions, cracks and joints in subfloor with non-shrinking type filler compatible with bonding
adhesive.
.2
If recommended by adhesive or tile manufacturer, prime substrates. Apply primer in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
.3
Where new flooring is installed over existing floors, prepare existing surfaces as required to ensure
satisfactory installation conditions. Remove existing flooring, strip, wash, etch, grind or otherwise treat
existing substrates as required to completely remove existing substances which would adversely affect
installation of new flooring. Provide plywood underlayment at existing wood floor.
3.3
UNDERLAYMENT
.1
3.4
Provide 3.2mm plywood underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
FLOOR INSTALLATION GENERAL
.1
Install resilient flooring materials in accordance with material manufacturer's current printed directions.
Keep a copy of manufacturers installation manual on site during execution of work.
.2
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints. Extend flooring into recesses and closets.
.3
Locate change to different floor finish or colour centred under doors, except where multicoloured floor
patterns are required.
.4
Provide vinyl reducer strip fully bonded to floor where floor covering terminates exposing edge of floor.
3.5
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
.1
Run sheets in direction determined by Consultant.
.2
Tightly butt joints or double cut, groove out and weld with colour matching welding rod and suitable
welding equipment.
.3
Form integral base where indicted. Install filet strips at inside corners. Carry flooring up walls, curbs
100 mm and bond to substrate with adhesive. Weld corners. Seal exposed edges at terminations
with colour matching sealant. Install colour matching vinyl base cap.
.4
Make watertight connection at floor drains.
3.6
RESILIENT BASE
.1
Adhesive apply cove base to vertical surfaces so that gaps do not occur behind base, so that front lip
of base cove bears firmly and uniformly on floor surfaces and so that good and permanent bond is
produced between base and surface to which it is applied.
.2
Use full length pieces where practicable; accumulated short lengths not permitted. Wrap base around
external corners; do not use preformed corners; mitre inside corners; butt intermediate joints flush
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09650-2
without gaps.
3.7
CLEANING
.1
Wash resilient floors; leave them clean, free of building materials, rubbish, paint, adhesives, stains and
spills.
.2
Owner will seal and wax resilient floors. Owner reserves the right to reject resilient floors for defects
which only become apparent after sealing and waxing of floors.
END
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09650-3
SECTION 09675 - WATERPROOF FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
1.3
Concrete floor slabs:
Section 03300
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Work of this Section shall be carried out by forces certified or licensed by material manufacturer.
SAMPLES AND JOB MOCK-UP
.1
.2
Submit two accurate colour charts for selection of colour by Consultant.
.3
Submit two samples minimum 300 x 300 mm representative of finished work.
.4
Provide minimum 10 m² mock up on site, including base, in location directed by Consultant.
1.5
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
.1
1.6
Submit maintenance instructions for inclusion into operating and maintenance manuals.
JOB CONDITIONS
o
.1
Maintain substrates and ambient air temperature at least 10 C for minimum 72 hours preceding,
during and until fully cured, after application of flooring in work and material storage areas.
.2
Provide adequate ventilation during installation and curing.
.3
Install flooring prior to installation of floor mounted fixtures, services and equipment.
.4
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage. If necessary mask or cover surfaces, fixtures, equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
.2
Flooring System: one of the following:
.1
Neogard Pedagard M by DRE Industries Inc., consisting of:
.1
Primer: 778/7781.
.2
Base coat: FC 7500.
.3
Top coat: FC 7510.
.2
MRW System, by Sternson (Sika) consisting of:
.1
2 component epoxy urethane system.
.2
Water based vinyl topcoat.
.3
Stonproof ME7/Stonkote GS4 by Stonhard.
.4
Resoclad II by Duochem.
.5
Vulkem 350 / 351 by Tremco.
Colour will be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s standard colours. One colour only will be
used.
22/09/2011
kmai
09675-1
SECTION 09675 - WATERPROOF FLOORING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Ensure that surfaces scheduled to receive waterproof flooring, are smooth, sound, dry and free of
conditions which would adversely affect quality of work.
.2
Variations in substrate levels shall not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, when measured with 3 m straight edge in
any direction. Ensure that unacceptable deviations and defective concrete are corrected prior to start
of work. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of conditions.
.3
Remove concrete laitance by steel shotblasting, sandblasting, acid etching or other method approved
by material manufacturer. Remove projections, oil, grease and all other contaminants.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Comply with manufacturer’s printed directions.
.2
Prime substrate with primer.
.3
Apply waterproof membrane in multiple coats, minimum three, to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.75
mm.
.4
Apply top coat to provide a uniform, slip resistant surface.
.5
Extend waterproof flooring up and over low curbs and housekeeping pads; provide integral base at all
vertical surfaces, minimum 150 mm high.
.6
Cure and protect flooring as directed by manufacturer.
.7
Coordinate with Division 15 to ensure waterproof flooring is applied prior to installation of equipment.
END
22/09/2011
kmai
09675-2
SECTION 09690 - WOOD FLOOR NEW & RESTORED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Concrete Floor Slabs:
Section 03300
.2
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Material supplier shall be a firm established in the industry.
.2
Flooring contractor shall be a company exhibiting a minimum of ten (10) years continuous experience
in the athletic flooring field. Submit a list of at least three completed projects of similar magnitude and
complexity where this work has been performed. Include owner references with this submittal.
1.4
SAMPLES
.1
1.5
Provide 6 - 300 mm long finished samples of each wood flooring type showing the range of colour and
grain to be employed in installation. These will form the benchmark for quality for the wood flooring.
Resubmit as required by Consultant.
MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
1.6
Provide maintenance data for floor finish and care for incorporation into maintenance manual.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
.1
Do not deliver wood flooring materials to site until work involving cementitious materials is complete
and cured, and moisture conditions approximate those that will exist when building is complete.
.2
Store materials in area of installation for minimum 72 hours prior to commencing of work.
.3
Moisture content of lumber used for this project may be checked at any time by the Consultant prior to
its incorporation into the work. Lumber found to be in excess of the allowable moisture content limit,
will be rejected.
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
.1
1.8
Maintain ambient temperature of not less than 10°C, not more than 21°C from 72 hours before
installation to at least 48 hours after completion of work, and maintain 40% relative humidity during
same period.
PROTECTION
.1
Do not allow traffic on wood flooring during sanding and finishing operations.
.2
Be responsible for care and protection of finished floors until takeover of building by Owner.
PROJECT NO. KMA-09100– Phase 2
22/09/2011
-1
WESPEC
SENATOR O’CONNOR COLLEGE SCHOOL
09690
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
MATERIALS
Flooring (where replacement is required): Species and grade stamped on underside of each piece,
conforming to the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1
.2
2.3
Species: White oak.
Grade: Clear. No. 1 Select
Cut: Quarter sawn.
Moisture Content: 8-12%
Actual Thickness: 19mm
Actual Width: varies – match existing
Edge: Tongue and Groove
End: Tongue and Groove.
Length: varies – match existing
¾” plywood substrate for new flooring
Sheathing Paper: Waxed kraft paper
Nails: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer
FINISHES
.1
.2
Floor Finish: Oil based, hi-solids, clear Polyurethane (3 coats), to achieve high gloss surface; type
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Floor Stain: Stain repair required on divider strips in floor restoration
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Inspect existing subfloor floor for proper dryness and tolerance and report any discrepancies to the
consultant. It is the intent of the owner to make necessary repairs where deficient materials
are discovered. Any floor repair will be approved by the owner prior to performance of the work.
.2
Stagger joints into even random pattern. Arrange variations in plank colour to be evenly and
rdistributed.
.2
All floor repairs must be performed and complete prior to the refinishing of flooring.
3.2
REFINISHING
.1
Ensure floor is free of moisture.
.2
Sweep floors clean.
.3
Sand with heavy, power driven orbital type floor sander. Use dust accumulator on machine.
.4
Sand with No. 40 or 36 grit sandpaper if boards are uneven heights. First pass shall be on a
diagonal angle to the directionof the floor.
22/09/2011
-2
WESPEC
09690
.5
Make sure floor is sanded smooth and level before sanding with medium grit (50 or 60 grit)
sandpaper. This cut and all subsequent cuts shall be sanded in the direction of the grain of the
floor.
.6
Sand edges with No. 60 or 80 grit spinner paper.
.7
Sand entire floor with No. 80 or 100 grit sandpaper.
.8
.9
Disk sand entire floor with No. 100 disk paper.
Note – existing raised splines to be sanded down and restained.
.10
Clean floor to remove all dust and debris prior to sealing wood. Floor shall be smooth and free of
slivers.
Scrape and hand-sand corners and other areas not reached by machine.
END
22/09/2011
-3
WESPEC
09690
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Finish Carpentry
Section 06200
.2
Cabinetry
Section 06300
.3
Section 06400
.4
Steel Doors
Section 08110
.5
Wood Doors
Section 08210
.6
GWB finishes:
Section 09250
.7
Plaster Restoration
Section 09280
1.3
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
.1
Unless otherwise specified, materials shall be manufactured and supplied by one of the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.4
Benjamin-Moore & Co. Ltd.
Canadian Industries Ltd.
Glidden Co. Ltd.
Para Paints Ltd.
Pittsburgh Paints
Pratt & Lambert Inc.
The Sherwin-Williams Co. Ltd.
LIST OF MATERIALS, SAMPLES
.1
.2
List of Materials:
.3
.1
Before ordering materials, submit written request in form acceptable to Consultant, for
approval of paint materials. List each of the materials proposed and surfaces to be covered.
State manufacturer's name and brand name of materials.
.2
List of materials shall be endorsed by manufacturer as being the best material for the
applicable condition.
.3
Do not order material or commence work until list of materials is approved by Consultant.
Samples:
.1
Submit two 200 mm x 200 mm colour draw downs of each paint colour coated with
manufacturer's paint system to confirm colour match with colour chips supplied by
Consultant.
.2
Submit sample of natural and stained finishes on each species and grade of wood to receive
such finishes.
.3
Prepare full size samples showing each type of door finish.
.4
Prepare sample panels of wall and ceiling paint system as directed by Consultant.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09900-1
.3
1.5
Maintenance Materials:
.1
Upon completion of work provide one sealed and properly identified 1 L can of each type and
colour paint used on this project.
.2
Only top coating paints used in building interior are required.
.3
Submit complete colour schedule listing paint colours, name and product code numbers,
prior to Substantial performance.
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Deliver paint materials to site in sealed original labelled containers bearing manufacturer's name,
brand name, type of paint and colour designation.
.3
Store materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.4
Do not store paints, stains, varnishes, rags, or equipment inside building. maintain separate
workshop/storage shed for duration of work by this Section.
1.6
JOB CONDITIONS
.1
.2
.3
Environmental Conditions:
o
Maintain temperature in interior areas to receive coatings between 15 C and 25 C for at least
24 hours before, during application and until coatings have cured after application. Apply
o
exterior coatings only when temperature is above 10 C.
.2
Do not apply exterior coatings during periods of precipitation nor when precipitation is
imminent.
.3
Do not apply coatings under direct sunlight during hot weather.
.4
Adequately ventilate areas where coatings are being applied. Maintain a reasonably dust-free
atmosphere for duration of work.
Protection:
.1
Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coatings from damage.
.2
Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to painting
operations. These items shall be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of
work in each area. No solvent shall be used to clean hardware that will remove permanent
lacquer finish on these items.
.3
Mask labels and specification plates occurring on equipment to be painted.
.4
Post "wet coating" signs and "no smoking" signs while work is in progress and while coatings
are curing.
.5
Keep oily rags, wastes and other combustible materials in closed metal containers and
remove at end of each work day. Take every precaution to avoid spontaneous combustion.
Work Schedule:
.1
Unless otherwise permitted, apply coatings only after all other Sections have completed their
work.
.2
Coordinate work of this Section with that of Section 07920 and review order of installation
with Consultant where sealants are installed adjacent to painted surfaces.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
o
.1
09900-2
.3
If it becomes necessary for the Owner to occupy areas of the building prior to their
completion, schedule work of this Section to hours when students have vacated building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Materials shall be "top line quality" products and shall be supplied by a single manufacturer except for
specialty products not available from paint manufacturer.
.2
Materials shall be low odour products, low-in VOC contents; only MPI qualified products with E2 or
better rating are acceptable.
.3
Paints shall be factory mixed unless otherwise specified, except any coating in paste or powder form,
or to be field-catalyzed shall be field-mixed in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
.4
Primers shall be as specified by manufacturer and fully compatible with finish coats.
.5
Stains shall be of the rapid dry, alkyd base type or pigment oil type.
.6
Varnishes shall be synthetic type.
.7
Shellac shall be pure white gum in pure grain alcohol.
.8
Thinners, cleaners: as recommended by paint manufacturer.
2.2
FINISHES
.1
Paint colours and other finishes will be selected by Consultant. Do not start work until after receiving
colour schedule.
.2
Colours selected by the Consultant will not necessarily be from manufacturer's standard colours.
.3
A variety of colours may be used. Consultant may select different colours for different elements such
as ductwork, bulkheads, exposed decks, slabs and structural steel. Include for up to 20 colours, not
including mechanical room colours listed below. Of these colours, up to 50% may be deep tones.
.4
Confirm gloss levels for all surfaces with Consultant before starting work. Unless otherwise indicated,
allow for the following:
.1
Architectural Trim: semi-gloss
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDITIONS OF SUBSTRATES
.1
Sound, non-dusting, and free of grease, oil, dirt, and other matter detrimental to adhesion and
appearance of coatings.
.2
Temperature: minimum 13 C.
.3
Moisture content: maximum 12%. Test for moisture content using moisture meter.
3.2
o
PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES
.1
All substrates: clean as required to produce an acceptable surface. If wood, metal or any other surface
to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing as specified, notify Consultant in writing or
assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory finish resulting.
.2
Wood generally: clean soiled surfaces; sand smooth and dust off; putty nail holes, splits, scratches,
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09900-3
after prime coat has been applied and dried; colour putty to match finish; putty stained wood after stain
application.
.3
Wood for paint: clean knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections of residue and seal with sealer before
applying prime coat.
.4
Bare ferrous metal: remove rust and scale; wash with solvent; chemically clean; apply coat of metal
primer.
.5
Previously primed metal: remove rust, oil, grease and loose shop paint by washing or wire brushing;
make good shop coat; feather out edges of touch-up.
.6
Hot dip galvanized steel: Brush blast.
.7
Unit masonry and concrete: fill minor cracks, holes and fissures with Polyfilla and smooth to a flush
surface. Texture filled areas to match surrounding surface.
.8
Plaster: fill minor cracks, holes and fissures with patching plaster, allow to dry, smooth to a flush
surface and texture filled area to match surrounding surface.
3.3
BACK PRIMING
.1
3.4
APPLICATION OF COATINGS
.1
Apply paint by brush or roller, except on wood and metal surfaces where paint shall be applied by
brush only.
.2
Spray painting may be permitted where deemed advantageous and shall be subject to Consultant's
approval. When spray painting is permitted, use only airless spray guns. Consultant may prohibit use
of spray painting at any time for such reasons as carelessness, poor masking or protective measures,
drifting paint fog, disturbance to other trades or failure to obtain a uniform satisfactory finish.
.3
Applied and cured coatings shall be uniform in thickness, sheen, colour and texture and free of brush
or roller marks, sags, crawls and other defects detrimental to appearance and performance.
.4
Regardless of the number of coats specified for any surface, apply sufficient paint to completely cover
and hide substrate and to produce a solid uniform appearance.
.5
Thoroughly mix materials before application. Use same brand of paint for primer, intermediate and
finish coats.
.6
Where two or more coats of same paint are to be applied, undercoats shall be tinted in lighter shades
of final coat to differentiate from final coat.
.7
Touch up suction spots after application of first coat. Sand lightly between coats with fine sandpaper.
.8
Each coat of finish shall be dry and hard before succeeding coats are applied with a minimum of 24
hours between coats, unless manufacturer's instructions state otherwise. Do not proceed with any coat
until the last preceding coat is approved by the Consultant.
.9
Stained woodwork shall be covered with a uniform coat of stain and wiped off if required. Wood shall
have uniform shade. Match stain so that dissimilar woods have uniform finished appearance.
3.5
PATCHING/TOUCH-UP
.1
3.6
Back prime wood schedule for paint or enamel finish immediately on arrival at site with exterior primer
as applicable.
Prior to takeover of project by Owner, inspect work of this Section and touch-up or refinish damaged
finishes and finishes unsatisfactory to Consultant.
SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09900-4
.1
.1
Paint or otherwise finish surfaces of all exterior wood work.
.2
Where exposed to view paint bare metals, previously primed metals and zinc coated metals
unless specified otherwise.
.3
Unless specifically indicated otherwise paint all rooftop equipment and components,
regardless of material and finish, including but not necessarily limited to mechanical rooftop
equipment, vent stack flashings, sleeve flashings window washing anchors, but not including
prefinished sheet steel flashings.
.4
Woodwork, painted:
1 coat alkyd enamel undercoat
2 coats acrylic latex
.5
Metal Finishing:
.1
Metal, hot dip galvanized:
1 coat epoxy primer
2 coats aliphatic polyurethane
.2
Metal, zinc coated (inorganic zinc rich primer):
1 coat epoxy primer
2 coats aliphatic polyurethane
.3
3.7
Colour 1 = Metallic series 2624 ‘Bright Silver’
EXISTING SURFACES
.1
Repaint exterior woodwork surfaces in their entirety.
.2
All existing surfaces to be repainted shall be stripped to bare wood and to receive a minimum of 1
primer and 2 finish coats of paint. Additional coats as required to attain a uniform colour and surface.
.3
Prepare existing surfaces to be repainted as follows:
.1
Paint stripping to bare wood by Section 06400. Clean as required to remove dirt, dust, oil,
grease, and any other foreign matter which would prevent proper bonding of new finish.
.2
Peeled, chipped, scratched and otherwise damaged surfaces shall be filled, sanded and
repaired as required to provide consistent surface with texture matching that of adjacent
area.
.3
Treat bare areas as specified for new work.
END
22/09/2011
WESPEC
09900-5
SECTION 10100 - MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Submit detailed shop drawings showing fabrication and erection requirements, materials, dimensions
and finishes.
.3
Submit markerboard maintenance instructions for inclusion into maintenance manual.
1.3
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.2
Deliver boards to site in properly packed crates. Store materials in dry area within building.
1.4
WARRANTY
.1
1.5
At no cost to Owner replace markerboards showing any manufacturing defects which would impair
proper use of board for 10 years from date of Substantial Performance.
PROVISION
.1
Provide marker boards and tackboards as shown on drawings. (PT Addendum 2)
.2
In addition provide a 1200 mm x 1500 tackboard adjacent to each classroom entry in new
addition. (PT Addendum 2)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEMS
.1
2.2
Fixed boards: Series 200, by Architectural School Products, or equivalent product by Global.
MARKERBOARDS
.1
12.7 mm thick porcelain enamelled board with minimum 0.75 mm thick steel writing surface laminated
to 11 mm impregnated fibreboard core and 0.48 mm thick stretcher levelled zinc coated steel back
sheet.
.2
Porcelain enamel finish shall meet requirements of Porcelain Enamel Institute Standard S104.
.3
Acceptable products: Vitrite by Architectural School Products, or equivalent product by Global.
2.3
TACKBOARDS
.1
6 mm thick natural cork, fine grain, factory-laminated to 6 mm thick particleboard.
.2
Acceptable Product; #1 pebble grain cork tackboard by Architectural School Products, or equivalent
product by Global.
2.4
TRIM
.1
Fixed Boards:
.1
.2
.3
Material: Extruded aluminum sections, 6063-T5 alloy.
Perimeter trim: Series 205 by A.S.P.
Divider strip: No. 207 by A.S.P.
22/09/2011
WESPEC
10100-1
SECTION 10100 - MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
.4
2.5
Rail below each markerboard: A.S.P. #212 and #264
FINISHES
.1
Markerboards: white.
.2
Trim: clear etched and anodized.
2.6
FABRICATION
.1
Trim joints shall be hairline type, neat and tight; mitre corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
.2
Install boards plumb, square, in true plane and fasten securely to supporting work.
.3
Accurately cut, machine and fit to form tight, flush hairline joints and connections at trim and rails.
Mitre corners. Cap ends of rails with cast aluminum end fittings.
.4
All fastenings shall be concealed.
.5
Ensure that where boards are joined the joint is uniform, neat and tight, and the boards are properly
aligned. Provide continuous steel spline.
.6
Upon completion of work, clean down and remove stains. Leave installation perfectly clean.
.7
Affix a label to upper right hand corner of each markerboard unit, stating manufacturer's recommended
care and maintenance instructions.
.8
Upon completion of installation, board surfaces with temporary protective coverings as recommended
by board manufacturer and leave in place until completion of all work or until directed by Consultant to
be removed.
END
22/09/2011
WESPEC
10100-2
SECTION 10200 - METAL LOUVRES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Metal Fabrications
Section 05500
.2
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100
.3
Thermal Insulation
Section 07200
.4
Membrane Roofing
Section 07500
.5
Flashing and Sheet Metal:
Section 07620
.2
Sealants:
Section 07920
.3
Grilles and registers except as specified herein:
1.3
Division 15
.1
Deflection: louvre members shall deflect not more than 1/180 of span between supports when
subjected to positive and negative wind loads based on OBC 30 year probability.
.2
Vibration: louvre members shall not vibrate or rattle.
.3
Design louvres for minimum 45% free air (mechanical to review).
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit detailed shop drawings, showing profiles, sizes, materials, finishes, anchorage and installation
details.
.2
Submit two minimum 100 x 200 mm samples of clear anodized aluminium finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
.1
Aluminum extrusions: AA6063-T52 alloy.
.2
Fastenings: aluminum or stainless steel for aluminum louvres
.3
Exterior Louvres, Aluminum:
.1
Louvres: stationary, 150 mm deep with drainable blades: Model #A6097 by Construction
Specialties Inc., or equivalent product by K.N. Crowder, E.H. Price or M.W. McGill.
.2
Bird Screen: 12 mm mesh, 1.5 mm double crimped aluminum wire; extruded aluminum
frame, corners mitred.
.3
Sill extensions: extruded aluminum, depth to suit wall condition, concealed clip anchors, drip
deflectors at sill ends.
.4
Finish: all exposed exterior surfaces: clear anodized finish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
22/09/2011
WESPEC
10200-1
SECTION 10200 - METAL LOUVRES
.1
Provide louvres in sizes and locations indicated on architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings.
In case of conflict between drawings, include for larger louvre size but seek Consultant's direction prior
to fabricating. Unless specifically indicated otherwise provide aluminum louvres at all locations.
.2
Install louvres plumb and level and securely fasten to adjacent building elements.
.3
Provide concealed mullions as required to keep louvre blades within specified deflection limit.
.4
Allow for expansion and contraction of metal components without detrimental effects.
.5
with bituminous paint or other means approved by Consultant.
.6
Install bird screens at all exterior aluminum louvres.
.7
Install sill extensions. Where shown, install trim matching louvre material and finish.
.8
Install insulated blank off panels at unused portions of louvres, except where louvres are required to
be left open.
END
22/09/2011
WESPEC
10200-2
SECTION 10240- ROOF SCREEN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
1.3
Steel support framing::
Section 05500
.1
Deflection: screen members shall deflect not more than 1/180 of span between supports when
subjected to positive and negative wind loads based on OBC 30 year probability.
.2
Vibration: screen members shall not vibrate or rattle.
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit detailed shop drawings, showing profiles, sizes, materials, finishes, anchorage and installation
details.
.2
Submit two minimum 2” x 4” samples of colour selected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM
.1
2.2
C/S Vert-A-Cade 304 by Construction Specialties or equivalent product by K.N. Crowder, E.H. Price
orM.W.McGill.
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
.1
Aluminum extrusions: AA6063-T52 alloy.
.2
Fastenings: aluminum or stainless steel.
.3
Louvred roof screens: vertical extruded aluminum blades 4” deep spaced at 4” o.c. complete with
spacer brackets and vertical framing members.
.4
Finish: all exposed surfaces: hardcolour anodized AA M12 C22 A42 Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Provide roof screen in sizes and locations indicated.
.2
Install screen plumb and level and securely fasten to supporting work.
.3
Allow for expansion and contraction of metal components without detrimental effects.
.4
with bituminous paint or other means approved by Consultant.
PROJECT NO. 09-100
22/09/2011
KMAI
10240-1
SECTION 10240- ROOF SCREEN
END
PROJECT NO. 0602
05/SEP/2006
WESPEC/TE
10240-2
SECTION 10800 - WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
Metal Fabrications
.2
Hand dryers:
1.3
Section 05500
Division 16
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Submit manufacturer's catalogue cut of each component required.
.3
Submit a washroom accessories schedule indicating all accessories required, on a room by room
basis, showing model number, finish and mounting height.
1.4
WARRANTY
.1
1.5
At no cost to Owner, replace mirrors should defects in silvering occur within a period of 5 years from
date of Substantial Performance.
PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
.3
Deliver, store and handle components so as to prevent damage, distortion and corrosion. Store in an
enclosed dry and protected area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Fabricate work true to dimensions, square and plumb.
.2
Thickness of metal shall be adequate for the various conditions, and intended uses.
.3
Finished work shall be free from warping, open seams, weld marks, rattles and other defects. Drilling
shall be reamed and exposed edges finished smooth.
.4
Fastenings shall be concealed or theftproof type where possible. Exposed fastenings shall be neatly
executed and shall be of the same material and finish as the base metal on which they occur.
.5
Accessories required, in each case, are specified by a reference to a particular product by one
manufacturer. The products listed shall serve to establish a standard of acceptance. Accessories of
the same materials, construction and finishes, similar in function, design appearance and conforming
to the standard of those specified, manufactured by the following are acceptable:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.2
Bobrick
Bradley
Frost
Watrous
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES (PT Addendum 2: items in bold italic)
.1
Toilet tissue dispenser (TPH-1 ): supplied only by Owner.
22/09/2011
KMAI
10800-1
SECTION 10800 - WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
.2
Sanitary napkin disposal (SNR): Bobrick B-270, surface mounted, stainless steel No. 4 finish,
embossed "napkin disposal" label; self-closing door; deodorant block holder.
.3
Paper towel dispenser (PTD) supplied only by Owner.
.4
Sanitary napkin vendor (SNV): Bobrick B-2800 stainless steel, surface mounted, 50¢ operation, dual
vendor.
.5
Mirror (MIR-5): No. 1 quality, 6 mm thick mirror guaranteed against silver spoilage for five years;
heavy galvanized steel back, stainless steel frame with mitred corners; tamperproof mounting: 450 x
610 mm, Bobrick B-290 Series.
.7
Robe hook (RH): Bobrick B-671, heavy duty, stainless steel, concealed mounting. Provide one
robe hook per individual washroom.
.8
Grab bars (GB-1 and GB-2): Bobrick B-6206 Series, 38 mm diameter, stainless steel, satin finish,
concealed mounting, meeting requirements of OBC. Provide grab bars in lengths as shown on
drawings.
.9
Soap dispenser (SD): supplied only by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install all washroom accessories, including Owner supplied items.
.2
Install components at locations shown. Where location is not given install as directed by Consultant.
.3
Fastenings shall be non-corrosive type.
.4
Provide mounting and anchorage devices to be built into walls and other construction elements as
required to securely anchor components in place.
.5
Securely anchor components in place. Method of fastenings shall ensure that components will be
capable of withstanding expected loads without movement.
.6
Install mirrors with concealed wall hangers and lock in place with theftproof screws.
.7
Insulate accessory surfaces to prevent electrolysis due to contact with dissimilar metal surfaces. Use
bituminous paint or other approved means.
3.2
.1
Upon completion of work or when directed, remove all traces of protective coatings or paper.
.2
Test mechanisms, hinges, locks and latches and where necessary, adjust and lubricate and ensure
that accessories are in perfect working order.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
10800-2
SECTION 12490 - WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
RELATED WORK
.1
1.3
Electrical power connections:
Division 16
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1
Sun Project
.2
Silent Gliss
.3
Solarfective
.2
Installer qualifications: forces in the direct employ or under the control of the system manufacturer,
skilled, trained and experienced in work of similar scope and complexity of work specified herein.
.3
Shade fabric:
1.4
.1
Shade fabric shall hang flat, without buckling or distortion.
.2
Fabric edge, when trimmed shall hang straight without ravelling.
.3
An unguided roller shade cloth shall roll true and straight, without shifting sideways more
than 3 mm in either direction due to warp, distortion or weave design.
.4
Fabric shall pass "Small Scale Vertical Burn Test" in accordance with CAN/ULC-S109M87.
SUBMITTALS
.1
.2
Submit detailed shop drawings showing configurations, materials, finishes, methods of operation,
wiring diagrams, joint locations and method of joining, anchorage details.
.3
Submit duplicate, minimum 200 x 200 mm samples of each shade fabric required.
.4
Submit duplicate, minimum 50 x 100 mm samples of each metal finish / colour required.
.5
Submit samples of each type of hembar required.
.6
Provide operating and maintenance instructions for inclusion into maintenance manual. Include
instructions on care, maintenance and cleaning of shade fabrics.
.7
Submit test results from recognized independent testing agency, acceptable to jurisdictional authorities
showing that fire hazard classification of shade fabric meets regulatory requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUALLY OPERATED VERTICAL SHADES
.1
Product description: manually operated, ceiling mounted system:
Window shade product : Deko DKO1-LL32-R70 Colour White. by Sun Project Group or equivalent product by
22/09/2011
KMAI
12490-1
SECTION 12490 - WINDOW SHADES
other manufacturers listed above.
.2
Operation: chain operated with infinite positioning, at left or right hand location directed by Consultant.
.3
Assembly: fully factory assembled shade units consisting of 2 symmetrical end brackets, shade tube,
extruded aluminum fascia, hembar and shade fabric. Removal of unit shall not require disassembly of
unit.
.4
End bracket: 77 x 96 (?) mm, two-piece ABS construction with a 64 (?)mm diameter nylon drive
sprocket to fit a maximum 68mm cassette. Bracket finish/colour shall match fascia.
.5
Shade tube: 40 mm diameter heavy duty extruded aluminum tube, 1.6g mm thick, with internal
continuous fins for strength and drive capability.
.6
Fascia: curved extruded aluminum, 1.7 mm thick, complete with 3 continuous screw flutes. Finish:
clear anodized or custom painted in colour selected by Consultant.
.7
Drive assembly:
.8
2.2
.1
Counter balancing mechanism designed to offset weight of shade and give finger tip control.
.2
Factory set for size and travel of shade.
.3
Allowing field adjustments from exterior of shade without disassembly of hardware.
.4
Built-in shock absorber to prevent chain breakage under normal use.
.5
Drive chain: No. 10 stainless steel bead chain formed in a continuous loop; passing 90 lbs.
test; with stops at highest and lowest positions to prevent overwinding and unrolling.
.6
Clutch design allowing shade to be pulled on the hembar.
Hembar: exposed extruded aluminum profile, full width of shade fabric, complete with end caps.
SHADE FABRICS
.1
Sun control fabric:
.1
Shade cloths shall be woven of .018 opaque, vinyl coated polyester yarn consisting of
approximately 79% vinyl and 21% 500 denier polyester core yarn. The fabric shall be
tensioned in the finishing range prior to heat setting to keep the warp ends straight and
minimize or eliminate weave distortion to keep the fabric flat. The fabric shall be
dimensionally stable.
.2
3% openness factor; colours selected by Consultant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install shades at locations required.
.2
Install work of this Section, plumb, level, square, in required configurations and locations, securely
anchored to supporting work.
.3
For electrically operated shades provide electrical wiring from motor to control and limit switches.
Coordinate with Division 16 for required connection.
.4
Make all systems fully operational.
.5
Check test operation of each unit and, if necessary make adjustments to ensure proper operation.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
12490-2
SECTION 14210 - ACCESSIBILITY ELEVATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Unenclosed, self-contained vertical platform wheelchair lift.
RELATED WORK
.1
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete shaftway and anchor placement.
.2
Section 04800 - Masonry Assemblies: Masonry shaftway and anchor placement.
.3
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in framed construction for lift attachment.
.4
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board shaftway.
.5
Division 16 - Electrical: Dedicated telephone service and wiring connections.
.6
Division 16 - Electrical: Lighting and wiring connections at top of shaft.
.7
Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical power service and wiring connections.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
.2
ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment.
.3
ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts.
.4
CSA B44 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
.5
CSA B355 - Lifts for Persons with Physical Disabilities.
.6
ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
.7
NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
.8
CSA - National Electric Code.
1.3
.1
Provide platform lifts in compliance with:
PART 1
PART 2
PART 3
PART 4
.2
.3
1.4
ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts.
ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment.
NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
Provide platform lifts in compliance with:
PART 5 CSA B355 - Lifts for Persons with Physical Disabilities.
PART 6 CSA B44.1/ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment.
PART 7 CSA - National Electric Code.
Seismic Design: In accordance with OBC.
SUBMITTALS
22/09/2011
KMAI
14210-1
.1
.2
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
.1
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions, including preparation, storage and
handling requirements.
.2
Include complete description of performance and operating characteristics.
.3
Show maximum and average power demands.
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
Show typical details of assembly, erection and anchorage.
.2
Include wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal systems.
.3
Show complete layout and location of equipment, including required clearances and
coordination with shaftway.
.4
Selection Samples: For each finished product specified, provide two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
.5
Verification Samples: For each finished product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150
mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 10 years experience in manufacturing of vertical
platform lifts, with evidence of experience with similar installations of type specified.
.2
Installer Qualifications: Licensed to install equipment of this scope, with evidence of experience with
specified equipment. Installer shall maintain an adequate stock of replacement parts, have qualified
people available to ensure fulfillment of maintenance and callback service without unreasonable loss
of time in reaching project site.
1.6
.1
.2
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
.3
Store components off the ground in a dry covered area, protected from adverse weather conditions.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
.1
1.8
Do not use wheelchair lift for hoisting materials or personnel during construction period.
WARRANTY
.1
Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for one year
following completion of installation.
.2
Extended Warranty: Provide an extended manufacturer’s warranty for the entire warranty period
covering the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for the following additional extended period
beyond the initial one year warranty. Preventive Maintenance agreement required. Five additional
years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
22/09/2011
KMAI
14210-2
.1
Acceptable Manufacturer: Garaventa Lift; Canada - BC V3W 7B3. Web www.garaventa.ca.
OR
.2
2.2
Savaria Concord Lifts Inc, Canada – L6T 4K3. Web www.concordelevator.com
HYDRAULIC VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT
.1
Savaria Model Prolift SCL (1L) or ELVORON CPL.
.2
The lift is to be a vertical platform lift consisting of a hydraulic tower with a lifting platform to be
enclosed by 190 blockwork clad with 90 brickwork.
.3
The following preparatory work to receive the lift specified in this section is part of the work of other
sections:
.1
Permanent three phase 20 amps/208 volts power to operate lift to be provided from a
lockable fused/cartridge type disconnect switch with auxiliary contacts for battery operation.
Temporary power may be provided to expedite installation of lift.
.2
Provide a plumb and square hoistway with smooth interior surfaces, including fascias or
furring of the hoistway interior.
.3
Provide substantial, level pit floor slab as indicated on the lift contractor’s shop drawings.
.4
Provide rough openings as per lift contractor’s shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
.2
Verify shaft and machine space are of correct size and within tolerances.
.3
Verify required landings and openings are of correct size and within tolerances.
.4
Verify electrical rough-in is at correct location.
.5
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
.2
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install platform lift in accordance with the applicable regulatory requirements including ASME A 17.1,
ASME A 18.1, ADA, OBC & manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
Install platform lifts in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements including CSA B355, and
manufacturer's instructions.
.3
.4
Install system components and connect to building utilities.
Accommodate equipment in space indicated.
.5
Startup equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
22/09/2011
KMAI
14210-3
.6
3.4
Adjust for smooth operation.
.1
Perform tests in compliance with ASME A 17.1 or A18.1 and as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
.2
Perform tests in compliance with CSA B355 and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
.3
Schedule tests with agencies and Architect, Owner, and Contractor present.
3.5
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products until completion of project.
.2
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END
22/09/2011
KMAI
14210-4

Senator O`Connor Senator O`Connor Phase 2 - Struct

Transcription

Similar documents

party for a living

Pay Application #4 - the Public Building Commission of Chicago

introduction torqueflite a727, a904

introduction

Look at me now! - Cambridge Weight Plan

NISSAN RE4R01A Technical Service Information

AAA Kempinski Hotel, Vilnius

Mark Rycraft

INDEX THM 4L60-E

THM 200-4R